JP2020137718A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of efficient attachment work of a board case and space saving of the board case.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a harness connected to a connection part SS10 of a sub relay substrate, and the substrate holding unit includes a sub relay substrate accommodating space 8205 for accommodating the sub relay substrate, a sub relay substrate cover 8210 for covering a sub relay substrate accommodating space in which the sub control substrate is accommodated and at least a part of the sub relay substrate, a sub control substrate cover for covering at least a part of the sub control substrate, and a bracket 8100 for holding the sub relay substrate cover 8210 and the sub control substrate cover. The bracket 8100 has a harness guide 8140 for guiding the harness, and the sub relay substrate accommodating space 8205 is formed by the sub relay substrate cover 8210 and the bracket 8100.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 249

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal, etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that the start lever is operated by the player, and the plurality of reels are used. Detects that the start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels have been pressed by the player, and outputs a signal requesting the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. The operation of the stepping motor is based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the driving force of each reel to each reel, and the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls, rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, it draws a lot based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”) There is known a so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected.

As such a conventional game machine, a game machine having a structure in which a board case containing a board for controlling the game machine is attached to the upper back surface of a front door that is openably and closably attached to a cabinet is known (for example). , Patent Document 1).
According to such a game machine, since the board case containing the board is attached to the upper part of the back surface of the front door, it is possible to save space inside the cabinet.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-85842

By the way, if each substrate case is arranged one by one as in the game machine of Patent Document 1, there is a problem that it takes time to attach the substrate case at the time of manufacturing. Further, in order to secure space inside the game machine due to an increase in the number of production devices and an increase in size, further space saving of the board case has been required.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the substrate case and to save the space of the substrate case.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(1) A substrate holding unit (for example, a substrate) capable of holding a first substrate (for example, a sub relay board SS1 or the like) and a second substrate (for example, a sub control substrate SS2 or the like) and the first substrate and the second substrate. Holding unit 8000 etc.) and
A gaming machine (eg, gaming machine 1 or the like) including a harness connected to at least one of the connecting portions (for example, connecting portion SS10 and the like) of the first substrate and the second substrate.
The substrate holding unit is
A first accommodation space in which the first substrate is accommodated, a second accommodation space in which the second substrate is accommodated, and
A first cover (for example, a sub-relay board cover 8210) that covers at least a part of the first board, and
A second cover (for example, sub-control board cover 8320, etc.) that covers at least a part of the second board, and
A holding member (for example, bracket 8100, etc.) for holding the first cover and the second cover, and
With
The holding member has a harness guide (for example, harness guide 8140) that guides the harness.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first accommodation space is formed by the first cover and the holding member.

According to the invention of (1), the gaming machine includes a first substrate and a second substrate, a harness connected to at least one connection portion of the first substrate or the second substrate, and the first substrate and the second substrate. A substrate holding unit capable of holding a substrate is provided. The substrate holding unit includes a first accommodating space, a second accommodating space, a first cover, a second cover, and a holding member. The first substrate is accommodated in the first accommodation space. The second substrate is accommodated in the second accommodation space. The first cover covers at least a part of the first substrate. The second cover covers at least a part of the second substrate. As the holding member, the first cover and the second cover are held.
Then, the holding member has a harness guide that guides the harness.
Further, the first accommodation space is formed by the first cover and the holding member.

According to such a configuration, since the substrate holding unit can hold a plurality of types (first substrate, second substrate) of substrates, compared with the case where one substrate is housed and held in one substrate case. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case.
Further, the first accommodation space in which the first substrate is accommodated is formed of a first cover and a holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover. That is, a part of the wall surface that divides the first accommodation space is composed of a holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover. As a result, the holding member functions as a holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover, and a wall member forming a part of the wall surface for partitioning the first accommodation space. Therefore, as compared with the case where the holding member and the wall member are separately provided, the number of parts is reduced, the efficiency of the board case mounting work can be improved, and the space of the board case is saved. It becomes possible to plan.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case and save the space of the board case.

Further, the holding member has a harness guide that guides a harness connected to at least one connection portion of the first substrate or the second substrate. As a result, in the case of reuse, maintenance, etc., when the holding member is removed from the game machine in a state where the first substrate or the second substrate is accommodated in the first accommodation space or the second accommodation space, the holding member is connected to these substrates. With the harness guided by the harness guide, the holding member and the harness can be removed together. Therefore, the work efficiency at the time of disassembling the game machine is improved. Further, since the external force applied to the harness can be borne by the harness guide, it is possible to prevent such an external force from being applied to the connecting portion of the substrate and damaging the connecting portion.

(2) The harness guide includes an insertion portion (for example, an insertion portion 8142, etc.).
The holding member includes an opening into which the insertion portion can be inserted (for example, a harness guide holding portion 8130 or the like).
The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the harness guide is locked to the holding member by inserting the insertion portion into the opening.

According to the invention of (2), the harness guide is locked to the holding member by inserting the insertion portion of the harness guide into the opening of the holding member, so that the harness guide can be attached as needed. It becomes. As a result, when it is necessary to guide the harness, a harness guide is attached to guide the harness, which makes it easier to handle the harness and improves work efficiency. When it is not necessary to guide the harness, the harness guide By not attaching, it is possible to save space in the board case.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case and to save the space of the board case.

It is a front perspective view of a game machine. It is a back perspective view of the game machine. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of the game machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are in the open state. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a projector apparatus and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mounting state of a mirror mechanism. It is a vertical sectional view of a display unit. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a projector apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view of the projector device. It is a top view which shows the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal for fixing a projector device. It is sectional drawing of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal along the line XXVI-XXVI of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the positioning method of the upper pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the posture adjustment method of the lower pedestal. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. It is a top view which shows the state which the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are assembled. FIG. 19 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 viewed from diagonally forward. It is a figure which looked at the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 from an oblique rear view. It is a perspective view of the case which accommodates the internal component of a projector mechanism. It is a perspective view which shows the state which attached the case to the lower pedestal. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the upper wall part of a projector cover is removed. It is a top view of the projector cover with the upper wall part removed. FIG. 25 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow LL of the projector cover shown in FIG. 25 and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. It is the figure which looked at the projector cover with the upper wall part removed diagonally from above. It is a front view of the projector cover with the upper wall part removed. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow MM of the projector cover shown in FIG. It is a perspective view of a blind. It is a top view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall part of a projector cover removed. It is a figure which shows the state which removed the fan for the opening vicinity and the duct cover in the cross section along the arrow view NN of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which attached the fan for the vicinity of an opening and the duct cover to the blind shown in FIG. 30, and arranged the case. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the right punching is removed from the irradiation unit shown in FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a fan for the vicinity of an opening and a duct cover are attached to the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 32. FIG. 3 is a right side view showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening is removed in the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 35. It is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and the fan for the vicinity of an opening. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the projector cover and the fan near an opening from the rear and the bottom. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the fan near the opening viewed from the front and the bottom. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which attached the blind and the duct cover from the left. It is a perspective view which looked at the projector cover, a blind, and a duct cover from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, the blind, and the duct cover shown in FIG. 41. It is an exploded perspective view of a blind and a duct cover. It is a figure for demonstrating the method of attaching the upper door mechanism to a cabinet. It is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement position of the intake fan and the exhaust fan. It is a figure which shows the air flow path which can be formed inside a projector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the decorative unit and the frame member of a pachinko machine from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of a display unit. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a display unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which disassembled the projector and the mirror from the display unit shown in FIG. 53. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a state in which light is projected from the projector in a state where the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 52. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the irradiation range of the light projected from a projector, and the screen on a cabinet side. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. It is a front view of a game machine. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector and the screen on the cabinet side. (B) is a diagram showing how the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen is incident on the door side right screen. (C) is a diagram showing how the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen is incident on the door side left screen. It is a figure for demonstrating the image displayed on the cabinet side screen, the door side right screen, and the door side left screen. It is a figure for demonstrating the image displayed on the cabinet side screen, the door side right screen, and the door side left screen. It is a vertical sectional view of an upper door mechanism and a cabinet. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view which looked at the light-transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower holding member, the upper holding member, and the lower frame from the rear. It is a perspective view which saw the light-transmitting plate and the screen sheet from the rear, while the lower holding member and the upper holding member were seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper holding member and the upper frame from below. It is a perspective view which looked at the light-transmitting plate, the screen sheet, and the lower frame from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper frame, the 1st structure, the 2nd structure, the 3rd structure, the 4th structure, and a screen sheet from the rear. It is a perspective view of a light transmitting plate, a screen sheet, a lower frame, an LED substrate, and a light guide member seen from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the light-transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, and a light guide member from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the cross section of a light transmitting plate, a screen sheet, a lower frame, an LED substrate, and a light guide member from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism, the hooking part, and the front side projecting member from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism, the hooking part, and the front side projecting member from the side. It is a perspective view which looked at the cabinet, the hooking part, and the front side projecting member from the side. It is a right side view of the cross section of the upper door mechanism, the cabinet, the hooking part, and the front side protruding member. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from below. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the game machine with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism removed from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which light is projected from a projector device from the side. It is a perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the side. It is a perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the rear. It is a vertical sectional view of a cabinet. It is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, the lid for occlusion, and the back wall of a cabinet. It is a rear view of the game machine in a state where the closing lid is removed from the back wall. It is a partially enlarged view around the operation window in the game machine shown in FIG. 90. It is an exploded perspective view of the lid for closing and the back wall of a cabinet. It is an exploded perspective view of the lid for closing and the back wall of a cabinet. It is a partially enlarged view around the operation window in the game machine with the closing lid attached to the back wall. It is a front view for demonstrating the schematic structure inside a cabinet. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit is removed from the inside of the cabinet shown in FIG. 95. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the irradiation unit is attached to the back wall of a cabinet. It is a perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the side. It is a perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the rear. It is a vertical sectional view of a cabinet. It is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, the lid for occlusion, and the back wall of a cabinet. It is a rear view of the game machine in a state where the closing lid is removed from the back wall. It is a partially enlarged view around the operation window in the game machine shown in FIG. 102. It is an exploded perspective view of the lid for closing and the back wall of a cabinet. It is an exploded perspective view of the lid for closing and the back wall of a cabinet. It is a perspective view which looked at the lid for closure from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the lid for closure from the front. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the back wall viewed from the front. It is a partially enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the lid for closing is attached to the back wall. It is sectional drawing which shows the closing lid and the back wall in the state shown in FIG. 109. It is a perspective view of the screw for hooking an irradiation unit. It is a partially enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the screw for hooking an irradiation unit is temporarily fixed to the back wall. It is a front view of the projector cover plate. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover plate seen from slightly above. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the projector cover and the projector cover plate from the rear. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around the first cavity. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around the protrusion for first engagement. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which the 1st engaging protrusion is housed in 1st cavity. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which the 1st engaging protrusion is housed in 1st cavity. It is sectional drawing around the screw for hooking an irradiation unit and the screw for attaching a lid in a state where the closing lid and the irradiation unit are attached to the back wall. It is sectional drawing which shows the lid for closing, the back wall, and the projector cover plate. It is a front view which shows the periphery of the opening of the back wall and the projector cover plate disassembled. It is a partially enlarged front view of the inside of the cabinet in the state shown in FIG. 97. It is a perspective view of a cover part. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the projector cover and the duct cover from the left side. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the projector cover and the duct cover from the right side. It is sectional drawing in the state which the duct cover is seen from the rear. It is sectional drawing of the cover part. It is sectional drawing of the cover part. It is a perspective view which looked at the cover part from the right side. It is a perspective view which shows the state which a cover part and a case are connected with a duct adapter. It is a perspective view which looked at the duct adapter from the left front. It is a perspective view of the duct adapter seen from the right rear. It is a left side view of the cross section in the left side part of a duct adapter. It is a right side view of the cross section in the right side part of a duct adapter. It is a front view of the duct adapter. It is a left side view of the state where the duct adapter is cut near the center of the connecting portion. It is a perspective view of a case. It is a partial enlarged perspective view around the right side part in a duct adapter. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around the first right side protrusion and the second right side protrusion in the duct adapter. It is a partially enlarged front view of the right side protrusion shown in FIG. 140. It is a perspective view which looked at the duct cover from the rear. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the state where the duct adapter is connected to the duct cover as seen from the direction perpendicular to the front lower side wall surface of the duct cover. It is sectional drawing of the duct cover and the duct adapter in the state shown in FIG. 143. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around the groove for engaging an adapter in a projector cover. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around the first protrusion in the projector cover. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around the 2nd to 5th protrusions in a projector cover. It is a partially enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the duct adapter is connected to the projector cover. It is sectional drawing of the projector cover and the duct adapter in the state shown in FIG. 148. It is sectional drawing in the state which punching is attached to the duct cover. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the duct cover and punching from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the duct cover and punching from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the duct cover and punching from below. It is a front view for demonstrating the schematic structure inside a cabinet. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit and the reel adapter are removed from the inside of the cabinet shown in FIG. 154. (A) is a schematic view of the game machine according to the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front in a state where the front door is closed. (B) is a schematic view of the game machine according to the seventh embodiment as viewed from the front with the front door closed. (C) is a schematic view of the inside of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front. (D) is a schematic view of the inside of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment as viewed from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel adapter from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel adapter from the right rear. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the right rear part of a reel adapter. It is a rear view of the right rear part shown in FIG. 159. It is sectional drawing in the lower protrusion part of the right rear part shown in FIG. 159. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel adapter from the bottom. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter viewed from below. It is a front view of the state where the reel adapter is cut in the vertical direction in the left-right direction. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel adapter from above. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around a step recess in a state where the reel adapter is cut in a vertical direction in the front-rear direction. It is a perspective view of a reel unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the right unit is removed from the reel unit shown in FIG. 167. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel frame from the bottom. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel frame from the rear. It is a perspective view of a motor frame. It is a perspective view of a middle board. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the reel adapter is mounted on the middle board. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the reel adapter was slightly shifted with respect to the middle board from the state shown in FIG. 174. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around the step recess in a state where the reel adapter and the middle board shown in FIG. 174 are cut in the vertical direction in the front-rear direction. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel adapter and the middle board shown in FIG. 174 from the side. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the state where the reel adapter and the middle board shown in FIG. 177 are cut in the vertical direction in the front-rear direction. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the reel unit is mounted on a reel adapter. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is shifted downward with respect to the reel unit from the state shown in FIG. 179. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the state in which the reel adapter and the reel frame in the state shown in FIG. 179 are cut in the vertical direction in the left-right direction. It is sectional drawing in the state which the reel unit is fastened to a reel adapter. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel adapter and the reel frame in the state shown in FIG. 179 from the rear. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the state where the reel adapter and the reel frame shown in FIG. 183 are cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the reel unit is mounted on a middle board. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the state where the reel unit and the middle board shown in FIG. 185 are cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction. It is a front view of a lumbar panel. It is a perspective view which looked at the lumbar panel from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the lumbar panel from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the lumbar panel from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the lumbar panel from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower panel film from a little above. It is sectional drawing of the lower panel film. It is a schematic diagram of the cut surface of the lower panel film shown in FIG. 193. It is a perspective view which shows the state which arranged the lower panel frame on the front side of the lower panel film shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower panel base from the front and slightly above. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower panel base from diagonally below. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower panel base from the rear and slightly above. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the lower panel base viewed from the rear and slightly below. It is a perspective view which looked at the back of a lower panel from a little above. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower panel film from the rear. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the back of the lower panel viewed from the rear and slightly below. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower panel frame from the front. It is a rear view of the lower panel frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the bottom of the lower panel from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the bottom of the lower panel from the rear. It is a perspective view of the lower panel right and the lower panel left viewed from the left rear side. It is a perspective view which saw the lower panel right and the lower panel left from the right rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which the lower panel frame was attached to the lower panel base from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which the lower panel frame was attached to the lower panel base from the rear. It is a perspective view from the rear view of the state in which the back of the lower panel is locked to the lower panel base and the lower panel frame in the state shown in FIG. 210. It is sectional drawing of the lower panel base and the back of a lower panel in the state shown in FIG. 211. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the lower panel base, the lower panel frame, and the state in which the lower panel lower portion is attached to the back of the lower panel as viewed from the rear in the state shown in FIG. 211. It is sectional drawing of the lower panel base, the back of a lower panel, and the lower part of a lower panel in the state shown in FIG. 213. It is a front perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 9th Embodiment. It is the back side perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is the back side perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the upper door mechanism which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram explaining the prior art about a mask member. It is a conceptual diagram explaining the prior art about a mask member. It is a conceptual diagram explaining the prior art about a mask member. It is a conceptual diagram explaining the prior art about a mask member. It is a conceptual diagram explaining the prior art about a mask member. It is a conceptual diagram explaining the mask member which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram explaining the application example of the mask member which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the mask member which concerns on 9th Embodiment from the front. It is a front perspective view of the middle panel which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the state in which the LED substrate is attached to the middle panel which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the dot matrix production apparatus. It is a front perspective view which looked at the cover member from below. It is a figure explaining the procedure of attaching a cover member to a middle panel, and is the perspective view seen from the rear. It is a figure explaining the procedure of attaching a cover member to a middle panel, and is the perspective view seen from the front. It is a front perspective view of a decorative film. It is a figure explaining the design area of a decorative film, and is the front view. It is an enlarged sectional view of the lower end side of the middle panel. It is a front view of the inside of the cabinet of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the inside of the cabinet of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a side view of the substrate holding unit of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure seen from the surface side of the substrate holding unit of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a perspective view seen from the surface side of the substrate holding unit of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the surface side of the substrate holding unit of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a cross-sectional view of AA'shown in FIG. 242. It is a figure which showed typically the substrate holding unit of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the bracket of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment, and the sub-relay board accommodating part. It is an enlarged view of the connection part of the sub relay board accommodating part and the sub control board accommodating part of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the bracket of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment, and the sub-relay board accommodating part. It is a perspective view of the harness guide of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back surface side of the substrate holding unit of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the inner wall of the cabinet of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is an enlarged view of the opening in the inner wall of the cabinet of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the attachment procedure of the substrate holding unit of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a perspective view seen from the back surface side of the sub-relay board cover of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a perspective view seen from the back surface side of the sub-control board cover of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the gaming machine 1 is a so-called pachislot machine. Although the game machine 1 can be played using coins, medals, game balls, tokens, and other game media such as cards that are given or given to the player and that store game value information. , Hereinafter, it will be described as using a medal.

In the following description, the side (direction) from the game machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the game machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right side and the left side when viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the game machine 1, respectively. Further, the direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-back direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the appearance of the game machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 is a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as a game machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD arranged on the upper front surface of the cabinet G, and a lower surface arranged on the lower front surface of the cabinet G. It has a door mechanism DD.

Further, the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G is formed with two openings G41 penetrating in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. Then, a wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so as to be able to close the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 in the center. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening in a substantially central portion of the upper portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back surface side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel. These reels RL, RC, and RR are arranged in parallel (horizontally in a row) so that each of them can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. For the reels RL, RC, and RR, the operation of each reel RL, RC, and RR and the patterns drawn on each reel RL, RC, and RR can be visually recognized through the main display window DD4.

A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b, and DD2c on a substantially horizontal plane are formed. The first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a medal insertion port DD5 for inserting medals. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening into which medals are inserted by the player. The medals inserted from the medal slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as an effective line setting means for betting a credited medal. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of medals to be inserted.

A liquid crystal display device DD20 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The liquid crystal display device DD20 is a so-called touch panel in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is arranged on the panel surface of the liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitance type that detects contact with a part of the human body (fingertip or the like) or an electrostatic pen and outputs the detection signal. It may be of a method of detecting contact with a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputting the detection signal, or of another method or structure (in-cell structure or the like).

The liquid crystal display device DD20 functions as a SUI (smart user interface), and on the display screen, for example, game information such as the number of games played as the game progresses is displayed, and the player selects the liquid crystal display device DD20. Alternatively, a message or input key for requesting input is displayed.

In the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, as the game progresses, it is possible to display the content (effect information) according to the effect related to the game on the display screen. Further, as the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, an attachment having a function as a directing accessory, a jog dial, a push button, or the like may be attached as a dedicated attachment. Further, the liquid crystal display device DD20 can be omitted by allocating the function to the display unit A or the like described later.

On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, a start lever DD6 is provided that rotationally drives the reels RL, RC, and RR by the operation of the player and starts the variable display of the symbol in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range.

On the right side of the start lever DD6 and on the front side of the liquid crystal display device DD20, there are three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, and RR by the player's pressing operation (stop operation). , DD7C, DD7R are provided.

A C / P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 switches the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by a push button operation. In the state where payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet DD14 (cancellation shoot) provided on the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid-out medals are collected in the medal receiving unit DD15.

A lumbar panel DD18 (lumbar light guide plate) is arranged on the lower side of the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, and DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a decorative panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the lumbar panel DD18, a name representing the model of the game machine 1 and various patterns are drawn by printing.

Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout outlet DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information about the game by sound such as voice and music. Further, a first sub-display device DD19L and a second sub-display device DD19R are arranged on the left side and the right side of the main display window DD4, respectively. These sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R display, for example, the number of medals paid out and the number of remaining medals credited when a prize is established. Normally, the maximum number of medals credited to the game machine 1 is 50, so 50 or less credits are displayed. In the state where the maximum number of 50 medals is credited, the inserted medals are paid out as they are from the medal payout outlet DD14. Further, the sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R may have a touch panel on the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that divides the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. Further, the lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and is a reel unit RU, a main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire game machine 1, and a sub control device SS (see FIG. 11). Etc. are housed. The main control board MS constitutes a circuit (main control circuit) that controls the main flow of the game in the game machine 1, such as determining the internal winning combination, rotating and stopping the reels RL, RC, and RR, and determining whether or not there is a prize. To do. The sub-control device SS constitutes a circuit (sub-control circuit) that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is replaceably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for displaying an image and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is irradiated.

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a structure or a natural object, and for example, the position (projection distance or angle) of an accessory which is a screen described later. Etc.) and by projecting an image according to the effect information generated based on the shape, it is possible to produce an advanced and powerful effect.

The display unit A has a housing A1 having an opening formed in the front. The housing A1 is composed of a projector cover B1 forming the upper portion of the irradiation unit B and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C. The screen housing C10 has a box shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation unit B is a screen device that is arranged in front of the projector device B2 that emits the irradiation light forward and the projector device B2, and is arranged diagonally downward and rearward from the projector device B2. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of C, and a projector cover B1 that houses a projector device B2 and a mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector device B2)
The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 while being exteriorized by the case B22, and is arranged at the rear portion in the cabinet G. The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via a horizontally arranged flat upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221. The entire upper surface of the case B22 is open. As a result, the lens unit B21 and the optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 12) housed in the case B22 are located on the lower surface of the lower pedestal B221. The lens unit B21 is arranged so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources of the optical mechanism B24 and reflected by the DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) toward the front mirror mechanism B3 via the lens or the like. There is. Details of the projector device B2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, the mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector device B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. are doing. As shown in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B31 is formed in a rectangular plate shape on the front surface. An angle adjusting hole B311 is formed at each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface centering on the angle adjusting hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrically between the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion, and is formed in a size that does not overlap the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are partially formed so as to overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344. , The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the front central portion of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjusting hole B111. The angle adjusting hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 from the front side, and this screw penetrates the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws penetrating the angle adjusting holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

Then, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is shortened.

As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 are screwed together via the mounting holes B314 / B334 / B344, whereby the optical mirror is between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34. B32 is sandwiched. In this way, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 are integrated as the mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. As a result, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2.

Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, so that the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 It is sandwiched between. Then, a screw inserted through the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 penetrates the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjusting hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 are housed in the projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 inclined upward from the rear to the front in the front portion thereof. As shown in FIG. 8, the projector cover B1 is arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, the reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and the upper wall portion B12. It has side wall portions B13 and B13. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward of the cabinet G (see FIG. 5). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a form protruding forward in the central portion of the front portion of the upper wall portion B12, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in an angle-adjustable space portion formed by the protrusion. There is.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
The irradiation unit B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. For example, screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C through the screw holes formed in the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 5). As a result, the display unit A can unite the irradiation unit B and the screen device C and handle them integrally.

Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. Each of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is configured by applying a screen paint to a base material, and has a projection surface capable of causing an image to appear.

The projection planes of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 each have different shapes in order to diversify the image expression. Specifically, the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism E1 is flat, whereas the projection surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has a side view arc shape. Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens whose positions are displaced relative to the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, respectively, and the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively. Driven by (not shown).

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Electrical and optical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 11, the projector device B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. The sub-control device SS described above is connected to the projector device B2 via the relay board CK. The sub-control device SS controls the projector control board B23 according to the effect operation of the screen or the accessory, and projects the irradiation light onto the screen or the accessory via the optical mechanism B24 as a visual effect. Display the image. Further, in the assembly process of the display unit A or the like, the adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the relay board CK of the projector device B2. The adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is used for adjusting the position of the irradiation light projected by the projector device B2 and performing the initial focus setting. In the present embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is adopted as the adjustment device of the projector device B2, but the adjustment device of the projector device B2 is a tablet PC or a so-called smartphone in which an adjustment program (application software) is installed. , Or it may be a dedicated terminal device.

The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231 and a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233. The optical mechanism B24 relates to an LED light source, a DMD, and a projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 that emit R (red), G (green), and B (blue) colored lights as components arranged around the lens unit B21. It is equipped with a focus mechanism for adjusting the focus (not shown).

The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 so as to project the irradiation light based on the command of the sub control device SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism to move the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on the command of the sub control device SS, thereby adjusting the focus when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores a control program by the control LSI 230 and data related to the setting / adjustment of the projector device B2.

The DLP system of the projector device B2 is mainly composed of a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, an LED light source of the optical mechanism B24, and a DMD.

Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected in the predetermined direction by the DMD travels to the lens unit B21, passes through the projection lens 210, enters the mirror mechanism B3, and is finally reflected by the mirror mechanism B3. Guides you to the projection target. As a result, the irradiation light is projected onto the screen or the accessory to be projected, and an image corresponding to the effect is formed.

In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Further, the projector device B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by folding back the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism B3, and makes the projection distance of the irradiation light as short as possible by, for example, setting the contrast ratio to 1000: 1. ing. As a result, the display unit A provided with the projector device B2 is constructed to be cheaper and smaller, and is easily mounted in the limited space in the cabinet G of the game machine 1.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mechanical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 12, the projector device B2 has a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an undercover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as exterior components. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. An undercover B223 is arranged on the lower surface of the case B22 so as to cover it. The undercover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via the stay B223a, and is also fixed to an appropriate portion on the lower surface of the case B22. The projector device B2 is attached to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 8) of the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12, and the lower pedestal B221 is attached to the upper end portion of the case B22 so as to cover the upper surface opening of the case B22. The lower pedestal B221 is connected. The procedure for adjusting the mounting of the projector device B2 will be described later.

Further, the projector device B2 has a lens unit B21, an LED substrate (not shown) equipped with an LED light source, a DMD substrate (not shown) equipped with a DMD, and a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B as internal components. , 243D, intake fans 244A, 244B, exhaust fan 245, and projector control board B23. The case B22 houses the lens unit B21 while the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 is covered with the lens unit cover B222, and also includes an LED substrate, a DMD substrate, a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, and an intake fan. 244A, 244B and exhaust fan 245 are accommodated. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

In such a projector device B2, video data related to an image such as an effect is transmitted from the sub control device SS, and the sub control device SS controls the projector device SS so as to project the image on a screen or an accessory. On the other hand, the sub control device SS controls the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 to move the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the content of the effect.

Here, the sub-control device SS controls the projector device B2 according to the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 due to the effect, and the image is displayed on the projection surface of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. Adjust the focus so that it is projected clearly.

The heat sinks 243R, 243G, and 243B are partially in contact with the back surface of the LED substrate. The heat sink 243D is in partial contact with the back surface of the DMD substrate. In the present embodiment, the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D have relatively large fin external sizes, while the heat sink 243R and the heat sink 243G are relatively small, while the heat sink 243B and the heat sink 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D are efficient so as not to raise the temperature of the optical element or the substrate until the optical characteristics are significantly changed by dissipating the heat generated in each of the LED substrate and the DMD substrate into the air. It dissipates well. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat radiating members, are made of an aluminum material having high heat conductivity in order to enhance the heat radiating effect, and have a plurality of heat radiating fins in order to increase the contact area with air.

The intake fan 244A is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the right front portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the left side portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the rear portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243G.

An intake port B22A is provided on the right front side of the case B22 in which the intake fan 244A is close, and an exhaust port B22E is provided in the right rear part of the case B22 in which the heat sink 243R is close to the intake port B22A. Has been done. An intake port B22B is provided in a part of the left side of the case B22 to which the intake fan 244B is close, and in the other part of the left side of the case B22 along with the intake port B22B, the inside of the case B22 is provided. The intake port B22C is provided so that air can reach the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, and 243D through the empty space. An exhaust port B22D is provided at the rear of the case B22 to which the exhaust fan 245 is close.

That is, in the case B22 of the projector device B2, after being forcibly taken in from the intake port B22A by the intake fan 244A, a flow of air exhausted from the exhaust port B22E is formed while taking heat from the heat sink 243R. .. Further, in the case B22, after being forcibly sucked from the intake port B22B by the intake fan 244B, the heat sink 243D, the heat sink 243B, and the heat sink 243G are forcibly taken from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 245. A flow of air exhausted to is formed. Further, in the case B22, after being sucked from the intake port B22C, a flow of air forcibly exhausted from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 245 is formed while mainly taking heat from the heat sink 243G and the heat sink 243B. ..

The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered with the undercover B223. A control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231 and a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and the like are mounted on the projector control board B23. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to the LED board and DMD board arranged in the case B22, and further to the focus mechanism.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Position / orientation adjustment of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the upper pedestal B220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 8) of the projector cover B1, and is a rectangular main body portion 2200 and both left and right sides of the main body portion 2200. Is formed by bending downward and outward, and has a step with the main body 2200 and extends to both the left and right sides. The left end 2201a and the right end 2201b, and the main body 2200 partially extend from the rear side to the rear side. It has a rear end 2202 to be ejected. The main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 are provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. These three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the main body 2200. Each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 by screwing. In the present embodiment, three square holes 2201c are arranged in each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b, and are provided at equal intervals in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimensions of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 16) that is inserted into and fastened to the square hole 2201c.

The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member substantially corresponding to the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. The lower pedestal B221 is integrally formed with three connecting screw portions 2210 so as to project upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A. These three connecting screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (horizontal plane) along the lower pedestal B221. The lower pedestal B221 inserts the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 into the connecting hole 2200A while fitting the coil spring 2211 to each of the connecting screw portions 2210, and sandwiches the coil spring 2211 between the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202. By fastening the nut 2213 from the upper surface side of the upper pedestal B220 to the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 via the washer 2212, the nut 2213 is suspended from the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220. Further, as shown in FIG. 12, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B223a. The lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220 while supporting the undercover B223 via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 12 to 15, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other in an adjustable distance at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. Each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 is composed of a connecting hole 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, a connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213.

By using such an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221, the projector device B2 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 so that the position and the optical axis can be adjusted.

FIG. 16 shows a mounting mode of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. The lower part of FIG. 16A is a view showing a state in which the mounting screw T is inserted and fastened to the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, and the upper part of FIG. 16A is a view of FIG. 16A. It is sectional drawing which follows the BB'line shown in the figure below. Note that FIG. 16 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220, but the same applies to the periphery of the remaining square hole 2201c in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b.

As shown in FIG. 16A, the mounting screw T is inserted into the square hole 2201c from below, and the mounting screw T is arranged substantially in the center of the square hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed to the nut N located on the upper surface side of the upper wall portion B12 via a washer W arranged along the upper surface of the upper wall portion B12 and the lower surface of the left end portion 2201a. As a result, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by screwing. The right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 is also attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by the same screwing.

Here, the shaded portion indicated by reference numeral A in FIG. 16A is a gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 16A, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is arranged and fixed substantially in the center of the square hole 2201c. At this time, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the range (adjustment range) of the shaded portion of the reference numeral A. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T with respect to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. be able to. Similarly, the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 can also be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1.

FIG. 16B shows a state in which the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is shifted in the direction of the arrow E with respect to FIG. 16A. The upper view of FIG. 16 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD'shown in the lower figure of FIG. 16 (b). In the state shown in FIG. 16B, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is displaced relatively to the left within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, and is within the range (adjustment range) of the shaded portion indicated by reference numeral C. It is possible to move with.

In this way, the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, in the projector device B2, the mounting position with respect to the upper wall portion B12 is adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction by the plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220. As a result, the direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is easily adjusted as the reference direction so as to be perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincide with the front-back direction.

FIG. 17 shows a connection structure of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220. FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the lower pedestal B221 is connected to the upper pedestal B220 by the connecting hole 2200A, the connecting screw portion 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213 in the connecting portion R2. Note that FIG. 17 shows one connecting portion R2, but the same applies to the remaining connecting portions R1 and R3.

The connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connecting hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body portion 2200 of the upper pedestal B220, and is screwed to the nut 2213 via the washer 2212 arranged on the upper surface side of the main body portion 2200. To. A coil spring 2211 is fitted onto the connecting screw portion 2210, and the coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the lower surface of the main body portion 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the peripheral edge portion of the connecting hole 2200A. By such a coil spring 2211, the portion of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is urged in a direction away from each other (vertical direction), so that the connecting screw portion 2210 and the nut 2213 are screwed together. Loosening is prevented at the joint.

In such a connecting portion R2, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be changed while being urged by the coil spring 2211 by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in the tightening direction or the loosening direction. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is narrowed. At this time, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (not shown in FIG. 17). Therefore, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in the direction closer to the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted higher. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is increased. That is, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in the direction away from the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately loosening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a lower position.

In the other connecting portions R1 and R3, the height position of the lower pedestal B221 in the vicinity of the connecting portions R1 and R3 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the tightening amount of the nut 2213 in the same manner as described above. Specifically, the lines connecting the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 form a triangle so that they are not located on the same straight line in the plane (in the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. It is arranged like this. That is, since the height position of the lower pedestal B221 can be finely adjusted by the tightening amount of the nut 2213 at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, R3, the posture of the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction. The degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space can be adjusted in either the left-right direction or the up-down direction.

Such posture adjustment of the lower pedestal B221 is performed while irradiating the screen or the like with light from the projector device B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221. At that time, an image is projected on the screen or the like by the irradiation light, and the posture of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while checking the image. As a result, the optical axis direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is adjusted so that the image is projected on the surface of the screen or the like in an appropriate display mode. That is, the optical axis direction can be adjusted in advance by adjusting the posture of the lower pedestal B221 so that so-called trapezoidal distortion or the like does not occur as an image display mode.

The adjustment in the optical axis direction and the like are performed using the adjustment PC 1000 (see FIG. 11) connected to the projector device B2. The projector device B2 attached to the upper wall portion B12 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 adjusts the optical axis direction and checks the displayed image on the screen or the like at the time of inspection at a factory. , Various adjustments necessary for projecting and displaying the image are carried out. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the relay board CK of the projector device B2 during the adjustment work (see FIG. 11). When the adjustment PC 1000 is operated, the optical parameters related to the projection position of the irradiation light, the focus adjustment, and the like in the projector device B2 are changed by a predetermined command transmitted from the adjustment PC 1000. The projection positions and optical parameters appropriately adjusted in this way are stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector device B2 as adjustment value data in the horizontal and vertical directions (see FIG. 11). The horizontal and vertical adjustment value data stored in the EEPROM 231 is not supplied to the projector device B2 due to transportation after shipment from the factory, and even if the game machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it remains as it is. Can be used.

As is clear from the above, the projector device B2 is mainly positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction according to the mounting position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall portion B12, and is in the three-dimensional space of the lower pedestal B221. The direction of the optical axis is adjusted according to the attitude of the projector.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are provided at three connecting portions for connecting to each other, but if the condition that at least three locations are not on the same straight line is satisfied, four locations are provided. The connecting portion may be provided above. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with the connecting hole 2200A and the lower pedestal B221 is provided with the connecting screw portion 2210, but these connecting holes and the connecting screw portion may be provided upside down. The connecting screw portion is not limited to the one formed integrally with the pedestal as in the present embodiment, and may be any one that can be fixed to one pedestal. For example, the connecting screw portion may be a bolt that penetrates and is fixed to the lower pedestal.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment has been described. The game machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the following features.

(1-1) A display unit (display unit A) for displaying images and
A main body (cabinet G) accommodating the display unit (display unit A) and having an opening on the front surface, and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that can be opened / closed with respect to the main body (cabinet G) is provided.
The display unit (display unit A) is
A projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting images and
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) that reflects the light emitted from the projector (projector device B2) and
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector device B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3). And with
The projector (projector device B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are unitized.
The position of the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit (display unit A) with the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) open.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the display unit A includes a projector device B2, a mirror mechanism B3, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1. However, the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit A with the upper door mechanism UD open. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the game machine 1, the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted, so that the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate. Even in this case, the projection position can be adjusted.

(1-2) The gaming machine according to (1-1) above.
The projector (projector device B2) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit (display unit A).
While the projector (projector device B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), it is possible to irradiate light forward.
The reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is arranged in front of the projector (projector device B2) so that the light emitted from the projector (projector device B2) can be reflected diagonally downward and backward, and the main body thereof. It is possible to adjust the light reflection direction by changing the degree of screwing in the screw exposed toward the opening side of the portion (cabinet G).

According to the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the projector device B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit A. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the light reflection direction, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the game machine 1, the light reflection direction (angle) can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw with the upper door mechanism UD open. Can be adjusted. As a result, the projection position can be adjusted even when the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate.

(2-1) A projection device (projector device B2) that projects an image with irradiation light, and
A plurality of projection planes capable of displaying the image projected by the projection device, and
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) that displaces at least one projection surface among the plurality of projection surfaces as a movable projection surface.
An upper wall (upper wall portion B12) located above the projection device is provided.
The plurality of projection surfaces are surface-processed.
The drive mechanism is configured to displace the movable projection surface relative to the projection device.
An upper pedestal (upper pedestal B220) and a lower pedestal (lower pedestal B221) are provided between the projection device and the upper wall.
The upper pedestal is attached so that the in-plane position can be adjusted with respect to the upper wall, and the lower pedestal can adjust the distance with respect to the upper pedestal at three or more points while supporting the projection device. A game machine characterized by being attached to.

According to the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the projector device B2 appropriately adjusts the in-plane position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall portion B12, thereby appropriately adjusting the upper wall portion B12 via the upper pedestal B220. By appropriately adjusting the vertical spacing of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 positioned on the upper wall portion B12 at three or more connecting portions R1, R2, R3. It is attached so that the posture supported via the lower pedestal B221 is appropriate. Therefore, the in-plane arrangement position and the in-space posture of the projector device B2 can be easily adjusted by using the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and by extension, a high-quality image having a high visual visual effect can be displayed on a plurality of projection surfaces. It can be projected.

(2-2) The gaming machine according to (2-1) above.
The upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are connected to each other by three or more connecting portions (connecting portions R1, R2, R3) that are not on the same straight line.
Each of the plurality of connecting portions
A connecting screw portion (connecting screw portion 2210) that protrudes from one of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal and is screwed through the other.
A coil spring (coil spring 2211) that is externally fitted to the connecting screw portion and is arranged between the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal is provided.

According to the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are not on the same straight line, and the distance between the three or more connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 is such that the connecting screw portion 2210. It can be adjusted individually by simply adjusting the screw fastening amount, and the distance after adjustment is kept constant by the elastic urging force of the coil spring 2211, so that the space is orthogonal to each other in the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction. Each posture of the projector device B2 can be finely adjusted with respect to the three axial directions of the above, and for example, the projector device B2 can be held in an appropriate posture in any of the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction.

[Second Embodiment]
The first embodiment has been described above. Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment applies to the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221>
The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 according to the present embodiment have different configurations from the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. FIG. 19 is a plan view showing a state in which the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are assembled. FIG. 20 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 viewed from diagonally forward. FIG. 21 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 viewed from diagonally rearward. FIG. 22 is a perspective view of a case that houses the internal components of the projector mechanism. FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing a state in which the case is attached to the lower pedestal.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the upper pedestal B220 has a shape in which a rectangular opening is provided in a sheet metal member having a rectangular shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 19, the opening is formed in a substantially rectangular shape surrounded by side A, side B, side C, and side D.

Square holes 2201c are provided on the right side portion and the left side portion of the upper pedestal B220, respectively. The square hole 2201c is a hole for fixing the upper pedestal B220 to the relay plate B300 (see FIG. 26) by screwing.

In the first embodiment, when the projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1, the projector device B2 is directly fixed to the projector cover B1 by screwing the upper pedestal B220 to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. explained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relay plate B300 is interposed between the upper pedestal B220 and the projector cover B1.

The vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimensions of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T that is inserted into and fastened to the square hole 2201c. Note that FIG. 19 also shows a fixing plate B321 used when fixing the upper pedestal B220 to the relay plate B300. In the present embodiment, the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220 are fastened by using the fixing plate B321 and the cap bolt. Although the fixed plate B321 is not shown in the first embodiment, conventionally known members can be appropriately selected and used when fastening the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220.

Further, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. The three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220.

The lower pedestal B221 has a rectangular main body portion B221a having a rectangular opening formed in the center, a right side portion B221b and a left side portion B221c extending forward with a step from the main body portion B221a, and a main body portion B221a. It is a sheet metal member provided with a rear end portion B221d having a step and extending rearward.

As shown in FIG. 20, the right side portion B221b is formed by bending the right side of the front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. The left side portion B221c is formed by bending the left side of the front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. As shown in FIG. 21, the rear end portion B221d is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B221a downward and a part of the downwardly bent portion outward. The right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d are formed so as to be positioned on the same plane.

A connecting screw portion 2210 is integrally formed on the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d so as to project upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, respectively. The three connecting screw portions 2210 are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (in a horizontal plane) along the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d.

Similar to the first embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other so that the distance between them can be adjusted at each of the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting portions corresponding to the three connecting screw portions 2210. Will be done. Each of the three connecting portions is composed of a connecting hole 2200A, a connecting screw portion 2210, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213 (see FIG. 12).

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22. As the case B22, a case having the same configuration as that of the first embodiment can be adopted, but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, a case B22 having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape is adopted. There is.

Similar to the first embodiment, the case B22 houses a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 12), an LED substrate, a DMD substrate, a heat sink, an intake fan, and the like, which are internal components of the projector device B2. A projector control board B23 (see FIG. 12) is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

A lens unit cover B222 (see FIG. 12) is attached to the front opening B22k provided on the front surface of the case B22. The lens unit B21 is housed in the case B22 with the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 12) covered with the lens unit cover B222.

Further, although not shown, in the case B22, two intake fans 244A are located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction (near the right end of the left side portion B221c when attached to the lower pedestal B221 (see FIG. 23)). -244B are arranged so as to be lined up in the front-rear direction. A heat sink is provided on the left side of the two intake fans 244A and 244B.

Further, an intake port B22A is provided on the right side surface of the case B22 (see FIG. 22), and an exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side surface of the case B22 (see FIG. 23). As a result, in the case B22, after being forcibly taken in from the intake port B22A by the intake fans 244A and 244B, a flow of air exhausted from the exhaust port B22E is formed while taking heat from the heat sink.

As shown in FIG. 23, the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screw fastening, and its upper end surface (upper wall portion B22F shown in FIG. 22) is the inner surface of the main body portion B221a of the lower pedestal B221. Is in contact with. Further, in a state where the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected, the main body portion B221a of the lower pedestal B221 is located above the upper pedestal B220. As a result, the upper wall portion B22F of the case B22 is also positioned above the upper pedestal B220.

In this respect, in the first embodiment, the upper end of the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 is arranged above the lower pedestal B221. Therefore, the case B22 could not be arranged in the space formed between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper end of the case B22 is formed by forming an opening in the upper pedestal B220 and arranging the case B22 so that the upper end (upper wall portion B22F) of the case B22 inserts the opening upward. (Upper wall portion B22F) can be positioned above the upper pedestal B220. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the space for arranging the case B22.

As described above, as compared with the first embodiment, the relative position of the case B22 (projector device B2) with respect to the upper pedestal B220 is moved upward, so that the front portion provided on the front surface of the case B22 is provided. A part of the upper pedestal B220 will be arranged in front of the opening B22k (see FIG. 22) (see FIG. 23). That is, a part of the upper pedestal B220 is arranged in front of the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 12) installed so as to correspond to the front opening B22k. As a result, it seems that the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

However, the irradiation light is not blocked in this way. That is, in the present embodiment, the irradiation light is emitted from a portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210. In other words, only the lower half of the projection lens 210 (the portion below the horizontal plane passing through the central portion in the vertical direction of the projection lens 210) is used when emitting the irradiation light. The light emitting position of such a projection lens 210 is different from that of a conventionally known projector (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-058875).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper half of the projection lens 210 is not used when the irradiation light is emitted, and the irradiation light is emitted from the portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210. The upper pedestal B220 arranged in front of the projection lens 210 as described above exists above the optical axis of the projection lens 210. Therefore, the path of the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is lower than the upper pedestal B220, and the irradiation light is not blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

Further, by bending the lower pedestal B221 downward to form the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d, the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d are respectively above. The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be connected so that the upper pedestal B220 is arranged. As a result, while the configurations of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are changed from the first embodiment, the same configurations as those of the first embodiment can be adopted for the configurations of the three connecting portions.

Therefore, the adjustment of the optical axis direction and the like of the light emitted from the projector device B2 can also be performed by the same method as in the first embodiment. An advanced computer program is required for such adjustment of the optical axis direction, and a large amount of cost is incurred in the development of the program. In the present embodiment, the optical axis direction and the like can be adjusted using the same program as in the first embodiment, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of new costs.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case B22 is described as having the upper wall portion B22F, but as in the first embodiment, the case B22 with the upper side open (see FIG. 12) may be used. Good. The method of attaching the case B22 to the lower pedestal B221 is not particularly limited, and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by using the stay B223a (see FIG. 12) as in the first embodiment. It may be that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by arranging a part of the case B22 above the upper pedestal B220, it is possible to move the case B22 upward as compared with the first embodiment. , A new space can be created in the lower region of the case B22. Such an effect is obtained by changing the configuration of the upper pedestal B220 from the first embodiment, and the same configuration as that of the first embodiment can be adopted for the projector cover B1.

However, in the present embodiment, the projector cover B1 having a configuration different from that of the first embodiment is adopted in consideration of other effects. Hereinafter, the projector cover B1 according to the present embodiment will be described.

<Projector cover B1>
FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed. FIG. 25 is a plan view of the projector cover with the upper wall portion removed. FIG. 26 is an exploded view of a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow LL of the projector cover shown in FIG. 25 and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. FIG. 27 is a view of the projector cover with the upper wall portion removed, viewed from diagonally above. FIG. 28 is a front view of the projector cover with the upper wall portion removed. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow MM of the projector cover shown in FIG. 28.

As shown in FIG. 24, the projector cover B1 has a structure that is substantially symmetrical, and has a relay plate mounting portion B301 inside. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed so as to project inward from the inner side surfaces of the left and right side wall portions B13 and B13, respectively. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed so as to have a step, and the relay plate mounting surface B301a formed forward and rearward, the position adjusting surface B301d formed above the relay plate mounting surface B301a, and the front. It also has a connecting portion B301e for connecting the relay plate mounting surface B301a and the position adjusting surface B301d on the rear side.

A mounting hole B301b is formed on the relay plate mounting surface B301a. Further, a position adjusting hole B301c is formed on the position adjusting surface B301d. The mounting hole B301b is a screw hole for mounting the relay plate B300 to the relay plate mounting portion B301 by screwing. The position adjusting hole B301c is formed at a position facing the square hole 2201c (see FIG. 18) of the upper pedestal B220 when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate mounting portion B301.

As shown in FIG. 26, the relay plate B300 has a step between the main body B300A and the main body B300A and extends forward, and has a step between the main body B300A and the front side B300B and extends rearward. A rear side portion B300C is provided. The front side portion B300B is formed by bending the front end of the main body portion B300A downward and forward. The rear side portion B300C is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B300A downward and rearward. As described above, the shape of the relay plate B300 corresponds to the step provided in the relay plate mounting portion B301 of the projector cover B1.

A first through hole B300a is formed in the main body portion B300A. A second through hole B300b is formed in each of the front side portion B300B and the rear side portion B300C. The first through hole B300a is a hole through which a cap bolt is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the upper pedestal B220. On the other hand, the second through hole B300b is a hole through which a screw is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate mounting portion B301 by screwing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) whose upper side is open are provided on both left and right sides in front of the projector cover B1. The right opening B400a has a shape similar to a hexagon having sides EJ (see FIG. 25) in a top view.

As shown in FIG. 27, wall surfaces (wall surface B401e, wall surface B401f, wall surface B401g, wall surface B401h, wall surface B401i, and wall surface B401j) that are continuous downward from each side are formed with sides E to J as the upper ends. ing. The wall surface B401j (see FIG. 24) formed continuously from the side J has a shorter length in the vertical direction as compared with the other wall surfaces B401e to B401i. The wall surface B401e formed continuously from the side E is continuous to the rear inside the projector cover B1 and is a part of the inner side surface 403 (see FIG. 29) of the projector cover B1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, a cavity B402 is formed below the position adjusting surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301.

FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view when cut in a horizontal plane passing through the connecting portion B301e (a surface above the relay plate mounting surface B301a and passing below the position adjusting surface B301d).

As shown in FIG. 29, the opening B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) opened toward the upper side of the projector cover B1 and the cavity 402 formed below the position adjusting surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301 are formed. , Communicate inside the projector cover B1.

<Formation of space by projector cover B1 and blind B500>
In the present embodiment, as a member provided under the projector cover B1, a blind B500 is adopted instead of the perforated plate B15 (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 30 is a perspective view of the blind. FIG. 31 is a plan view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall portion of the projector cover removed. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover are removed in the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 31 along the arrow NN.

As shown in FIG. 30, the blind B500 has a structure that is substantially symmetrical, and is formed so as to have a substantially horizontal first horizontal portion B501 and a continuous inclination of the first horizontal portion B501. A second inclined portion B502a formed so as to have an inclination continuously with the first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b formed substantially horizontally with the first inclined portion B502a, and a second horizontal portion B502b. After the third horizontal portion B502d so that the inclined portion B502c, the third horizontal portion B502d formed substantially horizontally to the second inclined portion B502c, and the width in the left-right direction of the third horizontal portion B502d are the same. It has a rear wall portion B503 erected upward from the end, an outer wall portion B504 forming an outer wall of the blind B500, and an inner wall portion B505 facing the outer wall portion B504.

The outer wall portion B504 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, the third horizontal portion B502d, and the rear wall portion B503. The inner wall portion B505 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a and the second horizontal portion B502b. The first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d have a certain range raised in the vicinity of the outer wall portion B504 and are higher than the inner portion of the range. It has such a structure.

Further, the blind B500 has a small room B507 having a rectangular shape in a plan view. The small room B507 is a space surrounded by a front side wall portion B507a, an outer wall portion B507b, a rear side wall portion B507d, and an inner wall portion B505 formed in the vertical direction. The front side wall portion B507a is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b and extends in the left-right direction. The outer side wall portion B507b is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d, extends in the front-rear direction, and is continuous with the rear wall portion B503. The rear side wall portion B507d is erected so as to form substantially the same plane as the rear wall portion B503.

As described above, since the small chamber B507 is formed so as to straddle the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d, the small chamber B502 in the second inclined portion B502c and the third horizontal portion B502d. The width in the left-right direction is narrower by the length of the width in the left-right direction in the front side wall portion B507a as compared with the width in the left-right direction in the first inclined portion B502a. The outer wall portion B507b is formed with a U-shaped notch 507c having an open upper portion. Further, the upper ends of the front side wall portion B507a, the outer wall portion B507b, and the rear side wall portion B507d are lower than the upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505.

The first horizontal portion B501 includes a first wall portion B501a that is slightly erected upward at its front end, and a second wall portion B501b that is continuous from the inner portion of the first wall portion B501a toward the rear. A third wall portion B501c that is continuous diagonally rearward from the second wall portion B501b, a fourth wall portion B501d that is continuous rearward from the third wall portion B501c, and a continuous inward direction from the fourth wall portion B501d. A fifth wall portion B501e is formed. The fifth wall portion B501e is continuous with the inner wall portion B505.

In the area surrounded by the third wall portion B501c, the fourth wall portion B501d, and the fifth wall portion B501e, a screw hole B506 for attaching the blind B500 to the projector cover B1 by screwing is formed.

As shown in FIG. 32, in a state where the blind B500 is attached to the lower side of the projector cover B1, the surface of the first wall portion B501a of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401f of the projector cover B1 and is the second of the blind B500. The surface of the wall portion B501b is continuous with the wall surface B401g of the projector cover B1, the surface of the third wall portion B501c of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401h of the projector cover B1, and the surface of the fourth wall portion B501d of the blind B500 is continuous. , It is continuous with the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1.

Although not shown in FIG. 32, the surface of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 is substantially the same plane as the surface B402a (see FIG. 29) existing in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 26) of the projector cover B1. It is placed on top. There is a certain gap between the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a. As will be described later, the gap is filled with the duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) (see FIG. 36). Further, the inner surface of the outer wall portion B504 of the blind B500 is continuous with the inner surface 403 (see FIG. 29) of the projector cover B1.

From the above, the space P (see FIG. 32) is formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. The upper part of the space P is covered by the projector cover B1 and the lower part is covered by the blind B500. Further, on the side of the space P, the first wall portion B501a to the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500, the inner wall portion B505, the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the wall surfaces B401f to B401i of the projector cover B1. It is surrounded by surfaces B402a and B402b existing in the front and rear of the cavity B402, an inner surface 403, and the like.

A part of the space P above the space P is connected to the external space of the projector cover B1 via the opening B400 (see FIG. 24), and the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 29) via the cavity B402. See). In the state where the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 are assembled, the cavity B402 is a part of the space P.

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) are provided with punching B450s (right punching B450a and left punching B450b) having a mesh structure. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter from entering the space P through the opening B400 to a certain extent.

<Formation of air flow path and liquid storage space>
FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover are attached to the blind shown in FIG. 30 and the case is arranged. FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing a state in which the right punching is removed from the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 31. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover are attached to the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 32. FIG. 36 is a right side view showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening is removed in the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 35.

As shown in FIG. 33, the duct cover B600 is arranged substantially horizontally on the upper right side of the blind B500. The duct cover B600 is a flat plate-like member, and the external shapes in the top view are the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, the inner wall portion B505, and the front side wall portion B507a and the outer wall portion B507b of the small room B507. (See FIG. 30) The shape is similar to that of a figure including the upper edge of each. As a result, the duct cover B600 covers the blind B500 from above.

Further, a duct cover B650 is arranged substantially horizontally on the upper left side of the blind B500. The duct cover B650 is a flat plate-shaped member, and although the external shape in the top view is different from that of the duct cover B600 (see FIG. 40), it covers the blind B500 from above like the duct cover B600.

As shown in FIG. 35, the space P (see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 is a space above the duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) and a space below the duct cover B600. It is divided into P2. For the sake of clarity, the duct cover B600 is shaded in FIG. 35.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, a fan B700 near the opening is placed in front of the upper side of the duct cover B600. The fan near the opening B700 is an intake fan so that the air existing in front of the fan B700 near the opening can pass through the air passage portion B710 (see FIG. 37) and move to the rear. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, when the projector cover B1 is attached to the blind B500, the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is positioned near the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1. For the sake of clarity, in FIGS. 34 and 35, the fan B700 near the opening is shaded.

Here, although not shown, in the present embodiment, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the front portion of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, and the portion of the irradiation unit B protruding from the cabinet G , Housed in the upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 1). The two openings (not shown) formed on the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD are positioned directly above the two openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1, respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the intake port B22A (see FIG. 22) of the case B22 is arranged so as to be close to the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the right side of the two cavities B402). Although not shown, the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 23) of the case B22 is also similarly arranged so as to be close to the cavity B402 (the left cavity B402 of the two cavities B402).

As a result, in the present embodiment, air is introduced from the outside of the game machine 1 into the inside of the upper door mechanism UD through the opening (the opening on the right side of the two openings) formed on the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD. Is incorporated. This air moves downward inside the upper door mechanism UD and is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1.

The air that has entered the inside of the projector cover B1 is above the duct cover B600 in the space P (the space P on the right side of the two spaces P, see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. After moving backward in the space P1 (see FIG. 35), the direction is changed to the inside of the projector cover B1, passing through the cavity B402 (the right cavity B402 of the two cavities B402), and the intake port B22A. Enters the inside of the case B22 via.

The air that has entered the inside of the case B22 travels to the left while taking away the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E.

The air leaving the case B22 passes through the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the left side of the two cavities B402) and then changes its course forward to the space P (the space on the left side of the two spaces P). Of P), the space P1 above the duct cover B650 is moved forward. Then, the air goes out of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 (left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1.

The air that has flowed out of the projector cover B1 moves upward inside the upper door mechanism UD, and then passes through an opening (the left opening of the two openings) formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD. Then, it is released to the outside of the game machine 1.

Of the air flows described above, the air flow path inside the projector cover B1 is indicated by a thick arrow in FIG. 29. Further, the flow of air in the space P1 is indicated by an arrow A in FIG. 35. In the present embodiment, by forming such an air flow path, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be discharged to the outside of the game machine 1.

Here, as described above, the opening formed in the upper surface wall of the upper door mechanism UD exists directly above the opening B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1. That is, when the opening of the upper door mechanism UD and the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 are viewed from above, at least a part of them overlap each other.

Therefore, when a foreign substance such as a liquid enters the game machine 1 through the opening of the upper door mechanism UD, the foreign substance enters the inside of the projector cover B1. However, according to the present embodiment, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from entering the inside of the case B22. Hereinafter, a case where the liquid L is injected through the opening of the upper door mechanism UD will be described as an example.

The liquid L introduced from the opening of the upper door mechanism UD passes through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1 and falls on the first horizontal portion B501 (see FIG. 30) of the blind B500.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 32, the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 and the lower end of the surface B402a (see FIG. 29) existing in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 26) of the projector cover B1. There is a certain gap between them, and the thickness of the duct cover B600 substantially matches the length of the gap. The duct cover B600 is arranged so as to contact both the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a to fill the gap. As a result, a gap corresponding to the height of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 is formed between the first horizontal portion B501 of the blind B500 and the duct cover B600. The liquid L passes through the gap and flows from the first horizontal portion B501 toward the first inclined portion B502a.

Since the first inclined portion B502a and the second inclined portion B502c of the blind B500 have an inclination so as to descend toward the rear, the liquid L is the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, and the second. It flows backward through the inclined portion B502c and the third horizontal portion B502d. In this way, the liquid L flows on the surfaces of the first horizontal portion B501, the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. The flow of such a liquid L is indicated by an arrow L in FIG. 35.

The liquid L that has flowed to the rear collides with the rear wall portion B503 and is stored in the area surrounded by the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the outer wall portion B507b (and the inner wall portion B505) (FIG. 36). reference). The region is included in the space P2 (see FIG. 35) below the duct cover B600 in the space P (see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. For clarity, FIG. 36 shows the stored liquid L in shades.

Here, the space P1 shown in FIG. 35 and the internal space Q (see FIG. 29) of the projector cover B1 are connected to each other through the opening B510 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 36, the opening B510 has a shape in which the side view is similar to a rectangle composed of sides K to N.

The side K forming the lower end of the opening B510 corresponds to the upper end edge B505a (see FIG. 30) of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500. Then, as shown in FIG. 30, the upper end edge B505a (lower end of the opening 510) of the inner wall portion B505 has a first horizontal portion B501, a first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b, a second inclined portion B502c, and It is located above the third horizontal portion B502d (passage of liquid L).

Further, although not clearly shown in the drawing, the right end of the duct cover B600 is placed on the upper end edge of the outer wall portion B504 of the blind B500, and the left end thereof hits the outer surface of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500. Arranged so as to be in contact with each other, the main surface B610 (see FIG. 37) forms substantially the same plane as the upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500 (see FIG. 33). As a result, the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 and the storage space (space P2) of the liquid L are separated by the duct cover B600, and the liquid L is separated from the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (inside the case B22) through the opening B510. ) Is less likely to occur.

<Mounting structure and mounting position of fan near the opening>
FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the fan near the opening as viewed from the rear and the bottom. FIG. 39 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the fan near the opening as viewed from the front and the bottom.

As shown in FIG. 37, the duct cover B600 includes a main surface B610, a fan installation structure B620, a rear side portion B630, wiring openings B640 (B640a and B640b), and screw holes B650 (B650a and B650b). Is equipped with.

The main surface B610 has a shape in which the left rear corner portion is cut out in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. The fan installation structure B620 is a structure for installing the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening, and is formed on the front right side of the main surface B610. The posterior side portion B630 is formed so as to extend rearward from the right rear portion of the main surface B610. The wiring opening B640 is a hole through which wiring connecting various functional components (sub-control device SS or the like) arranged outside the projector cover B1 and the projector device B2 or the like is inserted. The screw hole B650 is a hole for attaching the duct cover B600 to the projector cover B1 by screwing.

The fan installation structure B620 includes a front engaging portion B621 erected at the front end of the main surface B610, a left rear engaging portion B622 erected from the main surface B610 behind the front engaging portion B621, and a right rear engaging portion. The side engaging portion B623 and the lower engaging portion B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower side) that are slightly erected from the main surface B610 and extend in the front-rear direction. It has a right engaging portion B624c) and.

The lower left engaging portion B624a and the lower middle engaging portion B624b connect the back surface of the front engaging portion B621 and the front surface of the left rear engaging portion B622. The lower right engaging portion B624c connects the back surface of the front engaging portion B621 and the front surface of the right rear engaging portion B623.

The upper end edge B621a of the front engaging portion B621, the upper end edge B622a of the left rear engaging portion B622, and the upper end edge B623a of the right rear engaging portion B623 are each formed in a curved shape. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening has a circular air passage portion B710. The upper end edge B621a, the upper end edge B622a, and the upper end edge B623a are formed in a shape (arc shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passing portion B710. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 37, the upper end edge B621a and the upper end edge B622a are shown by diagonal lines, and the air passage portion B710 is shown by shading.

As shown in FIG. 38, a structure (fan installation structure) for installing the fan B700 near the opening is formed so as to project downward from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1. Specifically, the projector cover B1 has a front engaging portion B421 formed along the rear end of the opening B400 and a rear engaging portion B422 formed behind the front engaging portion B421 in the front-rear direction. It has an extending upper upper engaging portion B423 (upper left engaging portion B423a, upper middle engaging portion B423b, and upper right engaging portion B423c).

The upper engaging portion B423 connects the back surface of the front engaging portion B421 and the front surface of the rear engaging portion B422. The downward protrusion length from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1 is longer in the front engaging portion B421 and the rear engaging portion B422 than in the upper engaging portion B423.

The lower end edge B421a of the front engaging portion B421 and the lower end edge B422a of the rear engaging portion B422 are each formed in a curved shape. The lower end edge B421a and the lower end edge B422a are formed in a shape (arc shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passing portion B710 of the fan B700 near the opening. For the sake of clarity, the lower end edge B421a and the lower end edge B422a are shown by diagonal lines in FIG. 38.

The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is sandwiched by the fan installation structure B620 of the duct cover B600 and the fan installation structure of the projector cover B1 described above.

Specifically, the distance between the front engagement portion B621 and the left rear engagement portion B622 of the duct cover B600, the distance between the front engagement portion B621 and the right rear engagement portion B623, and the front engagement of the projector cover B1. The distance between the joint portion B421 and the rear engaging portion B422 is substantially equal to the length in the front-rear direction of the opening vicinity fan B700, respectively.

As a result, the left front surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 is in contact with the back surface of the front side engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600, and the left back surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 is the left rear engaging portion B622 of the duct cover B600. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is in contact with the front surface and is sandwiched between the front side engaging portion B621 and the left rear side engaging portion B622 of the duct cover B600. Further, the right front surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 is in contact with the back surface of the front side engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600, and the right back surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 is the front surface of the right rear side engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is sandwiched between the front side engaging portion B621 and the right rear side engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600.

Further, the front surface of the fan B700 near the opening is in contact with the back surface of the front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1, and the back surface of the fan B700 near the opening is in contact with the front surface of the rear engaging portion B422 of the projector cover B1. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is sandwiched between the front side engaging portion B421 and the rear side engaging portion B422 of the projector cover B1.

Further, the three lower engaging portions B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower right engaging portion B624c) of the duct cover B600 move upward from the main surface B610. The protruding lengths of are almost equal to each other. Further, the three upper engaging portions B423 (upper left engaging portion B423a, upper middle engaging portion B423b, and upper right engaging portion B423c) of the projector cover B1 are downward from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1. The protrusion lengths of are almost equal to each other. The distance between the lower engaging portion B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engaging portion B423 of the projector cover B1 is substantially equal to the vertical length of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening.

As a result, the lower surface of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening has three lower engaging portions B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower right engaging portion B624c) of the duct cover B600. ), And the upper surface of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is the three upper engaging portions B423 (upper left engaging portion B423a, upper middle engaging portion B423b, and upper right engaging portion B423c) of the projector cover B1. ), The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is sandwiched between the lower engaging portion B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engaging portion B423 of the projector cover B1.

As described above, the fan B700 near the opening is fixed by being sandwiched by the duct cover B600 and the projector cover B1 from the front-rear direction and the vertical direction.

In a state where the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is fixed, the front peripheral edge of the air passage portion B710 is attached to the upper end edge B621a of the front engagement portion B621 in the duct cover B600 and the lower end edge B421a of the front engagement portion B421 in the projector cover B1. Positioned along (see FIGS. 34 and 39). Although not shown, the rear outer edge of the air passage portion B710 is the upper end edge B622a of the left rear engaging portion B622 and the upper end edge B623a of the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600, and the projector cover B1. It is positioned along the lower end edge B422a of the rear engaging portion B422.

That is, the air passage portion B710 is the front engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600, the left rear engaging portion B622, the right rear engaging portion B623, and the front engaging portion of the projector cover B1 when viewed from the front. It does not overlap with B421 and the rear engaging portion B422. In other words, the air passage portion B710 includes the front engagement portion B621 of the duct cover B600, the left rear engagement portion B622, the right rear engagement portion B623, and the front engagement portion B421 of the projector cover B1. Not covered by the posterior engaging portion B422. As a result, the area of the air passing portion can be secured to the maximum.

On the other hand, the peripheral edge of the air passage portion B710, the upper end edge of the engaging portion in the duct cover B600 (upper end edge B621a, upper end edge B622a, and upper end edge B623a) and the lower end edge (lower end edge) of the engaging portion in the projector cover B1. By matching B421a and the lower end edge B422a), the area of the portion where the fan B700 near the opening and the duct cover B600 abut, and the area where the fan B700 near the opening and the projector cover B1 abut are increased. This makes it possible to stably fix the fan B700 near the opening.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the front surface of the front engaging portion B421 in the projector cover B1 is a wall surface B401j (FIG. 24) formed downward from the rear end edge (side j shown in FIG. 25) of the right opening B400a. See). As a result, the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is arranged behind the rear end edge (side j shown in FIG. 25) of the right opening B400a by the thickness of the front engaging portion B421 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the fan B700 near the opening is located at a position deeper than the right opening B400a, even if the liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, it is difficult for the liquid to directly hit the fan B700 near the opening. It has become like. On the other hand, since the fan B700 near the opening is arranged close to the right opening B400a, it is easy to take in air from the outside of the projector cover B1 via the right opening B400a. As a result, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be efficiently discharged.

The left rear engaging portion B622 and the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600 are separately configured, whereas the front engaging portion B621 is connected without being divided into left and right parts. It has a shape. As a result, even if the liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, it is difficult for the liquid to enter backward.

Further, the length of the rear end edge (side j shown in FIG. 25) of the right opening B400a in the projector cover B1, the left-right length of the front engagement portion B621 in the duct cover B600, and the left rear engagement in the duct cover B600. The length from the left end of the portion B622 to the right end of the right rear engaging portion B623, the left-right length of the front engaging portion B421 in the projector cover B1, and the left-right length of the rear engaging portion B422 in the projector cover B1. In addition, the lengths of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening in the left-right direction are all substantially equal. As a result, the space (cross section when the space P1 is cut in the vertical direction in the left-right direction) from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1 to the space P1 (see FIG. 35) is substantially eliminated by the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening. It is in a buried state. Also in this respect, the area of the air passing portion is secured to the maximum, and the cooling efficiency of the projector device B2 can be improved.

<Liquid storage and discharge>
FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the state where the blinds and the duct cover are attached as viewed from the left. FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the projector cover, blinds, and duct cover as viewed from the rear. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, the blind, and the duct cover shown in FIG. 41. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the blind and the duct cover.

Note that FIG. 43 shows the blind B500 viewed from the front and above, while the duct cover B600 is viewed from the rear and below.

As described above, of the space P (see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500, the space P2 below the duct cover B600 (see FIG. 35) has entered the inside of the projector cover B1. It is possible to store the liquid (see FIG. 36).

As described with reference to FIG. 30, the blind B500 includes a first horizontal portion B501, a first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b, a second inclined portion B502c, a third horizontal portion B502d, and a small room B507. Is formed. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the screen device C (see FIG. 5) below the blind B500 and maintain the strength of the blind B500 while increasing the capacity of the liquid that can be stored. There is.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the presence of the small room B507 increases the strength of the blind B500, and the liquid can be stored in the small room B507 as well. That is, as described above, the notch 507c is formed in the small room B507, and when the amount of liquid stored exceeds a certain amount, the liquid flows into the small room B507 from the notch 507c. In this way, by storing the liquid in the small room B507 provided as the rib, the space in the blind B500 is effectively utilized.

As shown in FIG. 40, the duct cover B650 has a shape in which the left front corner portion is cut out in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. For clarity, the duct cover B650 is shaded in FIG. 40. As described with reference to FIG. 33, the duct cover B600 is arranged along the front side wall portion B507a and the outer wall portion B507b (see FIG. 30) of the small room B507 in a top view. On the other hand, the duct cover B650 has a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the duct cover B600, and the rear end of the duct cover B650 is positioned in front of the small room B507.

Although not shown, the rear end of the duct cover B650 is from the surface B402b (see FIG. 29) existing behind the cavity B402 (see FIG. 26) of the projector cover B1, that is, from the side N of the opening B510 shown in FIG. Is also placed behind. As a result, the duct cover B650 separates the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 and the storage space (space P2) of the liquid L from the duct cover B600, and the liquid L passes through the opening B510 of the projector cover B1. It is less likely to invade the internal space Q (inside the case B22).

Here, the liquid stored in the blind B500 is discharged using a discharge mechanism including a tube that communicates from the blind B500 to the outside of the game machine 1. The tube is inserted into the blind B500 by inserting the liquid discharge hole S. Hereinafter, the liquid discharge hole S will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the liquid discharge hole S is provided on the back surface side of the irradiation unit B. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the liquid discharge hole S is provided after the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the duct cover B600. It is composed of a side portion B630 (see FIG. 37).

The wiring opening B411 is formed as a notch with an open lower portion in the back side wall portion B410 forming the back surface of the projector cover B1.

The wiring opening B510a is formed as a notch with an open upper portion in the first back side wall portion B510 constituting the back surface of the blind B500. The wiring opening B511a is formed as a notch with an open upper portion in the second back side wall portion B511 formed in front of the first back side wall portion B510 of the blind B500. The second back side wall portion B511 is formed so as to stand upright from the rear end of the horizontal plane B508 which is continuously formed from the upper end of the rear wall portion B503 toward the rear. The first back side wall portion B510 is formed so as to stand upright from the rear end of the horizontal plane B509 which is continuously formed from the lower end of the second back side wall portion B511 toward the rear.

The rear side portion B630 of the duct cover B600 has a back side surface B631 and a downward projecting portion B632a and a downward projecting portion B632b projecting downward from the left and right both end edges of the surface B631. The downward protrusion B632a and the downward protrusion B632b face each other so as to be substantially parallel with each other at a certain distance, and a space is formed between the downward protrusion B632a and the downward protrusion B632b. ..

When the projector cover B1, the blind B500, and the duct cover B600 are assembled, the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the downward protrusion of the duct cover B600. The space formed between the B632a and the downward projecting portion B632b overlaps in the rear view, whereby the liquid discharge hole S (for liquid discharge on the left side of the two liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. 41). Hole S) is formed. Since the rear side portion B630 is not formed on the duct cover B650 (see FIG. 40), the liquid discharge hole S on the right side of the two liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. 41 is the projector cover B1. It is formed by the wiring opening B411, the wiring opening B510a of the blind B500, and the wiring opening B511a.

A tube for discharging the liquid stored in the blind B500 is inserted into the liquid discharge hole S, and various functional parts (sub-control device SS or the like) other than the irradiation unit B are connected to the projector device B2 or the like. Wiring for this is also inserted. The wiring is connected to the projector device B2 and the fan B700 near the opening by inserting the wiring openings B640a and B640b (see FIG. 37).

Here, the wiring openings B640a and B640b are formed on the outside (near the right end) of the duct cover B600, and the wiring openings B640a and B640b are formed in the internal space Q (see FIG. 29) of the projector cover B1. The position is separated from the opening B510 (see FIG. 36) opened toward the surface. As a result, it is difficult for the liquid stored in the blind B500 to enter the internal space Q (inside the case B22) of the projector cover B1 through the wiring openings B640a and B640b.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of producing an effect by displaying an image projected by a projection device such as a projector on a screen (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a game machine, it is possible to express an image to the same extent as a liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface becomes large as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like. Further, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is possible to express an image that cannot be performed by a liquid crystal display device.

However, since the projection device tends to generate heat and reach a high temperature as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like, there is a problem that the projection device does not function normally unless the generated heat is released.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of efficiently dissipating heat generated by a projection device capable of projecting an image. And.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(3-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
Cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the screen visible.
A fan (fan B700 near the opening) arranged inside the cover member and
A partition member (duct cover B600) for partitioning the internal space of the cover member is provided.
The cover member is opened toward a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed.
The partition member divides the space communicating from the first opening into a second space (space P1) and a third space (space P2) inside the cover member.
The first space and the second space communicate with each other through the second opening.
The fan is arranged in the second space and
The projector is arranged in the first space,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) are provided with cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) is divided into a second space (space P1) and a third space (space P1) by a partition member (duct cover B600). It is partitioned into space P2). The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P1) communicate with each other through a second opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and a fan (fan B700 near the opening) is arranged in the second space (space P1). Thereby, it is possible to move air between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P1), and such air. The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of the above.

On the other hand, since the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) is arranged in the second space (space P1), the cover member (projector cover B1 and the projector cover B1 and Even if foreign matter is mixed inside the blind B500), the foreign matter is placed in the projector (projector device B2) due to the presence of the fan (fan B700 near the opening) (first space (space)). It is possible to make it difficult for Q) to invade the side). Further, the third space (space P2) is a partition member (duct cover B600) from the second space (space P1) (a space communicating with the first space (space Q) in which the projector (projector device B2) exists). ), So if a foreign object enters the third space (space P2), the foreign object invades from the third space (space P2) into the second space (space P1). It is possible to prevent it from being stored. As a result, the projector (projector device B2) can be protected from foreign matter such as liquid that has invaded from the outside of the game machine, the cause of the projector (projector device B2) failing can be eliminated, and the first method can be eliminated. Unauthorized access through the opening (right opening B400a) can be suppressed to improve security.

(4-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
Cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the screen visible.
A fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of an opening) arranged inside the cover member is provided.
The cover member is opened toward a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed.
The first space and the second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening.
The projector is arranged in the first space, and the projector is arranged in the first space.
A fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing the fan is provided in the second space.
The fan is sandwiched between the inner portion of the cover member and the fan installation member in the second space.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) are provided with cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are the second. It communicates through the opening (opening B510) of. The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and a fan (fan B700 near the opening) is arranged in the second space (space P). Thereby, it is possible to move air between the external space and the internal space of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P), and such air. The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of the above. In particular, in the second space (space P), a fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing a fan (fan B700 near the opening) is provided, and the fan (fan B700 near the opening) is provided. , In the second space (space P), it is sandwiched between the inner portion of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) and the fan installation member (duct cover B600). In this regard, when installing the fan (fan B700 near the opening), if a structure such as a screw or a claw is separately provided, a new space is required (in the left-right direction) for the structure. On the other hand, according to the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to install a fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) in a space-saving manner, and air passes through the second space (space P). The space of the possible part can be secured as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of air movement between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500), and make the best use of the function of the fan (fan B700 near the opening). At the same time, the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

(4-2) The gaming machine according to (4-1).
The fan installation member is formed with a fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620) having a shape corresponding to the shape of the air passable portion (air passage portion B710) in the fan.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620) has a shape corresponding to the shape of the air passable portion (air passage portion B710) in the fan (fan B700 near the opening). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the passage of air from being obstructed by the fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620). As a result, the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be further improved while maximizing the suction force of the fan (fan B700 near the opening).

(5-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
Cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the screen visible. ,
The cover member is opened toward a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed.
The first space and the second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening.
The projector is arranged in the first space, and the projector is arranged in the first space.
The second space can store a liquid by closing the lower part.
Further, the cover member has a wiring opening (wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1 and wiring of the blind B500) for inserting a wiring for connecting a device arranged outside the cover member and the projector. The opening B510a for wiring and the opening B511a for wiring) are formed.
The second space and the external space of the cover member communicate with each other through the wiring opening.
The wiring opening can be inserted with a mechanism (tube included in the discharge mechanism) for discharging the liquid stored in the second space to the outside of the cover member.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) are provided with cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are the second. It communicates through the opening (opening B510) of. The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q). Thereby, it is possible to move air between the external space and the internal space of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P), and such air. The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of the above.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) includes a device and a projector (projector device) arranged outside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A wiring opening (a wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1 and a wiring opening B510a and a wiring opening B511a of the blind B500) for inserting the wiring connecting with B2) is formed, and a second space is formed. (Space P) and the external space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) have an opening for wiring (the opening B411 for wiring of the projector cover B1 and the opening B510a for wiring and the opening B511a for wiring of the blind B500). Communicate through. Then, the second space (space P) can store the liquid by closing the lower part, while the liquid stored in the second space (space P) is an opening for wiring (projector cover). It is possible to discharge to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the wiring opening B411 of B1 and the wiring opening B510a and wiring opening B511a of the blind B500. As a result, the liquid (drinks poured by the player, etc.) enters the inside of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from the outside of the game machine through the first opening (right opening B400a). Even in this case, the liquid can be retained in the second space (space P), and the liquid can be prevented from invading the device outside the second space (space P). can do. Further, the stored liquid is appropriately discharged from the wiring opening (wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, wiring opening B510a and wiring opening B511a of the blind B500) to reduce the amount of liquid stored to a certain limit or less. It is possible to keep it in. As a result, the liquid is excessively stored in the second space (space P), so that the liquid invades the arrangement space (first space) of the projector (projector device B2). The situation can be avoided. In this way, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent the projector (projector device B2) and other devices from being damaged by the liquid. Since the internal temperature of the game machine 1 is relatively high (about 60 ° C.), the stored liquid evaporates naturally if left unattended, even if it is not discharged using the above mechanism. Therefore, it is not essential to provide the discharge mechanism, and the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) has a wiring opening (projector cover B1 wiring opening B411, blind B500 wiring opening B510a, and wiring). The opening B511a) may not be formed.

(6-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
Cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the screen visible.
A fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of an opening) arranged inside the cover member is provided.
The cover member is opened toward a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed, and an opening edge (projector cover) continuous from a part of the peripheral edge of the first opening (side j shown in FIG. 25) toward the inside of the cover member. The front engaging portion B421) of B1 is formed.
The first space and the second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening.
The projector is arranged in the first space, and the projector is arranged in the first space.
The fan is arranged so as to abut the opening edge in the second space.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) are provided with cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are the second. It communicates through the opening (opening B510) of. The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and a fan (fan B700 near the opening) is arranged in the second space (space P). Thereby, it is possible to move air between the external space and the internal space of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P), and such air. The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of the above. In particular, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) has the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from a part of the peripheral edge (side j shown in FIG. 25) of the first opening (right opening B400a). An opening edge portion (front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1) is formed so as to face the opening, and the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) has an opening edge portion (projector cover) in the second space (space P). It is arranged so as to abut the front engaging portion B421) of B1. As a result, if foreign matter such as liquid (for example, a drink poured by the player) is mixed into the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the first opening (right opening B400a). Even so, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from coming into direct contact with the fan (fan B700 near the opening). On the other hand, by moving the installation position of the fan (fan B700 near the opening) as close as possible to the first opening (right opening B400a), the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) can be arranged. The air movement between the two can be smoothly performed, and the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

In the second embodiment, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the front portion of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, and the portion of the irradiation unit B protruding from the cabinet G is the upper door mechanism UD (FIG. It was explained that it is housed in 1). When the front portion of the irradiation unit B projects to the front of the cabinet G in this way, it is desirable to adopt a configuration in which the upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G as shown in FIG. 44.

FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a method of attaching the upper door mechanism to the cabinet. According to this configuration, the hooking portion UD120 is a member that protrudes rearward from the upper door mechanism UD, and is attached to the upper door mechanism UD by screwing. On the other hand, on the inner surface of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G, an inner surface side projecting member G2a (for example, a screw screwed into the inner surface of the side wall G2) is provided so as to project inward.

When attaching the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (closing the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the cabinet G), first, the lower side surface of the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD is placed on the upper surface of the front side projecting member G120 and hooked. The notch of the portion UD120 is hooked on the inner surface side protruding member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the upper door mechanism UD is pushed backward by the lower door mechanism DD. As a result, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed with respect to the cabinet G. By adopting such a configuration, the internal space of the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G can be effectively utilized.

In the second embodiment, it has been described that air flows between the internal space and the external space of the game machine 1 through the opening formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD, but in the present invention. May allow air to flow through an opening G41 (see FIG. 1) formed in the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G. In this case, for example, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the opening G41 formed in the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G may be positioned directly above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1.

Further, in order to minimize the amount of foreign matter entering the inside of the game machine 1 from the opening formed above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 (the opening formed in the upper door mechanism UD or the cabinet G), the opening is said to be. Should be smaller than the opening B400 of the projector cover B1, and the opening may be provided with some measures (for example, installation of a mesh structure similar to the punching B450) to prevent the intrusion of foreign matter. desirable.

Further, in the second embodiment, the intake fans 244A and 244B are arranged in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and the fan B700 near the opening is arranged outside the projector device B2 (internal space of the projector cover B1). Have been described as being disposed. In the present invention, the arrangement position of the fan is not particularly limited, and the fan is arranged only in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and the fan is placed outside the projector device B2 (internal space of the projector cover B1). It may not be arranged. On the contrary, the fan may be arranged only outside the projector device B2 (internal space of the projector cover B1), and may not be arranged outside the projector device B2 (inside the case B22).

FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement positions of the intake fan and the exhaust fan. In this modified example, the configurations of the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 are slightly different from those in the second embodiment. Since the basic configuration is the same, detailed description will be omitted, but the blind B500 in this modification includes the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. The inclined portion B502 is formed instead of the small chamber B507, and the small chamber B507 is not formed. Further, the rear wall portion B503 of the blind B500 is positioned in front of the second embodiment, and the front surface of the rear wall portion B503 is continuous with the surface B402b existing behind the cavity B402 of the projector cover B1. ..

The intake fan can be arranged at a desired position in the space P (the space P on the right side of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

In FIG. 45, as the arrangement position of the intake fan, the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R1), the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R2), and the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R3). , And the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R4) are illustrated.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R1) is located near the opening B510 (see FIG. 36) on the right side, and when the intake fan is arranged in the area, the intake fan is the case B22. It is close to the intake port B22A (see FIG. 22) provided on the right side surface of the above. As a result, the air taken in from the outside of the projector cover B1 can be efficiently sent to the inside of the case B22 (projector device B2).

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R2) is the right side area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R1), and is a portion where the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1 is extended rearward. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R2), the traveling direction of the air that has moved backward in the space P can be smoothly changed inward.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R3) is the front area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R2), and is the lower area of the wall surface B401j (see FIG. 24) of the projector cover B1. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R3), the air taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 can be smoothly flowed backward.

The region surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R4) is the front region of the region surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R3), and is the lower region of the opening B400. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R4), air can be smoothly taken into the inside of the projector cover B1.

Further, the exhaust fan can be arranged at a desired position in the space P (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

In FIG. 45, the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L1) and the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L2) are illustrated as the arrangement positions of the exhaust fan.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L1) is located near the opening B510 on the left side, and when the exhaust fan is arranged in the area, the exhaust fan is provided on the left side surface of the case B22. It is close to the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 23). As a result, the air warmed by the heat generated by the projector device B2 can be efficiently sent out to the outside of the projector device B2.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L2) is the lower area of the wall surface B401j of the projector cover B1. When the exhaust fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L2), the traveling direction of the air discharged from the case B22 can be smoothly changed to the forward direction.

As the intake fan and the exhaust fan described above with reference to FIG. 45, both the intake fan and the exhaust fan may be arranged, or only the intake fan may be arranged. However, only the exhaust fan may be arranged.

Further, the intake fan includes an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R1), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R2), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R3), and F ( It may be arranged only in any one area of the area surrounded by the dotted line shown by R4), or may be arranged in two or more areas of these areas. The exhaust fan may be arranged in only one of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L1) and the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L2), or both. It may be arranged in the region.

In the second embodiment, it has been described that an air flow path as shown by a thick arrow in FIG. 29 is formed inside the projector cover B1. However, the air in the projector cover B1 does not necessarily have to flow completely along the path.

An air flow path that can be formed other than the air flow path shown in FIG. 29 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an air flow path that can be formed inside the projector cover.

As shown by the arrow X1 in FIG. 46, for example, there may be a flow in which the air warmed by the heat generated by the projector device B2 goes out of the case B22 through the intake port B22A. The air flowing out from the intake port B22A in this way may move to the rear of the projector cover B1 as shown by the arrow X2. Further, as shown by the arrow X3, there may be an air flow in which the air discharged from the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E goes backward.

Since the rear part of the projector cover B1 is open, the air that has moved backward as shown by the arrow X2 or the arrow X3 is discharged to the outside of the projector cover B1. An exhaust fan may be provided in the rear region of the projector cover B1 so that air can be smoothly discharged from the rear of the projector cover B1.

Further, in the second embodiment, the partition members (duct cover B600 and duct cover B650) are provided to partition the air flow path and the liquid storage space. However, in the present invention, the partition members (duct cover) are provided. It is not essential to provide B600 and duct cover B650).

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described modification, since the inclined portion B502 has an inclination so as to descend toward the rear, the rear portion of the inclined portion B502 has an upper end edge B505a (opening) of the inner wall portion B505. The vertical distance from the lower end of the 510) is longer than that of the front portion, and the liquid L is stored in the rear portion of such an inclined portion B502 (a region away from the lower end of the opening 510). Therefore, even if the duct cover B600 and the duct cover B650 are not provided, it is possible to prevent the liquid R from entering the internal space Q (inside the case B22) of the projector cover B1 through the opening B510. can do.

Further, the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification has the following features.

(7-1) A projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting an image and
Cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left side of the two openings B400) that are open upward. Opening B400) is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (a space P on the right side of the two spaces P) is formed by communicating from the first opening, while communicating from the second opening. Two spaces (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) are formed.
The first space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left direction) by a third opening (opening B510 on the right side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (right direction) by a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. And
The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, while the second opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening on the left side). B510) is in communication with
The projector is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side).
The cover member (blind B500) includes a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and an inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (space P on the right side), and the lower end portion has the first opening. It is provided with an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) having an incline so as to descend as the distance from the portion directly below the above.
At least a part of the inclined portion is located below the lower end of the third opening (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right side) opened upward. ) And a second opening (opening B400 on the left side) are formed. Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left-right direction) are formed. ing. The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, thereby forming a first space (space P on the right side) while forming a second opening. (Opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) communicate with each other, whereby a second space (space P on the left side) is formed. A projector (projector device B2) is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side). As a result, the air that has flowed in from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) has the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening). After passing through the projector (projector device B2) via B510), the second opening (left side) is passed through the fourth opening (left side opening B510) and the second space (left side space P). It is discharged to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and the hot air has a property of going upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (left space P) and forms a second opening (second space P) above the second space (left space P). It will be discharged smoothly from the opening B400) on the left side. As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through such an air flow, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the above modification, the cover member (blind B500) includes a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and an inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (space P on the right side). At the same time, the lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and the inclined portion B502) includes an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) having an inclination such that the lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and the inclined portion B502) descends as the distance from the portion immediately below the first opening (the opening B400 on the right side) increases. Therefore, when a liquid (drink or the like poured by the player) enters the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from the outside of the game machine through the first opening (opening B400 on the right side). , The liquid will flow through the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) so as to descend as the distance from the portion directly below the first opening (opening B400 on the right side). Here, since at least a part of the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) is located below the lower end (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (opening B510 on the right side), the liquid is inclined. When it flows down the portion (inclined portion B502) and reaches below the lower end (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (opening B510 on the right side), the third opening (right side) of the liquid is reached. Since the lower end (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the opening B510) is located above, the liquid is difficult to pass through the third opening (opening B510 on the right side), and the liquid is difficult to pass through the projector. It is unlikely that the (projector device B2) will invade the side where the (projector device B2) is arranged. In this way, according to the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification, the projector (projector device B2) can be protected from foreign substances such as liquids that have invaded from the outside of the game machine.

(7-2) The gaming machine according to (7-1).
On the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G), a fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side of the two openings G41) is placed above the first opening and the second opening. ) And a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) are formed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above modification, the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and a second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right side opening G41) and a sixth opening (left side opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left side opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the game machine from above the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). After allowing this air to flow into the cover member (projector cover B1) through (opening B400 on the right side), the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is passed through the second cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged upward to the outside of the game machine through the opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) of the main body (cabinet G). As described above, in the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification, the discharge destination of the air warmed through the projector (projector device B2) is above the outside of the game machine, but the air is assumed to be the game machine. If it is discharged from the back of the projector, there is a concern that heat will be trapped in the island equipment installed in the game store, which will adversely affect the control of the game machine. In addition, if air is discharged from the side surface of the game machine, the warmed air will be taken into the adjacent game machine, and as a result of a vicious cycle of warm air between the adjacent game machines, the projector It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector device B2) cannot be increased. Further, if the air is discharged to the front of the game machine, hot air may be blown to the player's face. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the modification, it is possible to create an air flow for releasing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine 1 according to the above modification, the fifth opening (right side opening G41) and the sixth opening (left side opening) formed on the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G). Since G41) exists above the first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the second opening (opening B400 on the left side) formed in the cover member (projector cover B1), the fifth opening (opening B400 on the left side) is present. When a foreign substance enters from the outside to the inside of the game machine through the opening G41 on the right side or the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side), the foreign substance enters the first opening (opening B400 on the right side) or the second opening. It is easy to enter the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the opening (opening B400 on the left side). Therefore, there is a concern that foreign matter entering the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) may reach the projector (projector device B2) and adversely affect the projector (projector device B2). For example, when a player injects a drink through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side), the drink passes through the first space (space P on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side). If it penetrates into the projector (projector device B2), the projector (projector device B2) may break down. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) is provided from the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and the first opening (opening B400 on the right side). And even when the liquid enters the inside of the blind B500), the liquid flows along the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) as described above, so that such a situation occurs. Can be prevented.

(7-3) The gaming machine according to (7-1) or (7-2).
A space closed downward is formed by the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) and the wall portion (rear wall portion B503, outer wall portion B504, and inner wall portion B505) continuous with the inclined portion.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification, the wall portion (rear wall portion B503, outer wall portion B504, and inner wall portion B505) continuous with the inclined portion (tilted portion B502) and the inclined portion (tilted portion B502) is lowered. Since the closed space is formed, the liquid that has flowed down the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) can be stored in the space. As a result, as long as the liquid level of the stored liquid is below the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), the third opening (right opening B510). It is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the arrangement space of the projector (projector device B2) through the projector.

(8-1) A projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting an image and
Cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left side of the two openings B400) that are open upward. Opening B400) is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (a space P on the right side of the two spaces P) is formed by communicating from the first opening, while communicating from the second opening. Two spaces (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) are formed.
The first space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left direction) by a third opening (opening B510 on the right side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (right direction) by a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. And
The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, while the second opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening on the left side). B510) is in communication with
The projector is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right side) opened upward. ) And a second opening (opening B400 on the left side) are formed. Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left-right direction) are formed. ing. The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, thereby forming a first space (space P on the right side) while forming a second opening. (Opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) communicate with each other, whereby a second space (space P on the left side) is formed. A projector (projector device B2) is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side). As a result, the air that has flowed in from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) has the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening). After passing through the projector (projector device B2) via B510), the second opening (left side) is passed through the fourth opening (left side opening B510) and the second space (left side space P). It is discharged to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and the hot air has a property of going upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (left space P) and forms a second opening (second space P) above the second space (left space P). It will be discharged smoothly from the opening B400) on the left side. As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through such an air flow, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

(8-2) The gaming machine according to (8-1) above.
The projector has a fan (intake) arranged between the first vent (intake port B22A) and the second vent (exhaust port B22E) and the first vent and the second vent. Equipped with fans 244A and 244B)
The first vent (intake port B22A) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) face each other, while the second vent (exhaust port B22E) and the fourth opening (opening on the left side) face each other. The projector is arranged so as to face B510).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above modification, the projector (projector device B2) is provided with a first vent (intake port B22A) and a second vent (exhaust port B22E), and a first. Fans (intake fans 244A and 244B) are provided between the vent (intake port B22A) and the second vent (exhaust port B22E), and the first vent (intake port B22A) is the first. Since the projector (projector device B2) is arranged so that the second vent (exhaust port B22E) faces the fourth opening (left opening B510) and faces the opening 3 (opening B510 on the right side). By forcibly sucking air with a fan (intake fan 244A / 244B), the above-mentioned air flow can be smoothly created.

(8-3) The gaming machine according to (8-1) or (8-2).
On the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G), a fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side of the two openings G41) is placed above the first opening and the second opening. ) And a sixth opening (the opening G41 on the left side of the two openings G41) are formed.
The projector is housed in the main body so as to be arranged above the screen.
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above modification, the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and a second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right side opening G41) and a sixth opening (left side opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left side opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the game machine from above the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). After allowing this air to flow into the cover member (projector cover B1) through (opening B400 on the right side), the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is passed through the second cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged upward to the outside of the game machine through the opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) of the main body (cabinet G). As described above, in the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification, the discharge destination of the air warmed through the projector (projector device B2) is above the outside of the game machine, but the air is assumed to be the game machine. If it is discharged from the back of the projector, there is a concern that heat will be trapped in the island equipment installed in the game store, which will adversely affect the control of the game machine. In addition, if air is discharged from the side surface of the game machine, the warmed air will be taken into the adjacent game machine, and as a result of a vicious cycle of warm air between the adjacent game machines, the projector It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector device B2) cannot be increased. Further, if the air is discharged to the front of the game machine, hot air may be blown to the player's face. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the modification, it is possible to create an air flow for releasing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification, the projector (projector device B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). It is housed in the cabinet G), and the arrangement position of the projector (projector device B2) is close to the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G). Therefore, the distance between the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) formed on the upper surface of the main body (upper wall G4 of the cabinet G) and the projector (projector device B2) is also increased. It is short, and accordingly, the number of members and devices existing between the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) and the projector (projector device B2) is relatively small. There is. Therefore, in designing a flow path in which the air taken in from the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) is discharged from the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) via the projector (projector device B2), the process is in progress. It is not necessary to make a complicated detour route to avoid the members and devices existing in the air flow path, and the air flow path can be designed relatively easily.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine has been described. Hereinafter, a modified example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51.

FIG. 47 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing a decorative unit and a frame member of a pachinko gaming machine from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the pachinko gaming machine 6100 includes a glass door 6111, a wooden frame 6112, a base door 6113, a game board 6114, a plate unit 6115, a launching device 6122 for launching a game ball, and various control boards. It is composed of a board unit 6123 including the board unit, a ball payout unit for giving a game ball as a game value, and the like.

The glass door 6111 described above is pivotally attached to the base door 6113 so as to be openable and closable. Further, an opening 6116 is formed in the center of the glass door 6111, and a transparent protective glass 6124 is arranged in the opening 6116. Further, the base door 6113 is pivotally attached to the front of the wooden frame 6112 described above.

The dish unit 6115 described above is arranged on the base door 6113 so as to be located below the glass door 6111. The plate unit 6115 is provided with an upper plate 6125 above the plate unit 6115 and a lower plate 6126 below the plate unit 6115. The upper plate 6125 and the lower plate 6126 are formed with payout outlets 6131A and 6131B for lending the game ball and paying out the game ball (prize ball), and when the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the game is played. The balls are discharged, and in particular, the upper plate 6125 stores the game balls for firing in the game area 6141.

The launcher 6122 described above is arranged on the base door 6113 so as to be located on the side of the dish unit 6115. The launching device 6122 is provided with a launching handle 6132 that can be operated by the player, and the pachinko game can be advanced by operating the launching handle 6132 by the player. When the launch handle 6132 is held by the player and is rotated clockwise, electric power is supplied to the launch motor according to the rotation angle, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 6125 is released. It is fired sequentially on the game board.

The game board 6114 described above is arranged in front of the base door 6113 so as to be located behind the protective glass 6124. The game board 6114 has a game area 6141 in front of the game board 6114 on which the launched game ball can roll. The game area 6141 is an area surrounded by a guide rail or the like and on which the game ball can roll. In this way, the game ball launched by the launching device 6122 is guided by the guide rail provided on the game board and moves to the upper part of the game board 6114, and then a plurality of obstacle nails provided in the game area 6141. The collision with the game board causes the game board to flow downward from above while changing its traveling direction.

As shown in FIG. 47, a decorative unit 6258 is provided in the upper region on the front surface of the glass door 6111. The decorative unit 6258 is arranged so as to project forward of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

A cavity is formed inside the decorative unit 6258, and the irradiation unit B described in the above-described embodiment is arranged in the cavity. FIG. 47 shows a state in which the inside of the decorative unit 6258 is seen through from above the decorative unit 6258.

As shown in FIG. 48, a screen device C (see FIG. 5) is arranged on the back side of the game board 6114. As a result, the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) of the screen device C is irradiated with the light emitted from the projector device B2 of the irradiation unit B as in the above-described embodiment. You can do it.

The decorative unit 6258 is mounted on top of the frame member 6211 (see FIG. 49). Although not shown, the frame member 6211 is fixed to the back side of the glass door 6111.

As shown in FIG. 49, the irradiation unit B is attached to the upper part of the frame member 6211. By attaching the decorative unit 6258 to the frame member 6211 with the irradiation unit B attached to the frame member 6211, the irradiation unit B is housed in the internal space of the decorative unit 6258.

Further, the speaker 6152 and the speaker holder 6152A are integrally attached to the upper part of the frame member 6211 on both the left and right sides of the irradiation unit B. On the other hand, the decorative unit 6258 is provided with speaker holes 6151A and 6151B on the right side and the left side, respectively. The speaker holes 6151A and 6151B are formed as mesh-shaped openings.

In a state where the decorative unit 6258 is attached to the frame member 6211, the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B cover the front of the speaker 6152, respectively, and the sound generated from the speaker 6152 is transmitted through the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B, respectively. It can be released to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

Here, the speaker hole 6151A also functions as a vent for taking in air from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100. As shown in FIG. 49, an intake fan 6244 is arranged on the front right side of the irradiation unit B. As a result, air is taken into the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the outside front of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 through the speaker hole 6151A.

This air is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R of the projector cover B1 (the opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400) as in the second embodiment, and is generated by the projector device B2. It travels inside the projector cover B1 while taking away the heat, and goes out of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the opening B400 on the left side of the two openings B400).

The air that has flowed out of the projector cover B1 passes through the through hole 6245 formed in the frame member 6211 and moves rearward, and is discharged to the outside from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

The air flow described above is indicated by arrows in FIGS. 47 and 49. In the second embodiment, a case where air is taken in from the outside upper side of the game machine 1 and air is discharged to the outer upper side of the game machine 1 has been described. On the other hand, in this modification, air is taken in from the outside front of the pachinko gaming machine 6100, and air is discharged to the outside rear of the pachinko gaming machine 6100. As described above, in the present invention, the direction in which the air for cooling the projector is taken in and the direction in which the air is discharged are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately designed according to the arrangement position of the projector, the structure around the projector, and the like.

Since the pachinko gaming machine has a shorter depth in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine than the pachislot gaming machine, when another pachinko gaming machine is installed on the back side of one pachinko gaming machine in the same island facility. , There is a relatively large space between these pachinko machines. Therefore, even if the air warmed by the projector is discharged from the back of the pachinko gaming machine, it is considered that the island equipment of the pachinko gaming machine does not retain as much heat as the island equipment of the pachislot gaming machine.

Hereinafter, as another modification, a case where air is taken in from the outside right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 and air is discharged to the outside left side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 50, an opening 6300R is formed on the right side surface of the decorative unit 6258. As a result, air is taken into the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the outside right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 through the opening 6300R.

This air is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R of the projector cover B1 (the opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400) and is generated by the projector device B2, as in the above-described modification. It travels inside the projector cover B1 while taking away the heat, and goes out of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the opening B400 on the left side of the two openings B400).

Although not shown in the figure, an opening (opening 6300L) is formed on the left side surface of the decorative unit 6258 as well as the right side surface. As a result, the air discharged from the opening B400L to the outside of the projector cover B1 is discharged from the opening 6300L to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

Such an air flow is indicated by an arrow in FIG. In this modification, it is considered that the warmed air may be taken into the adjacent game machine because the air discharge direction is set to the side of the game machine. In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, when the air discharge direction is set to the side of the gaming machine, for example, the width of the decorative unit 6258 in the left-right direction is further shortened to make one pachinko machine. It is desirable that the exhaust port (opening 6300L) of the gaming machine and the intake port (opening 6300R) of the pachinko gaming machine installed next to the pachinko gaming machine are configured to be separated to some extent.

Hereinafter, another modification will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine.

In the above-described modification, the irradiation unit B has been described as being attached to the frame member 6211. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 51, the irradiation unit B is attached to the base door 6113. The speaker 6152 is also attached to the base door 6113. Even in such a modified example, the same air flow path as in the above-described example can be formed.

Although FIG. 51 shows how the irradiation unit B is attached to the front side of the base door 6113, the irradiation unit B may be attached to the rear side of the base door 6113. In the present invention, the irradiation unit B may be installed in front of the game board or may be installed behind the game board. When the irradiation unit B is installed behind the game board, the irradiation unit B can be arranged by using the space while forming a space on the back side of the game board.

For example, an opening portion is provided in the center of the game board, and the irradiation unit is arranged on the base door, the game board, or other rear members of the pachinko gaming machine so that the front portion of the irradiation unit penetrates through the opening portion. May be good. In that case, a game board of a conventional general pachinko game machine (a pachinko game machine having an opening in the center of the game board so that a liquid crystal display device or the like behind the game board can be visually recognized through the opening). Can be diverted as it is. For example, by removing the liquid crystal display device, arranging the screen mechanism, and further arranging the irradiation unit on the rear member of the game board or the like, the irradiation unit and the screen mechanism are mounted while keeping the shape of the game board as it is. It will be possible to make it a new game machine. When such a configuration is adopted, since a part of the front of the irradiation unit projects forward from the game board, a larger space behind the pachinko game machine can be secured. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the temperature rise in the island equipment when the pachinko game machine with the irradiation unit is installed in the entire island equipment in the amusement park where the island equipment is narrow. Further, a small-sized liquid crystal display device that arranges a decorative member such as a logo according to the model or performs auxiliary decoration in front of the irradiation unit that can be visually recognized by the player (for example, around the reflector holding portion B11). By arranging an illumination board or the like, the irradiation unit can be blindfolded so as not to be seen by the player, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

The screen device C may be installed in a state of being attached to the irradiation unit B, or may be installed in a state of being separated from the irradiation unit B.

In the modification described above, the air discharge direction is the rear or side of the game machine, but the air may be discharged from above the game machine as in the second embodiment. When the air discharge direction is upward, for example, an exhaust opening may be formed on the upper surface of the decorative unit 6258 (glass door 6111). In this case, when the irradiation unit B is installed behind the game board, an opening may be appropriately formed in the game board in order to secure an air passage.

In the present invention, it is possible to appropriately form an opening in the member existing on the air flow path according to the direction in which air is taken in and the direction in which air is discharged, and the path through which air flows. A tubular duct may be provided depending on the air flow path.

Further, in order to make the air flow smooth, an intake fan and / or an exhaust fan can be appropriately arranged. For example, an intake fan (for example, the intake fan 6244 in FIG. 49) may be arranged between the opening for taking in air (for example, the opening 6300R in FIG. 50) and the opening B400R in the projector cover B1. It is possible to dispose an exhaust fan between the opening for discharging (for example, the opening 6300L in FIG. 50) and the opening B400L of the projector cover B1. However, if the fan provided inside the irradiation unit B sufficiently performs intake and exhaust, it is not necessary to dispose the fan outside the irradiation unit B.

In the above-described modification, the projector cover B1 described with reference to FIG. 45 is shown as being adopted, but the configuration of the projector cover is not particularly limited, and an opening for taking in air for cooling the projector. In addition, a projector cover having an opening for discharging the air can be appropriately adopted. These openings can be formed at arbitrary locations such as the front and rear, above and below, and sides of the projector cover, and the position of forming the openings is appropriately determined in consideration of the cooling efficiency of the projector and the like. be able to. Further, the projector may be arranged inside the game machine in an exposed state without being covered by the projector cover, and the cooling air taken in from the outside of the game machine is directly sent to the projector (via the projector cover). It can also be configured to hit (without doing).

[Third Embodiment]
The first embodiment and the second embodiment have been described above. Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as that of the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment and the second embodiment also applies to the third embodiment will be omitted.

<Display unit 9000>
FIG. 52 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the display unit. FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the display unit. FIG. 54 is a perspective view showing a state in which the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 53. FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing how light is projected from the projector in a state where the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 52.

The display unit 9000 shown in FIG. 52 is interchangeably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5) in the cabinet G, similarly to the display unit A described in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the display unit 9000 includes a unit housing 9010, a projector 9020, a mirror 9030, and a cabinet-side screen 9040.

The unit housing 9010 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate 9011, a right side plate 9012 erected at the right end of the bottom plate 9011, a left side plate 9013 erected at the left end of the bottom plate 9011, and a rear end of the bottom plate 9011. It has a back plate 9014 erected on the part. By connecting the right side plate 9012, the left side plate 9013, and the back plate 9014 to the bottom plate 9011 by screwing, a box-shaped housing in which the front side and the upper surface side are open is formed.

A projector installation member 9015 for installing the projector 9020 is attached to the back plate 9014. The projector 9020 is installed in the unit housing 9010 by being engaged with the front portion of the projector installation member 9015.

The projector 9020 has the same configuration as the projector device B2 (see FIG. 12) described in the first embodiment (for example, a lens having the same configuration as the projection lens 210), and projects light including an image. It is possible to do. The projector 9020 is installed so that the lens is on the lower side, so that the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward.

Below the projector installation member 9015, a mirror installation portion 9016 for installing the mirror 9030 is formed. The mirror installation portion 9016 has inclined sides 9016a and 9016b that are inclined from the back plate 9014 to the bottom plate 9011.

The mirror 9030 has the same configuration as the optical mirror B32 (see FIG. 7) described in the first embodiment, and can reflect the light projected from the projector 9020. The mirror 9030 is installed along the inclined sides 9016a and 9016b of the mirror installation portion 9016. As a result, the mirror 9030 is in an inclined posture so that the front side is lower than the rear side.

As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 and traveling downward is reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55). In FIG. 55, the irradiation range of light is indicated by diagonal lines. The relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030 shown in FIG. 55 is the relative positional relationship shown in FIG. 53 (the state in which the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030 are installed in the unit housing 9010). It is the same as the positional relationship. That is, FIG. 55 is an exploded view of the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030 while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the state shown in FIG. 53.

A cabinet-side screen 9040 is fitted to the front portion of the bottom plate 9011 to stand upright. As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 and reflected forward by the rear mirror 9030 is incident on the cabinet side screen 9040 from the rear (rear side).

The cabinet-side screen 9040 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface. The cabinet-side screen 9040 is a transmissive type that is displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and is incident on a uniformly flat back-side incident surface 9040a on which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident. It has a display surface 9040b on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light incident on the surface 9040a. The cabinet-side screen 9040 is formed of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface 9040a of the cabinet side screen 9040, an image (still image or moving image) related to the game is displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet side screen 9040. Will be done. The moving image is composed of a large number of still images, and is obtained by continuously changing the large number of still images over time. In the present specification, moving images and moving images are synonymous.

<Relationship between light irradiation range and cabinet side screen 9040>
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector and the screen on the cabinet side.

In FIG. 56, the cabinet side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is shaded. The irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is wider than that of the cabinet side screen 9040. Specifically, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the entire surface (shaded area in FIG. 56) of the cabinet side screen 9040 (incident surface 9040a) and passes through the peripheral region of the cabinet side screen 9040. In FIG. 56, the peripheral region of the cabinet side screen 9040 in the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is shown by diagonal lines.

Of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that does not enter the cabinet-side screen 9040 and passes through the area shown by the diagonal line in FIG. 56 travels in front of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Part of the light that travels forward of the cabinet-side screen 9040 will enter the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 of the upper door mechanism UD, as described below (FIG. 61). (B) and (c)).

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is a front view of the gaming machine.

As described in the first embodiment, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5). The upper door mechanism UD shown in FIG. 57 is arranged in front of the upper space in the cabinet G and closes the upper part of the opening in the cabinet G, similarly to the upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 4) according to the first embodiment. Is provided so that

As shown in FIG. 58, the upper door mechanism UD has a panel base HH that forms the skeleton of the upper door mechanism UD. Panel mechanisms HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG are provided on the front side of the panel base HH. Further, the upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 (see FIG. 3) at a central portion (a position where it overlaps with the cabinet side screen 9040 in the front view), and the upper display window UD1 has a transparent panel UD11. It is provided. As a result, when an image is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the image becomes visible to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, a door-side right screen 9050 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the right side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). A door-side left screen 9060 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the left side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have substantially the same shape.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have a shape in which a flat screen is curved (for example, a semi-cylindrical shape obtained by dividing a cylinder in half), and the reel screen mechanism described in the first embodiment. Similar to the shape of F1 (see FIG. 10) in the side view, the shape in the top view (bottom view) is an arc shape. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are transparent type that are displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, like the cabinet-side screen 9040. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are formed of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, and a resin film as main materials, and exhibit a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

The door side right screen 9050 includes an incident surface 9050a on the back side on which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a display surface 9050b on the front side on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface 9050a. Has. The left screen 9060 on the door side includes an incident surface 9060a on the back side on which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a display surface 9060b on the front side on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface 9060a. Has.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side, respectively. That is, the entrance surface 9050a and the display surface 9050b of the door side right screen 9050, and the entrance surface 9060a and the display surface 9060b of the door side left screen 9060 are convex toward the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected from the projector 9020. There is.

FIG. 57 shows the positional relationship between the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 and the cabinet-side screen 9040 arranged in the cabinet G when the upper door mechanism UD is closed. In the figure, the cabinet side screen 9040 is shown by a virtual line.

As shown in FIG. 57, the side forming the left end of the door side right screen 9050 (side 9050c shown in FIG. 60) and the side forming the right end of the cabinet side screen 9040 (side 9040c shown in FIG. 52) are close to each other. The side 9050c of the door side right screen 9050 is located slightly to the right of the side 9040c of the cabinet side screen 9040. Further, the side forming the right end of the door side left screen 9060 (side 9060c shown in FIG. 60) and the side forming the left end of the cabinet side screen 9040 (side 9040d shown in FIG. 52) are close to each other (or substantially in contact with each other). ), And the side 9060c of the door side screen 9060 is located slightly to the left of the side 9040d of the cabinet side screen 9040.

The sides 9050c of the door-side right screen 9050, the sides 9060c of the door-side left screen 9060, and the sides 9040c and sides 9040d of the cabinet-side screen 9040 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. That is, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door-side right screen 9050 and the rear end (side 9060c) of the door-side left screen 9060 are respectively located on substantially the same plane as the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Since the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are curved so as to be convex forward, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are generally in front of the cabinet-side screen 9040. It will be located.

Further, a side forming the lower end of the door side right screen 9050 (side 9050d shown in FIG. 60), a side forming the lower end of the door side left screen 9060 (side 9060d shown in FIG. 60), and a lower end of the cabinet side screen 9040. (Side 9040e shown in FIG. 52) has substantially the same position (height) in the vertical direction (these three sides are located on substantially the same plane). Further, the vertical lengths of the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (sides 9050c and side 9060c) are longer than the vertical lengths of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (sides 9040c and sides 9040d). There is. As a result, the lower ends of the door-side right screen 9050, the door-side left screen 9060, and the cabinet-side screen 9040 are located at substantially the same height, and the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are located at substantially the same height as the cabinet-side screen 9040. Has a taller structure.

<Display of images on the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060>
FIG. 61A is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector and the screen on the cabinet side. FIG. 61B is a diagram showing how the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen is incident on the door side right screen. FIG. 61 (c) is a diagram showing how the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen is incident on the door side left screen. 62 and 63 are diagrams for explaining images displayed on the cabinet side screen, the door side right screen, and the door side left screen.

In FIG. 61 (a), the regions shown by diagonal lines in FIG. 56 (the peripheral region of the cabinet-side screen 9040 in the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020) are divided into three regions (region I, region II, for convenience. And, it is shown separately in region III). Area I is an area located on the right side of the cabinet side screen 9040. Region II is a region located on the left side of the cabinet side screen 9040. Region III is a region located above the cabinet-side screen 9040. In FIG. 61A, the cabinet side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is shaded as in FIG. 56.

As described above, a part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface 9040a of the cabinet side screen 9040. As a result, the image is displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet side screen 9040.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen 9040 and passed through the region I in FIG. 61 (a) is the door side right screen 9050. It is incident on the incident surface 9050a. As a result, the image is displayed on the display surface 9050b of the door side right screen 9050.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen 9040 and passed through the region II in FIG. 61 (a) is the door side left screen. It is incident on the incident surface 9060a of 9060. As a result, the image is displayed on the display surface 9060b of the door side left screen 9060.

As described above, images (still images and moving images related to the game) are displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060, respectively. In the present embodiment, each image displayed on the three screens (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060) corresponds to one image data, and one image. Images can be displayed on each of the three screens by using the data.

62 and 63 show such image data. The shaded area (area A) in FIG. 62 (a) contains information indicating an image displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040. The shaded area (area B) in FIG. 62 (a) includes information indicating an image displayed on the door side right screen 9050. The shaded area (area C) in FIG. 62 (a) includes information indicating an image displayed on the door side left screen 9060. The remaining region (region D) in FIG. 62 (a) contains information having a pixel value of 0. The pixel value corresponds to the light transmittance of the pixels formed on the liquid crystal panel included in the projector 9020. When the pixel value is 0, it means that the light transmittance is the minimum, and the display surface of the screen corresponding to the region where the pixel value is 0 is black.

FIG. 62B shows an example of image data. The image data shown in FIG. 62B includes information indicating the effect image 9100 in the area A, information indicating the fireworks image 9101 in the area B, and information indicating the character image 9102 in the area C. The area corresponding to the shaded area in the figure includes information having a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, the effect image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the fireworks image 9101 is displayed on the door side right screen 9050, and the character image 9102 is displayed on the door side left screen 9060.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door side right screen 9050, the rear end (side 9060c) of the door side left screen 9060, and the display surface 9040b of the cabinet side screen 9040 are The positions in the front-back direction are almost the same. As a result, the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060 are substantially equal in distance from the projector 9020 in the front-rear direction, so that the focus is not significantly deviated. It has become.

FIG. 63A shows an example of another image data. The image data shown in FIG. 63A includes information indicating the effect image 9100 in the area A, information indicating the decorative image 9110 in the area B, and information indicating the decorative image 9111 in the area C. .. The area corresponding to the shaded area in the figure includes information having a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, the effect image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the decorative image 9110 is displayed on the door side right screen 9050, and the decorative image 9111 is displayed on the door side left screen 9060. ..

FIG. 63 (b) shows an example of still another image data. The image data shown in FIG. 63B includes information indicating the decorative image 9110 in the area B and information indicating the decorative image 9111 in the area C. The area corresponding to the shaded area in the figure includes information having a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, the decorative image 9110 is displayed on the door side right screen 9050, and the decorative image 9111 is displayed on the door side left screen 9060.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described.

Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

However, in a game machine in which an image is projected from such a projector onto a screen, there is a problem that the production expression becomes poor due to the flat screen.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of performing various production expressions.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(9-1) Screens (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060)
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen is provided.
The screen is arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident from the back side, and the image can be displayed on the front side by the light incident from the back side.
As the screen, a first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and a second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060) arranged sideways or above or below the first screen in front view. Is provided,
In the projector, the first screen, and the second screen, a part of the light projected by the projector is incident on the first screen, while the light projected by the projector is the first. At least a part of the light that does not enter the first screen is arranged so as to enter the second screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060) is arranged on the side of the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) in the front view. There is. Then, while a part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040), the first screen (cabinet) of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident. At least a part of the light that does not enter the side screen 9040) can be incident on the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060).

Therefore, it is possible to display images on the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060), respectively, and these images are viewed by the player. In that case, they will be displayed in a positional relationship so that they are lined up side by side. Thereby, the player can visually see the player through the images displayed on such two screens (the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060)). It is possible to entertain and perform a variety of directing expressions.

(9-2) The gaming machine according to (9-1) above.
A main body (cabinet G) accommodating the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and having an opening on the front surface, and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the first screen visible. With
The second screen (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060) is provided on the opening / closing door.
It is characterized by that.

Generally, the opening / closing door of a game machine is decorated (modeled) according to the model, but such decoration requires a large amount of cost. Then, every time a new model is developed (for each project), if the opening / closing door is shaped and the decoration is changed, the cost will increase accordingly.

In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is provided with a second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060), and the second screen. By displaying an image (an image similar to the decoration on the outside) on (the right screen 9050 on the door side and the left screen 9060 on the door side), the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is not decorated with the decoration peculiar to the model. However, the same visual effect as when decorated can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a simple opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that omits decoration, and the cost for decoration can be suppressed. When developing a new model, it is not necessary to change the decoration of the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) on a large scale, and image data according to the model (image data similar to the decoration peculiar to the model). ) Should be prepared. As a result, if the images displayed on the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060) are made suitable for the new model, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the decoration change. The cost can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that has passed through the region I (the region located on the right side of the cabinet side screen 9040) in FIG. 61A is incident on the door side right screen 9050. Of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that has passed through the region II (the region located on the left side of the cabinet side screen 9040) in FIG. 61A is incident on the door side left screen 9060 on the door side. It has been described that the right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 are arranged respectively. That is, it has been described that the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (second screen) are arranged on the side of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (first screen) in the front view.

In the present invention, the positional relationship between the first screen (cabinet side screen) and the second screen is not limited to this example, and the second screen is above or below the first screen (cabinet side screen) in front view. It may be arranged. For example, while providing the door side upper screen on the upper side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), the light projected from the projector 9020 is located on the upper side of the region III (cabinet side screen 9040) in FIG. 61 (a). The light that has passed through the region) may be configured to enter the upper screen on the door side. Further, while providing the lower door side screen under the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), the area of the light projected from the projector 9020 located below the cabinet side screen (for example, FIG. 61 (a)). ) And the area facing the cabinet side screen 9040) may be configured to enter the lower door side screen. As the second screen in the present invention, all four screens, a door-side right screen, a door-side left screen, a door-side upper screen, and a door-side lower screen, may be provided, or any of the four screens may be provided. One, two, or three screens may be provided. A screen arranged on the side of such a cabinet-side screen (door-side right screen or door-side left screen) and a screen arranged above or below the cabinet-side screen (door-side upper screen or door-side lower). The screen) may be configured as one screen. For example, the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, and the door-side upper screen may be configured to be integrated.

In the present invention, the arrangement position of the second screen (door side right screen, door side left screen, door side upper screen, and door side lower screen) in the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is not particularly limited. That is, the second screen (door side right screen, door side left screen, door side upper screen, and door side lower screen) is provided in an area close to the first screen (cabinet side screen) in the front view. It may be provided in a region separated from the first screen (cabinet side screen) to some extent. For example, the structure of the arrangement position of the top panel mechanism HA, the upper left panel mechanism HB, the upper right panel mechanism HC, the left horizontal panel mechanism HD, the right horizontal panel mechanism HE (see FIG. 60), etc. is changed, and the door side is moved to that position. An upper screen, a left screen on the door side, a right screen on the door side, and the like may be provided. As a result, if the light projected from the projector is incident on the back side of these screens and the image is displayed on the front side, the area corresponding to the arrangement position of these panel mechanisms can be designed unique to the model. The model information can be displayed, and such design and information can be easily changed by appropriately using the image data.

The top panel mechanism HA is arranged at the upper end of the upper door mechanism UD, the left side panel mechanism HD is arranged at the left end of the upper door mechanism UD, and the right side panel mechanism HE is arranged at the right end of the upper door mechanism UD. When a second screen (door side upper screen, door side left screen, door side right screen, etc.) is provided at these arrangement positions (area along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD) where the parts are arranged. , It is necessary to widen the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector (see FIG. 56). For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the irradiation range is maximized and the entire upper door mechanism UD is irradiated (assuming that the cabinet side screen is not provided). In order to widen the irradiation range, for example, the arrangement position and inclination of the mirror 9030 may be adjusted. By adjusting the relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030, the irradiation range can be changed as appropriate, and the light that travels forward without incident on the cabinet side screen is emitted from the top panel mechanism HA, left side. To reach the arrangement position of the panel mechanism HD, the right side panel mechanism HE, etc. (the area along the outer circumference of the upper door mechanism UD) (so that the light is irradiated over a wide range of the upper door mechanism UD). It is possible to design. As described above, in the present invention, only the portion of the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is close to the first screen (cabinet side screen) in the front view is irradiated by the light projected from the projector. Alternatively, the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) may be irradiated in a wider range over the outer peripheral portion.

In the third embodiment, as an example of the image data, the area A, the area B, and the area C shown in FIG. 62A are separate images (in the example of FIG. 62B, the effect image 9100 and the fireworks image). Image data including information indicating 9101 and character image 9102) has been described. The image data used in the present invention is not limited to this example, and may include, for example, information indicating one image (for example, an effect image 9100) so as to straddle the area A, the area B, and the area C. Image data may be used. By using such image data, a part of one image (for example, effect image 9100) is displayed on each of the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060, and each screen. The one image (for example, the effect image 9100) is formed by integrating a part of the images displayed in. As described above, in the present invention, different images are displayed on the cabinet side screen and the screens arranged in the peripheral area thereof (door side right screen, door side left screen, door side upper screen, door side lower screen, etc.). May be displayed individually, or one video expression may be performed as a whole by combining the images displayed on the screens.

Further, in the third embodiment, the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 (second screen) are provided in a state of being exposed on the front side of the game machine 1 (door side right screen 9050 and door side left). No other member is provided on the front side of the screen 9060). As a result, when an image is displayed on the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060, the image becomes visible to the player. However, in the present invention, a transparent panel may be provided on the front side of the second screen (door side right screen and door side left screen). If it is a transparent panel, the image displayed on the second screen is not obstructed from the player's field of view, and it is considered that there is no hindrance for the player to visually recognize the image. On the other hand, by covering the second screen with a transparent panel, the rigidity of the game machine can be ensured and the second screen can be prevented from being damaged. When the transparent panel is provided, the shape of the transparent panel is not particularly limited, but for example, a transparent panel having irregularities can be adopted. This makes it possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the second screen (the right screen on the door side and the left screen on the door side), and gives an appearance similar to that when the opening / closing door itself is three-dimensionally decorated. Can be created.

Further, in the third embodiment, it has been described that the shapes of the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are curved shapes of a flat screen (the shape in the top view is an arc shape). However, the shape of the second screen (door-side right screen, door-side left screen, and door-side upper screen) in the present invention is not particularly limited, and a screen having an arbitrary shape can be appropriately adopted. For example, the second screen may be a flat-shaped screen such as the cabinet-side screen 9040, a screen having irregularities, or a screen having a rounded shape. , The screen may have an angular shape.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The first to third embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the fourth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the third embodiment also applies to the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
FIG. 64 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism and the cabinet.

In FIG. 64, the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is shown by using an alternate long and short dash line. Similar to the third embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55).

In the third embodiment, it has been described that a part of the light traveling forward in this way is incident on the cabinet side screen 9040 (see FIG. 53) from the rear (rear side). On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the cabinet side screen 9040 is not provided, and all the light projected from the projector 9020 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

As will be described later, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen sheet 1046, a screen sheet 1056, and a screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 67 and 68). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 from the rear (rear side), and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets. It will be displayed. The details will be described below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 66 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen unit 1040, a decorative unit 1050, and an indirect lighting unit 1060. Hereinafter, each unit will be described.

<Screen unit 1040>
FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 69 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower pressing member, the upper pressing member, and the lower frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate and the screen sheet viewed from the rear, while the lower pressing member and the upper pressing member are viewed from the front. FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the upper pressing member and the upper frame as viewed from below. FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, and the lower frame as viewed from the rear.

Note that FIG. 67 shows a state in which each component of the upper door mechanism UD is viewed from diagonally forward. FIG. 68 shows a state in which each component of the upper door mechanism UD is viewed from diagonally rearward. In FIG. 69, the translucent plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower pressing member UD101, and the upper pressing member UD102 show a state in which they are assembled, and the lower frame UD100 shows a state in which they exist independently. There is. In FIG. 70, the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are shown in an assembled state, and the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper pressing member UD102 are shown to exist independently. FIG. 71 shows how the upper pressing member UD102 and the upper frame UD110 each exist independently. FIG. 72 shows a state in which the translucent plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, and the lower frame UD100 are assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the screen unit 1040 includes a light transmitting plate 1045 and a screen sheet 1046.

The translucent plate 1045 is mainly made of a resin such as a translucent acrylic plate or a glass plate, and is formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface. The light transmitting plate 1045 has a flat surface portion 1045a located at the center, a curved portion 1045b formed continuously from the left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 1045a toward the rear, and the curved portion 1045b from the rear end to the rear. A side surface portion 1045c formed continuously is provided. The flat surface portion 1045a and the side surface portion 1045c are formed in a planar shape, and their surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other. The curved portion 1045b has a shape in which a flat plate is curved, as in the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 58) in the third embodiment.

The screen sheet 1046 is a transmissive screen displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and is a screen according to the third embodiment (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060). ), The incident surface on the back side on which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and the display surface on the front side on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface. The screen sheet 1046 is formed, for example, using a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface, and is milky white, translucent, or gray when not projected. Shows color.

The screen sheet 1046 includes a flat surface portion 1046a located at the center and a curved portion 1046b formed continuously from the left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 1046a toward the rear. The flat surface portion 1046a is formed in a flat shape, and the curved portion 1046b has a shape in which the flat plate is curved. The flat surface portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 have substantially the same size and shape as the flat surface portion 1045a and the curved portion 1045b of the translucent plate 1045.

The screen sheet 1046 is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting plate 1045. Specifically, the front surface of the flat surface portion 1045a of the translucent plate 1045 and the front surface of the flat surface portion 1046a of the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other, and the back surface of the curved portion 1045b of the translucent plate 1045. And the front surface of the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface (front surface) of the screen sheet 1046, an image (still image or still image) related to the game is projected on the display surface (front surface) of the screen sheet 1046. Moving image) is displayed. Since the translucent plate 1045 is formed transparently and there is no structure in front of the translucent plate 1045 that blocks the player's view, when an image is displayed on the screen sheet 1046, the image is displayed by the player. It becomes visible from.

Further, the screen sheet 1046 has a flat surface portion 1046a and a curved portion 1046b, and since the positions in the depth direction are different between the flat surface portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b, images are displayed on both the flat surface portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b. By displaying the image, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the entire image displayed on the screen sheet 1046. Further, in the light transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046, the curved portion 1045b and the curved portion 1046b are formed by forming (molding in an open space), respectively, and thereby, for example, when the curved portion is formed by vacuum processing or the like. Compared with, the deformation of the image can be suppressed.

The light-transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 configured as described above are pressed by the lower frame UD100 and the upper frame UD110 in a state where the lower portion is pressed by the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper portion is pressed by the upper pressing member UD102. It is supported.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69, the lower frame UD100 is formed as a U-shaped member, and is slightly projected upward at the horizontally arranged bottom plate UD100a and the front end of the bottom plate UD100a. The wall portion UD100b, the right end portion UD100c extending in the vertical direction at the right end portion of the bottom plate UD100a, and the left side portion UD100d extending in the vertical direction at the left end portion of the bottom plate UD100a are provided. The translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are placed on the bottom plate UD100a in a state where the translucent plate 1045 is in contact with the bottom plate UD100a, the right side portion UD100c, and the left side portion UD100d. In this state, the lower part of the front surface of the light transmitting plate 1045 comes into contact with the wall portion UD100b. The wall portion UD100b has a shape corresponding to the flat portion 1045a, the curved portion 1045b, and the side surface portion 1045c of the transparent plate 1045 so that the entire lower front surface of the transparent plate 1045 can be brought into contact with the wall portion UD100b.

As shown in FIG. 70, the lower holding member UD101 is formed in a plate shape, and the front side surface (holding surface UD101a) thereof has a planar shape and a curved shape corresponding to the screen sheet 1046. It has a formed part. With the light-transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 mounted on the bottom plate UD100a of the lower frame UD100, the lower pressing member UD101 is fixed to the lower frame UD100, so that the lower part of the screen sheet 1046 is formed by the lower frame UD100. It is sandwiched between the wall portion UD100b and the translucent plate 1045 and the pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101, and is pressed by the pressing surface UD101a. The lower holding member UD101 can be attached to the lower frame UD100 by screwing a screw through the screw insertion hole UD101b (see FIG. 69) into the screw hole UD100e of the lower frame UD100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 71, the upper frame UD110 is formed as a member having a substantially quadrangular outer shape in the front view, and the bottom surface UD110a extending in the left-right direction and the bottom surface UD110a slightly downward from the front portion. It is provided with a protruding wall portion UD110b. In the state where the upper frame UD110 is fixed to the lower frame UD100, the upper end edge of the translucent plate 1045 abuts on the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110, and the front surface of the translucent plate 1045 is formed. The upper portion is positioned so as to abut the wall portion UD110b of the upper frame UD110. The wall portion UD110b has a shape corresponding to the light transmitting plate 1045 so that the upper front surface of the light transmitting plate 1045 can come into contact with the light transmitting plate 1045 over a certain range.

The front side surface of the upper pressing member UD102 (holding surface UD102a, see FIG. 70) has a portion formed in a planar shape and a portion formed in a curved shape corresponding to the screen sheet 1046. The upper holding member UD102 has a screw hole formed in the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110 by passing a screw through the screw insertion hole UD102b (see FIG. 71) in a state where the upper surface thereof is in contact with the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110. It is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screwing it into the UD110c. As a result, the upper portion of the screen sheet 1046 is sandwiched between the wall portion UD110b and the translucent plate 1045 of the upper frame UD110 and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102, and is pressed by the pressing surface UD102a.

As described above, the lower portion of the screen sheet 1046 is pressed by the lower pressing member UD101, and the upper portion is pressed by the upper pressing member UD102. The pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101 and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102 each have a portion formed in a curved shape corresponding to the shape of the screen sheet 1046. As a result, the screen sheet 1046 can be brought into close contact with the light transmitting plate 1045 while suppressing the formation of a gap between the light transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 and the occurrence of wrinkles on the screen sheet 1046. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image visually recognized by the player from being distorted.

As shown in FIG. 72, when the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other and viewed from the rear, the flat portion 1045a and the curved portion 1045b of the translucent plate 1045 are the flat portions of the screen sheet 1046. While the 1046a and the curved portion 1046b are covered, the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045 is not covered by the screen sheet 1046 and is exposed.

Although not shown, the cabinet G is arranged on the back side of the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046. Therefore, between the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 and the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2), there is at least a gap corresponding to the length in the front-rear direction of the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045. For clarity, such gaps are shaded in FIG. 72.

An image is displayed on the portion of the translucent plate 1045 that is covered by the screen sheet 1046 (flat portion 1045a and curved portion 1045b), while the portion of the translucent plate 1045 that is not covered by the screen sheet 1046 and is exposed. No image is displayed on (the side surface portion 1045c, that is, the shaded portion in FIG. 72). This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the image stands out at a position separated from the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2) in the front direction, and realizes a variety of image expressions. be able to.

<Decorative unit 1050>
FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the upper frame, the first structure, the second structure, the third structure, the fourth structure, and the screen sheet as viewed from the rear.

In addition, in FIG. 73, the first structure 1051, the second structure 1052, the third structure 1053, and the fourth structure 1054 show the state in which they are assembled, and the upper frame UD110 and the screen sheet 1056 are shown. , And the screen sheet 1057 show how they exist independently.

As shown in FIG. 73, the decoration unit 1050 is adjacent to the first structure 1051 arranged in the center, the second structure 1052 arranged around the first structure 1051, and the second structure 1052. It includes a third structure 1053, a fourth structure 1054 adjacent to the third structure 1053, and a screen sheet 1056 and a screen sheet 1057 arranged on the back side of these structures.

The first structure 1051, the second structure 1052, the third structure 1053, and the fourth structure 1054 are attached to the upper frame UD110 by screwing. The screen sheet 1056 is arranged on the back side of the first structure 1051 and the second structure 1052 in a state of being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1057 is arranged on the back side of the third structure 1053 in a state of being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, and have a shape in which they can be fitted at the adjacent portions. The fourth structure 1054 is arranged on the back side of the speaker storage portion UD110d of the upper frame UD110, and a speaker (not shown) is arranged on the back side of the speaker storage portion UD110d together with the fourth structure 1054.

The first structure 1051 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin) and has a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a character shape). The second structure 1052 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin) and has a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a flame). The third structure 1053 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like) and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a chain). The fourth structure 1054 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin) and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a chain).

The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are transmissive screens displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and like the screen sheet 1046, the incident on the back side where the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident. It has a surface and a display surface on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light incident on the incident surface. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are formed of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, and a resin film as main materials so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface, and are milky white when not projected. It is transparent or has a gray color.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface (front surface) of the screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057, it is applied to the display surface (front surface) of the screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057. , Images related to the game (still images and moving images) are displayed.

Here, the third structure 1053 has a structure in which a half mirror (magic mirror) is formed on the front surface side thereof. The half mirror can be formed by attaching a semi-transmissive film sheet to the surface of a substrate or by depositing a metal film on a metal film by a conventionally known method, and a part of the incident light is emitted. While reflecting, it has the property of transmitting part of it.

By arranging such a half mirror on the front side of the screen sheet 1057, when light is not projected from the projector 9020, an object existing around the third structure 1053 is reflected, for example, black plating is performed. It will look like a part with a plating. As an object existing around the third structure 1053, for example, a structure having a shape imitating a chain as shown in FIG. 65 can be provided. The structure having a shape imitating a chain may be provided in the vicinity of the third structure 1053, or the third structure 1053 (half mirror) itself may be formed in the shape. On the other hand, when light is projected from the projector 9020, the image displayed on the screen sheet 1057 is reflected on the half mirror. For example, an image in which an object existing around the third structure 1053 or an object having a shape similar to the shape of the third structure 1053 (a shape imitating a chain) is flowing and moving is displayed on the screen sheet 1057. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect in which the stationary object is moving when no light is projected from the projector 9020. As described above, according to the above configuration, it is possible to create an attractive effect by both the modeled object and the image related to the modeled object.

Further, the screen sheet 1056 has a diffusion layer for diffusing light and a prism layer in which a plurality of unit prisms having a shape convex on the incident surface side are arranged. As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 is diffused, and in combination with the modeled object arranged on the front side of the screen sheet 1056, an attractive effect can be produced. For example, as shown in FIG. 65, when the first structure 1051 is formed in the character shape of "GOD", the image corresponding to the character "GOD" is displayed on the screen sheet 1056 to "GOD". It is possible to create an appearance in which the characters "" are shining. Further, the center of the light projected from the projector 9020 (irradiation light emitted from the vicinity of the optical axis of the projection lens) is incident on the screen sheet 1046, and the screen sheet 1056 is arranged at a position away from the center of the angle of view. However, by providing the prism layer having a high light-collecting effect, it is possible to prevent the brightness of the image displayed on the screen sheet 1056 from being lowered. Similar to the screen sheet 1057, a half mirror may be arranged on the front side of the screen sheet 1056.

<Indirect lighting unit 1060>
FIG. 74 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, the LED substrate, and the light guide member as viewed from the rear. FIG. 75 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, and the light guide member as viewed from the front. FIG. 76 is a perspective view of a cross section of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, the LED substrate, and the light guide member as viewed from the front.

Note that FIG. 74 shows a state in which the light guide member 1062 is removed from the state in which the light transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, the LED substrate 1061, and the light guide member 1062 are assembled. .. In FIG. 75, the light transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, and the light guide member 1062 are shown in the vicinity of the light guide member 1062 in which the position of the lower frame UD100 is slightly shifted from the assembled state. Is enlarged and shown. In FIG. 76, the light transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, the LED substrate 1061, and the light guide member 1062 are cut in a horizontal plane in a state in which they are assembled, and the vicinity of the light guide member 1062 is enlarged. Is shown.

As shown in FIG. 66, the indirect lighting unit 1060 is arranged along the right side UD100c and the left side UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and each indirect lighting unit 1060 has a symmetrical configuration. There is.

As shown in FIG. 74, the indirect lighting unit 1060 includes an LED substrate 1061 and a light guide member 1062.

The LED substrate 1061 is arranged substantially parallel to the side surface portion 1045c on each of the slightly left side of the right side portion UD100c of the lower frame UD100 and the slightly right side of the left side portion UD100d (slightly inside the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045). .. A plurality of LEDs 1061a are provided on the LED substrate 1061 at equal intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, the LED 1061a of the LED substrate 1061 arranged near the right side UD100c is installed so as to emit light in the right direction, and the LED 1061a of the LED substrate 1061 arranged near the left side UD100d is leftward. It is installed so as to emit light. The LED substrate 1061 is arranged so that a part of the LED substrate 1061 overlaps with the side surface portion 1045c of the light transmitting plate 1045 in the side view, but the installation position of the LED 1061a is behind the rear end of the side surface portion 1045c. The light emitted from the LED 1061a is not blocked by the side surface portion 1045c. The LED substrate 1061 is arranged slightly separated from the side surface portion 1045c.

The light guide member 1062 is a member having substantially the same height as the right side portion UD100c and the left side portion UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and a plurality of openings 1062a that open inward are formed in the vertical direction. The light guide member 1062 has screw holes 1062b formed in each of the upper part and the lower part, and the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the LED board 1061 by a screw inserted through the screw hole 1061b formed in the LED board 1061. Will be done. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 1061a passes through the opening 1062a and enters the inside of the light guide member 1062.

Further, the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the lower frame UD100 by a screw through which a screw hole 1062c formed in the upper portion thereof and a screw hole UD100f formed in the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100 are inserted. Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, the light guide member 1062 is formed with a plurality of openings 1062d that open in the forward direction in the vertical direction. The opening 1062a shown in FIG. 74 and the opening 1062d shown in FIG. 75 communicate with each other inside the light guide member 1062. Further, a plurality of openings UD100g penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100 in the vertical direction. As a result, in a state where the light guide member 1062 is attached to the lower frame UD100, the opening 1062d of the light guide member 1062 and the opening UD100g of the lower frame UD100 communicate with each other.

As shown in FIG. 76, the inside of the light guide member 1062 is a reflector that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 1061a. The light emitted from the LED 1061a passes through the opening 1062a of the light guide member 1062, enters the inside of the light guide member 1062, changes the traveling direction from sideways to forward, and passes through the opening 1062d of the light guide member 1062. , It is discharged forward from the opening UD100g of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d). The arrow in FIG. 76 indicates the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 1061a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 76, the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100 is in contact with the side surface portion 1045c of the light transmitting plate 1045. Further, the rear end of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) and the rear end of the side surface portion 1045c are substantially the same in the front-rear direction, and the length of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) in the front-rear direction is the side surface. It is shorter than the length of the portion 1045c in the front-rear direction. Although not shown, the cabinet G is arranged on the back side of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) of the lower frame UD100. The front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2) is close to (substantially in contact with) the rear end of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d), and the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) are It is positioned on almost the same plane.

The indirect lighting unit 1060 is arranged along the side surface portion 1045c of the light transmitting plate 1045 so as to have the above-mentioned positional relationship with the peripheral members. Then, the light emitted from the LED 1061a is emitted forward along the side surface portion 1045c of the light transmitting plate 1045. As described with reference to FIG. 72, the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045 is not covered by the screen sheet 1046, and the image is not displayed on the portion (the shaded portion in FIG. 72), so that the image stands out. It is possible to give such an impression to the player. In the present embodiment, the portion where the image is displayed and the image are displayed due to the light emitted from the LED 1061a (along the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045) from the portion where such an image is not displayed. It is possible to emphasize the boundary with the part that is not displayed and give the player the impression that the image is raised more prominently.

<Installation of upper door mechanism UD to cabinet G>
FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hooking portion, and the front protruding member as viewed from the rear. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hooking portion, and the front protruding member as viewed from the side. FIG. 79 is a side-view view of the cabinet, the hooking portion, and the front protruding member. FIG. 80 is a right side view of a cross section of the upper door mechanism, the cabinet, the hooking portion, and the front protruding member. FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from below. FIG. 82 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism as viewed from the rear.

Note that FIG. 77 shows a state in which the hook portion UD120 and the front side projecting member G120 are removed from the upper door mechanism UD. In FIG. 78, the hook portion UD120 is shown to be attached to the upper door mechanism UD, and the front side projecting member G120 is shown to be removed from the upper door mechanism UD. FIG. 79 shows how the hooking portion UD120 and the front protruding member G120 are attached to the cabinet G. FIG. 80 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD, the cabinet G, the hooking portion UD120, and the front side protruding member G120 are cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction when the upper door mechanism UD is closed with respect to the cabinet G. ing. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 80, the hooking portion UD120 and the front protruding member G120 are shown by diagonal lines. FIG. 81 shows a state in which each component of the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. FIG. 82 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are not assembled and are viewed from different directions, and the lower door mechanism DD is observed from an angle closer to the side. are doing. FIG. 83 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G.

The upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G by the hooking portion UD120 and the front side protruding member G120.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the hook portion UD120 is a member that projects rearward from the upper frame UD110, and a notch UD120b that is open downward is formed on the main surface UD120a. A screw hole UD120c is formed on the surface of the hooking portion UD120 orthogonal to the main surface UD120a, and the hooking portion UD120 is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screwing. The main surface UD120a is arranged along the front-rear direction by fixing the hook portion UD120 to the upper frame UD110.

The front surface side projecting member G120 is formed by bending the main surface G120a arranged horizontally, the front end central portion G120b formed by bending the vicinity of the center of the front end of the main surface G120a upward, and the right side of the front end of the main surface G120a upward. The front end of the main surface G120a is above the formed front end right side portion G120c, the front end left side portion G120d formed by bending the front end left side of the main surface G120a upward, and the front end central portion G120b and the front end right portion G120c. The left mounting portion G120f formed by bending the front end of the main surface G120a upward and backward between the right mounting portion G120e formed by bending rearward and the front end central portion G120b and the front end left side portion G120d. And a rear side portion G120g formed by bending the rear portions of both the left end and the right end of the main surface G120a downward.

The front end right side portion G120c and the front end left side portion G120d are formed behind the front end central portion G120b, and the heights of the front end central portion G120b, the front end right portion G120c, and the front end left side portion G120d are substantially the same. Further, the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f are formed behind the front end right portion G120c and the front end left portion G120d, respectively, and the heights of the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f are high. , The heights thereof are higher than the heights of the front end central portion G120b, the front end right portion G120c, and the front end left portion G120d. Further, the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f have horizontally arranged surfaces.

A screw hole G120h is formed in the rear side portion G120g, and the front side projecting member G120 is attached to the side wall G2 of the cabinet G from the inside by a screw inserted through the screw hole G120h. As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, by fixing the front protruding member G120 to the cabinet G, the front portion of the main surface UD120a (front end central portion G120b, front end right portion G120c, front end left portion G120d, right). The mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f) project forward from the cabinet G.

On the other hand, the inner side surface of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G is provided with an inner surface side projecting member G2a (for example, a screw screwed into the inner surface of the side wall G2) that projects inward, and the hook portion UD120 The notch UD120b is hooked on the inner surface side protruding member G2a. As a result, the hooking portion UD120 is locked to the cabinet G.

As shown in FIG. 81, the lower frame UD100 includes a lower side surface UD100h as a surface facing the bottom plate UD100a (see FIG. 69). A plurality of downward projecting portions UD100i are formed on the lower side surface UD100h. The downward projecting portion UD100i has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and extends from the rear end of the lower side surface UD100h toward the front. A screw hole UD100e (see FIG. 69) is formed at the rear end of the downward protrusion UD100i.

As shown in FIG. 82, the lower door mechanism DD includes an upper plate DD100 horizontally arranged in the left-right direction above the lower door mechanism DD. As shown in FIG. 83, in a state where the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G, the rear end edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 is a downward projecting portion UD100i formed on the lower frame UD100. It is in close proximity (approximately contact) with the front end.

Since the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are configured as described above, when attaching the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (closing the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the cabinet G), first, the upper frame While mounting the lower side surface of the upper wall of the UD 110 on the upper surfaces of the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f of the front side protruding member G120, the notch UD120b of the hooking portion UD120 is hooked on the inner surface side protruding member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the rear end edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 of the lower door mechanism DD hits the lower protruding portion UD100i of the lower frame UD100, and the upper door mechanism UD is pushed backward. Is done. As a result, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed with respect to the cabinet G.

In the present embodiment, since the upper door mechanism UD can be closed as described above, the upper door mechanism UD is not provided with a hinge for connecting to the cabinet G. When a hinge is provided, the range in which an image can be displayed is limited on the side portion of the game machine. However, in the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the hinge does not exist, so that the image is displayed above. A wide range in the door mechanism UD can be secured as an image display area. Specifically, the range up to the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 (the rear end of the curved portion 1045b on both the left and right sides of the transmissive plate 1045) is included in the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 in the left-right direction. Becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to perform a powerful production with a large screen.

Further, three screens, a screen sheet 1046, a screen sheet 1056, and a screen sheet 1057, are provided, and as in the third embodiment, information indicating an image displayed on each screen is combined into one image data. If included (see FIGS. 62 and 63), the image can be displayed on each of the three screens by using the one image data.

In the state where the upper door mechanism UD is closed as described above, a slight gap is formed between the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G (see FIG. 80), but foreign matter enters through the gap. Even in the case where the foreign matter is present, the presence of the front-side protruding member G120 can prevent the foreign matter from invading the inside of the cabinet G.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The first to fourth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the fifth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment also applies to the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the gaming machine with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism removed, as viewed from the front. FIG. 85 is a perspective view of how light is projected from the projector device as viewed from the side.

As shown in FIG. 84, the irradiation unit B is arranged inside the cabinet G. Similar to the first embodiment (see FIG. 6), the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light, a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2, a projector device B2, and a mirror. It includes a projector cover B1 for accommodating the mechanism B3.

The configuration of the projector cover B1 is different from that of the first embodiment, and the reflector holding portion B11 (see FIG. 10) is formed above the projector device B2, not in front of the projector device B2 (see FIG. 88). .. Similar to the first embodiment, a mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11, and the mirror mechanism B3 is an optical mirror B32 capable of reflecting the light projected from the projector device B2. (See FIG. 7).

In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is in a posture in which the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) is tilted so as to be lower in the rear than in the front, corresponding to the shape and formation position of the reflector holding portion B11. Placed above. Since the configuration of the mirror mechanism B3 itself is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The projector device B2 is fixed to the projector cover B1 in a posture having an inclination (a steeper inclination than the optical mirror B32) so that the rear side is lower than the front side.

As a result, the light projected from the projector device B2 and traveling upward is reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) (see FIG. 85). In FIG. 85, the irradiation range of light is shown by diagonal lines. Similar to the fourth embodiment, all the light reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) and traveling forward reaches the upper door mechanism UD. The upper door mechanism UD has the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment, and the light projected from the projector device B2 is the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 65 to 68). The images are incident on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets from the rear side (rear side) with respect to each of the screen sheets.

<Adjustment of the traveling direction of irradiation light>
FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as viewed from the side. FIG. 87 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as viewed from the rear.

As described in the first embodiment, the projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 while being exteriorized by the case B22 (see FIG. 12).

Specifically, square holes 2201c are provided in the right side portion and the left side portion of the upper pedestal B220, respectively (see FIG. 13). The upper pedestal B220 is attached to the projector cover B1 by a mounting screw T (see FIG. 16) inserted into the square hole 2201c. FIG. 16 shows how the mounting screw T is inserted from below the square hole 2201c. However, in the present embodiment, the mounting screw T is inserted from above the square hole 2201c (the screw head is on the upper back side). As) is inserted. The upper pedestal B220 may be attached not to the projector cover B1 but to another member fixed inside the cabinet G.

Further, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 (see FIG. 12), and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screwing from below. Be done. The configuration of the case B22 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the case B22 having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape (see FIG. 22) is adopted. The case B22 houses the lens unit B21 (see FIG. 12), which is an internal component of the projector device B2, the LED board, the DMD board, the heat sink, the intake fan, and the like, and the lower surface of the case B22 is the projector control board B23. (See FIG. 12) is fixed.

Here, the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220 has a vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimension larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T. As a result, the mounting position of the projector device B2 with respect to the projector cover B1 can be adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. Since the details of the method of adjusting the mounting position of the projector device B2 are as described with reference to FIG. 16, the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected at three connecting portions R1, R2, R3 corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting screw portions 2210 (see FIGS. 12 and 14). .. As a result, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted at each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. The connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (in the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are on the upper side. By appropriately changing the distance between the pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, it is possible to adjust the degree of inclination of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 in the three-dimensional space. The details of the method of adjusting the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are as described with reference to FIG. 17, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

By using such an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221, the in-plane position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the projector cover B1 can be appropriately adjusted, and the projector device B2 can be arranged at an appropriate position. .. Further, the inclination of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 can be appropriately adjusted, and the posture of the case B22 (lens unit B21 or the like which is an internal component of the projector device B2) supported by the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted. It can be appropriate. As described above, the projector device B2 is configured so that the position and the posture in the cabinet G can be changed to adjust the emission position, the traveling direction, and the irradiation range of the irradiation light.

As shown in FIG. 86, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rear of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is open. As a result, the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are exposed toward the rear. Further, although not shown, the mounting screw T (see FIG. 16) inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also exposed toward the rear.

As shown in FIG. 87, the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged above the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the upper side and the rear side of the reflector holding portion B11 are open.

An angle adjusting hole B111 (see FIG. 9) is formed in the reflector holding portion B11, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 from the upper side (back side). As described in the first embodiment, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw. As a result, the position (attitude) of the optical mirror B32 held on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 is changed, and the reflection angle of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 (the traveling direction of the irradiation light after reflection) is adjusted. It is possible to do.

<Operation window G10 and closing lid G100>
FIG. 88 is a vertical sectional view of the cabinet. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, the closing lid, and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 90 is a rear view of the game machine with the closing lid removed from the back wall. FIG. 91 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the game machine shown in FIG. 90. FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 94 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the game machine in a state where the closing lid is attached to the back wall.

As shown in FIG. 88, in a state where the irradiation unit B is arranged inside the cabinet G, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the cabinet G, and the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged. The connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are positioned so as to face the closing lid G100 attached to the cabinet G (back wall G3). Although not shown, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also positioned so as to face the closing lid G100. A space in which no other member exists is formed behind the upper pedestal B220.

Further, a reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged in the upper rear portion of the cabinet G. Spaces in which other members do not exist are formed above and behind the reflector holding portion B11, and the space is connected to the rear space of the upper pedestal B220. In FIG. 88, the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector device B2 is shown by diagonal lines.

The irradiation unit B is attached to the back wall G3 by fastening screws. As shown in FIG. 87, screw holes B100a to B100a to d for inserting screws are formed in the rear portion of the projector cover B1. In a state where the irradiation unit B is attached to the back wall G3, the surface B110a on which the screw hole B100a is formed, the surface B110b on which the screw hole B100b is formed, and the surface B110c on which the screw holes B100c and d are formed are formed. , Each abut on the inner surface (front surface) of the back wall G3. These surfaces B110a to C are formed so as to be separated from each other, whereby the projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rear space of the upper pedestal B220 and the upper and rear spaces of the reflector holding portion B11 are open. ing.

As shown in FIG. 89, an operation window G10 is formed on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G. The operation window G10 is formed as an opening in which the inside can be visually recognized from the outside of the cabinet G. The operation window G10 can be closed by the closing lid G100.

As shown in FIG. 90, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the back wall G3 and viewed from the rear, the connecting portions R1 and R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are viewed from the rear. , R3 (particularly nut 2213, see FIG. 17), and the head of the mounting screw T (not shown) inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 can be seen through the operation window G10. As a result, the nut 2213 can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the posture of the projector device B2 can be adjusted by appropriately turning the nut 2213. Further, by operating the mounting screw T from the outside of the cabinet G, it is possible to move the position of the mounting screw T within the opening range of the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220, and the position of the projector device B2. Can be adjusted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 91, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the back wall G3 and the vicinity of the operation window G10 is looked up from below the back side, the angle of the reflector holding portion B11 is seen through the operation window G10. The head of the screw (not shown) inserted into the adjusting hole B111 can also be visually recognized. As a result, the screw can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the posture of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted by turning the screw as appropriate.

Hereinafter, the structures of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 will be described. FIG. 92 shows a state in which the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 are viewed from diagonally rearward. FIG. 93 shows a state in which the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 are viewed from diagonally forward.

As shown in FIG. 92, the operation window G10 has an opening G10a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an outer surface (rear side) of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G at the peripheral edge of the opening G10a. A peripheral portion G10b formed so as to have a square-shaped surface at a recessed position with respect to the peripheral portion), four screw holes G10c formed in the peripheral portion G10b, and an outer edge and a back wall of the peripheral portion G10b. It is provided with a connecting portion G10d for connecting to the outer surface of the G3. As shown in FIG. 93, the peripheral portion G10b is not visible from the front, but the screw hole G10c penetrates the back wall G3, so that it can be confirmed from the front. In FIG. 93, the opening G10a It is shown that the screw hole G10c is formed on the side.

In other words, the operation window G10 configured as described above has a shape in which a recess is formed with respect to the outer surface of the back wall G3 and an opening is formed by penetrating most of the recess. Have. The opening corresponds to the opening G10a, and the portion of the recess where the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral edge portion G10b. The peripheral edge portion G10b is formed as a flat surface (vertical surface) substantially parallel to the outer surface of the back wall G3, and the connecting portion G10d is formed as a flat surface in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.

The closing lid G100 is configured as a plate-shaped member, and has a rear surface G100a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, a front surface G100b formed on the opposite side of the back surface G100a, and four bosses provided on the front surface G100b. A peripheral portion G100c and a peripheral peripheral portion G100d formed so as to face forward from the peripheral edge of the back surface G100a are provided. The back surface G100a and the front surface G100b are formed as flat surfaces in the vertical direction.

The outer shape of the closing lid G100 (rear surface G100a) is substantially the same as the outer shape of the peripheral portion G10b of the operation window G10 (similar shape slightly smaller than the peripheral portion G10b), and from the opening G10a of the operation window G10. Is also getting bigger. As a result, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 can be closed by fitting the closing lid G100 into the recess (attaching the closing lid G100 to the back wall G3 so as to fill the recess). It has become.

More specifically, when the closing lid G100 is arranged so that the peripheral portion G100d of the closing lid G100 is aligned with the connecting portion G10d of the operating window G10, the four screw holes G10c of the operating window G10 and the closing The four boss portions G100c of the lid G100 are overlapped with each other, and each screw hole G10c is positioned in front of each boss portion G100c. In this state, the closing lid G100 is attached to the cabinet G (back wall G3) by screwing the screw through which the screw hole G10c is inserted from the front side (inside the cabinet G) into the hole formed in the boss portion G100c. Be done. As a result, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is closed by the closing lid G100. Then, the screw for fastening the closing lid G100 to the back wall G3 is screwed from the inside of the cabinet G (so that the screw head is positioned inside the cabinet G), so that the security for the inside of the cabinet G is secured. Can be secured.

In adjusting the positions and postures of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, the screws that fasten the closing lid G100 and the back wall G3 are screwed with the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD open. The screw may be released by operating from the front side and turning it appropriately. As a result, the closing lid G100 can be removed from the back wall G3, and the operation window G10 (opening G10a) closed by the closing lid G100 can be made to appear. In this state, the mounting is inserted into the connecting portions R1, R2, R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 and the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 from the outside (rear side) of the cabinet G through the opening G10a. By operating the screw T and the screw inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the projector cover B1 (reflector holding portion B11), the positions and orientations of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted.

Here, in the closing lid G100, the length from the front surface G100b to the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d (the length protruding forward of the peripheral edge portion G100d with respect to the front surface G100b) and the tip of the boss portion G100c from the front surface G100b. The length up to (the height of the boss portion G100c) is equal. Therefore, when the closing lid G100 is arranged so that the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 abuts on the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10, the tip of the boss portion G100c of the closing lid G100 is also used for operation. It comes into contact with the peripheral edge portion G10b of the window G10.

FIG. 94 shows how the closing lid G100 is arranged in such a state. In FIG. 94, the shaded portion indicates the closing lid G100 (front surface G100b), and the shaded portion indicates the back wall G3 (periphery of the opening G10a). A space S is formed between the shaded portion (front surface G100b of the closing lid G100) and the shaded portion (periphery of the opening G10a), and the width (length in the front-rear direction) of the space S is the above. It corresponds to the "protruding length of the peripheral portion G100d forward" and the "height of the boss portion G100c".

By adopting such a configuration, the closing lid G100 can be stably attached to the back wall G3, and the closing lid G100 (front end of the peripheral portion G100d) and the back wall G3 (operation window G10) can be stably attached. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the peripheral portion G10b) and the peripheral portion G10b), and to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the gap.

Further, the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10 is formed so as to have a step with respect to the outer surface of the back wall G3 by the length in the front-rear direction of the connecting portion G10d, and the peripheral edge portion of the closing lid G100. The length of the portion G100d in the front-rear direction (the length of the peripheral portion G100d protruding forward with respect to the back surface G100a) substantially coincides with the length of the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10 in the front-rear direction (operation window). It is slightly shorter than the length of the connecting portion G10d of G10 in the front-rear direction). The length of the peripheral portion G100d of the closing lid G100 in the front-rear direction and the length of the connecting portion G10d of the operation window G10 in the front-rear direction are constant over the entire circumference. As a result, when the closing lid G100 is attached to the back wall G3, the back surface G100a of the closing lid G100 forms substantially the same plane as the outer surface of the back wall G3 (slightly smaller than the outer surface of the back wall G3). It is difficult to visually recognize the existence of the closing lid G100).

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has been described.

Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

However, conventionally, in a game machine equipped with such a projector, once the projector is fixed inside the game machine, it is difficult to make fine adjustments to the projector thereafter.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of making adjustments to a projector with the projector mounted inside.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has the following features.

(10-1) Screens (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057) and
A projector that projects light for displaying an image on the screen (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) and
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism. B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector is provided.
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. Yes,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21 or the like)) has a projector (internal component of the projector device B2). (Lens unit B21, etc.)) To adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the adjustment unit (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1). An opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is provided at a position where the mounting portion, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside, and the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is provided. ) Is attached with a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing. Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) is made to appear. The adjustment portion (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221) is possible from the outside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). , The attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated. As a result, even after the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is fixed inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21)) Etc.))) from the outside of the housing unit (cabinet G) with the adjustment unit (connecting parts R1, R2, R3, upper side of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221) while being mounted inside the housing unit (cabinet G). By operating the mounting portion of the pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.), the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) projects. The direction of travel of the light can be adjusted.

(10-2) Screens (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057) and
A projector that projects light for displaying an image on the screen (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) and
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism. B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the projector and has an opening on the front surface,
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area for making the image displayed on the screen visible.
In addition to the front surface, the main body is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjustment portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid) capable of closing the opening. G100) is attached,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the main body (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21 or the like)) has a projector (internal component of the projector device B2). (Lens unit B21, etc.)) To adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the adjustment unit (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1). An opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is provided at a position where the mounting portion, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside, and the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is provided. ) Is attached with a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing. Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) is made to appear. Is possible, and through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10), from the outside of the main body portion (cabinet G), the adjusting portion (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221). , The attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated. As a result, even after the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is fixed inside the main body (cabinet G), the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21)) Etc.)) is attached to the inside of the main body (cabinet G), and the adjustment part (connecting part R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, upper side) from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). By operating the mounting portion of the pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.), the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) projects. The direction of travel of the light can be adjusted.

(10-3) The gaming machine according to (10-2) above.
The closing member (closing lid G100) is attached to the main body by screwing from the inside of the main body.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the closing member (closing lid G100) is attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). Therefore, in order to remove the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), it is necessary to release the screw from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). As a result, it is possible to prevent the closing member (closing lid G100) from being removed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), and while ensuring security for the inside of the main body (cabinet G), It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from the outside of the main body (cabinet G).

In the present invention, the method of attaching the closing member (closing lid G100) to the main body (cabinet G) is not particularly limited, and the closing member (closing lid G100) is attached from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). It may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing, or it may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). Further, the closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by a method other than screwing. For example, a guide member for allowing the closing member (closing lid G100) to slide along the wall surface (inner side surface or outer side surface of the back wall G3) of the main body (cabinet G) is provided as a guide member (cabinet G). A rail-like shape may be formed inside or outside the back wall G3), and the closing member (closing lid G100) may be locked on the guide member. When the closing member (closing lid G100) slides on the guide member in the left-right direction (or the front-back direction), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is closed and the opening (operation window) is closed. If the opening G10a) of the G10 is configured to be switched between the open state and the open state, the adjustment unit can be operated from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) in the open state, as in the fifth embodiment. In addition, the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector can be adjusted. In view of such an effect, in the present invention, the configuration of the closing member (closing lid G100) is not essential, and the closing member (closing lid G100) is not attached to the main body (cabinet G). The opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) provided in the (cabinet G) may be configured to be always open.

In the fifth embodiment, it has been described that the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is formed on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, and the closing lid G10 is attached. In the present invention, an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided and closed on any wall surface (for example, back wall G3, side wall G2, upper surface wall G4, etc.) constituting the main body (cabinet G). It can be configured to attach a member (closing lid G100). For example, instead of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, the side wall G2 or the top wall G4 may be provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) and a closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached. In such a configuration, the adjusting portion (for example, the connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, and the reflector of the mirror mechanism B3). The attachment portion to the holding portion B11, etc.) may be arranged in the vicinity of the side wall G2 or the upper surface wall G4. When the upper surface wall G4 is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) and a closing member (closing lid G100) is attached, the opening G41 and the plate member G42 (see FIG. 1) are provided with the operation window G10, respectively. It may be adopted as the opening G10a and the closing lid G10, or separately, a configuration corresponding to the opening G10a and the closing lid G10 of the operation window G10 is adopted while not forming the opening G41 and the plate member G42. It may be that.

Further, openings (openings G10a of the operation window G10) are opened in a plurality of wall surfaces (for example, two or three wall surfaces of the back wall G3, the side wall G2, and the upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G). And a closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached. For example, an adjustment unit for adjusting the position (posture) of the projector device B2 (for example, a connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, or an attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1). Etc.) can be operated from the outside by providing an opening G10a of the operation window G10 on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and attaching a closing lid G10, while adjusting the position (posture) of the mirror mechanism B3. An opening G10a of the operation window G10 is provided on the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G and a closing lid G10 is attached so that the portion (for example, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11) can be operated from the outside. It may be that.

Further, a plurality of openings (openings G10a of the operation window G10) are provided on one wall surface (for example, back wall G3, side wall G2, or upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G), and each opening is provided. A closing member (closing lid G100) that can be closed may be attached. For example, an adjustment unit for adjusting the position (posture) of the projector device B2 (for example, a connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, or an attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1). Etc.) can be operated from the outside by providing a first opening near the center of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and attaching a first closing lid capable of closing the first opening, while the mirror mechanism B3 A second opening is provided above the first opening so that the adjusting portion for adjusting the position (posture) (for example, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11) can be operated from the outside. A second closing lid capable of closing the second opening may be attached as well as being provided. When a plurality of openings are provided, closing members capable of individually closing each opening may be attached as many as the number of openings, or only one closing member capable of closing the plurality of openings at the same time may be attached.

When performing such adjustment from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), in order to facilitate the operation for adjustment, the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is opened from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) in front. When viewed, the members to be adjusted (for example, the nuts 2213 in the connecting portions R1, R2, R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the mounting screws T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, It is desirable that the member is arranged so that the screw or the like inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 can be visually recognized through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) (FIG. 90). reference). When a plurality of members to be adjusted are provided, all of these plurality of members can be visually recognized when the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). (For example, it is desirable that the upper pedestal B220 is arranged so as to be visible). When a plurality of members to be adjusted are provided, for example, the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) has a diameter larger than the distance between these members (distance between the farthest members). It is good to say. This facilitates adjustments to these members. However, when the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the member to be adjusted can be visually recognized through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). It is not essential to be. For example, when the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the angle adjusting hole B111 of the member to be adjusted (for example, the projector cover B1 (reflector holding portion B11)). Even if you cannot see the screw inserted in the window), if you can see the member when you look into the inside of the main body (cabinet G) by changing the angle (see FIG. 91), If a space is formed between the member and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) so that no other member exists, the member can be operated from the outside. In the present invention, the member to be adjusted (screw, nut, etc. for adjustment) and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be configured to have such a positional relationship.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1, and the display unit A (irradiation) is provided in the upper space (the space behind the upper door mechanism UD). It has been described that the control board (main control board MS, sub control device SS, etc.) is housed in the lower space (the space behind the lower door mechanism DD) while the unit B) is housed (see FIG. 5). ). However, in the present invention, the inside of the main body (cabinet G) does not need to be divided into an upper space and a lower space, and the space in which the projector (irradiation unit B) is housed and the control board (main control board MS or sub). It is not necessary to distinguish it from the space in which the control device SS or the like is accommodated. For example, the control board (main control board MS or sub control device SS) may be arranged in the rear space (see FIG. 88) of the reflector holding portion B11 (mirror mechanism B3) of the projector cover B1. As a result, the space in the main body (cabinet G) can be effectively utilized, and the phenomenon that the heat generated from the control board (main control board MS or sub control device SS) is trapped in the lower space can be alleviated. .. The opening / closing door in the present invention may be composed of a plurality of doors (upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD) or may be composed of one door.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The first to fifth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the sixth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fifth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to fifth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment also applies to the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<Overview of the inside of Cabinet G>
FIG. 95 is a front view for explaining a schematic configuration inside the cabinet. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit is removed from the inside of the cabinet shown in FIG. 95. FIG. 97 is a perspective view showing a state in which the irradiation unit is attached to the back wall of the cabinet.

In the above-described embodiment, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1, and a display unit A (irradiation unit B) is provided in the upper space (a space behind the upper door mechanism UD). ) Is accommodated, while the control board (main control board MS, sub-control device SS, etc.) is accommodated in the lower space (the space behind the lower door mechanism DD) (FIGS. 4 and 5). reference). On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the intermediate support plate G1 is not provided, and instead, the middle board 4000 is provided.

The middle board 4000 is arranged inside the cabinet G slightly below the substantially center in the vertical direction. A reel unit RU is placed on the upper surface of the middle board 4000. That is, in the above-described embodiment, the reel unit RU is arranged below the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 4), whereas in the present embodiment, the reel unit RU is arranged above the middle board 4000. There is.

In the above-described embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided as the doors that close the opening in the cabinet G, but in the present embodiment, the cabinet is provided by one door (front door). The entire opening in G is configured to be closed. Although not shown, a main display window DD4 (see FIG. 3) is provided at substantially the center of the front door in the vertical direction. The formation position of the main display window DD4 and the arrangement position of the reel unit RU (reel RL) are substantially the same in the front view, and as described above, the reels RL, RC, RR are routed through the main display window DD4. It becomes possible to visually recognize the operation of and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR.

As shown in FIG. 97, the irradiation unit B is attached to the upper part of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G. As a result, the irradiation unit B is arranged above the reel unit RU. 95 and 96 show a state in which the irradiation unit B is removed from the inside of the cabinet G, and the irradiation unit B is not shown. Further, in FIG. 97, only the irradiation unit B and the back wall G3 are shown, and the illustration of the configurations other than the irradiation unit B and the back wall G3 is omitted. Similar to the fifth embodiment, the operation window G10 is formed on the back wall G3, and the operation window G10 is closed by the closing lid G100 (see FIG. 89). The irradiation unit B will be arranged in the space in front of the closing lid G100.

Although not shown, a main control board MS (see FIG. 4) is attached to the inner surface of the right side wall G2R of the cabinet G, and a sub control device SS (see FIG. 4) is attached to the inner surface of the left side wall G2L of the cabinet G. (See FIG. 11) is attached. As a result, the main control board MS is positioned on the right side of the irradiation unit B, and the sub control device SS is positioned on the left side of the irradiation unit B.

Similar to the first embodiment (see FIG. 6), the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light, a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2, a projector device B2, and a mirror. It includes a projector cover B1 for accommodating the mechanism B3. The configuration of the projector cover B1 is different from that of the first embodiment, and the reflector holding portion B11 (see FIG. 10) is formed above the projector device B2, not in front of the projector device B2 (see FIG. 100). ..

Similar to the first embodiment, a mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11, and the mirror mechanism B3 is an optical mirror B32 capable of reflecting the light projected from the projector device B2. (See FIG. 7). In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is in a posture in which the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) is tilted so as to be lower in the rear than in the front, corresponding to the shape and formation position of the reflector holding portion B11. Placed above.

The projector device B2 is fixed to the projector cover B1 in a posture having an inclination (a steeper inclination than the optical mirror B32) so that the rear side is lower than the front side. As a result, as in the fifth embodiment, the light projected from the projector device B2 and traveling upward is reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) (see FIG. 85). The light reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) and traveling forward is incident on the screen (not shown) from the rear (rear side), and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of the screen. Will be.

As described above, the traveling path of the light projected from the projector device B2 is basically the same as that of the fifth embodiment. The screen may be provided inside the cabinet G like the cabinet side screen 9040 (see FIG. 52), or the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 65 to 68). As shown above, it may be provided on the front door.

<Adjustment of the traveling direction of irradiation light>
FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as viewed from the side. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as viewed from the rear.

As described in the first embodiment, the projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 while being exteriorized by the case B22 (see FIG. 12). Specifically, square holes 2201c are provided in the right side portion and the left side portion of the upper pedestal B220, respectively (see FIG. 13). The upper pedestal B220 is attached to the projector cover B1 by a mounting screw T (see FIG. 16) inserted into the square hole 2201c. Similar to the fifth embodiment, the mounting screw T is inserted from above the square hole 2201c (so that the screw head is on the upper back side).

Further, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 (see FIG. 12), and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screwing from below. Be done. As the configuration of the case B22, the case B22 (see FIG. 22) having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape is adopted as in the fifth embodiment. The case B22 houses a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 12), an LED substrate, a DMD substrate, a heat sink, an intake fan, and the like, which are internal components of the projector device B2.

Here, the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220 has a vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimension larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T. As a result, the mounting position of the projector device B2 with respect to the projector cover B1 can be adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. Since the details of the method of adjusting the mounting position of the projector device B2 are as described with reference to FIG. 16, the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected at three connecting portions R1, R2, R3 corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting screw portions 2210 (see FIGS. 12 and 14). .. As a result, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted at each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. Similar to the fifth embodiment, by appropriately changing the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in each of the connecting portions R1, R2, R3, in the three-dimensional space of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220. It is possible to adjust the degree of inclination. The details of the method of adjusting the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are as described with reference to FIG. 17, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 are connected at three connecting portions R4, R5 and R6. Although not shown, the reflector holding portion B11 is formed with three holes similar to the connecting hole 2200A, and the mirror holder B31 is formed with three protruding structures similar to the connecting screw portion 2210. The connecting portions R4, R5, and R6 correspond to these three holes and the three protruding structures, and have the same configuration as the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3.

As a result, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 can be adjusted at each of the connecting portions R4, R5, and R6. In this regard, in the above-described embodiment, the screw inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 (see FIG. 9) formed in the reflector holding portion B11 is loosened or tightened to be held on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11. This has been described as changing the position (posture) of the optical mirror B32. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the mirror holder B31 (optical mirror B32) with respect to the reflector holding portion B11 is formed by appropriately changing the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 in each of the connecting portions R4, R5, and R6. It is possible to adjust the degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space of.

As described above, the projector device B2 is configured so that the position and the posture in the cabinet G can be changed to adjust the emission position, the traveling direction, and the irradiation range of the irradiation light. Further, the mirror mechanism B3 changes the position (attitude) of the optical mirror B32 held on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11, and reflects the reflection angle of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 (progress of the irradiation light after reflection). It is configured so that the direction) can be adjusted.

As shown in FIG. 98, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rear of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is open. As a result, the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are exposed toward the rear. Further, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also exposed toward the rear.

A projector cover plate B1000 is attached to the back side of the projector cover B1, but the projector cover plate B1000 has a shape with an opening in the center, and the connecting portions R1, R2, R3, and attachments. The screw T faces the opening. That is, the rear exposure states of the connecting portions R1, R2, R3, and the mounting screw T are not hindered by the projector cover plate B1000.

Further, as shown in FIG. 99, a reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged above the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the upper side and the rear side of the reflector holding portion B11 are open.

<Operation window G10 and closing lid G100>
FIG. 100 is a vertical sectional view of the cabinet. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, the closing lid, and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 102 is a rear view of the game machine with the closing lid removed from the back wall. FIG. 103 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the game machine shown in FIG. 102. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and the back wall of the cabinet.

As shown in FIG. 100, in a state where the irradiation unit B is arranged inside the cabinet G, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the cabinet G, and the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged. The connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are positioned so as to face the closing lid G100 attached to the cabinet G (back wall G3). Although not shown, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also positioned so as to face the closing lid G100. A space in which no other member exists is formed behind the upper pedestal B220.

Further, a reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged in the upper rear portion of the cabinet G. Spaces in which other members do not exist are formed above and behind the reflector holding portion B11, and the space is connected to the rear space of the upper pedestal B220.

The projector cover B1 has the same appearance configuration as that of the fifth embodiment, and is attached to the back wall G3 via the projector cover plate B1000 arranged on the back side. Specifically, the projector cover plate B1000 is attached to the back wall G3 by screwing, and the projector cover B1 is connected to the projector cover plate B1000 by screwing. As a result, the entire irradiation unit B is fixed to the back wall G3.

As described above, the projector cover plate B1000 has a shape having an opening in the central portion. As a result, the irradiation unit B has a shape in which the rear space of the upper pedestal B220 and the upper and rear spaces of the reflector holding portion B11 are opened as a whole. In FIG. 100, the projection of the projector cover plate B1000 and the side wall G2 of the cabinet G is omitted, and the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector device B2 is shown by diagonal lines. Further, FIG. 101 shows a state in which the projector cover plate B1000 is removed from the irradiation unit B.

As shown in FIG. 101, an operation window G10 is formed on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G. The operation window G10 is formed as an opening in which the inside can be visually recognized from the outside of the cabinet G. The operation window G10 can be closed by the closing lid G100.

As shown in FIG. 102, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the back wall G3 and viewed from the rear, the connecting portions R1 and R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are viewed from the rear. , R3 (particularly nut 2213, see FIG. 17), and the head of the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 can be seen through the operation window G10. As a result, the nut 2213 can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the posture of the projector device B2 can be adjusted by appropriately turning the nut 2213. Further, by operating the mounting screw T from the outside of the cabinet G, it is possible to move the position of the mounting screw T within the opening range of the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220, and the position of the projector device B2. Can be adjusted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the back wall G3 and the vicinity of the operation window G10 is looked up from the lower part on the back side, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror are seen through the operation window G10. The connecting portions R4, R5, and R6 (particularly nuts 2213, see FIG. 17) with the holder B31 are visible through the operation window G10. As a result, the nut 2213 can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the posture of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted by appropriately turning the nut 2213.

Hereinafter, the structures of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 will be described. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 are viewed from diagonally rearward. FIG. 105 shows a state in which the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 are viewed from diagonally forward.

As shown in FIG. 104, the operation window G10 has an opening G10a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an outer surface (rear side) of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G at the peripheral edge of the opening G10a. A peripheral portion G10b formed so as to have a square-shaped surface at a recessed position with respect to the peripheral portion), four screw holes G10c formed in the peripheral portion G10b, and an outer edge and a back wall of the peripheral portion G10b. It is provided with a connecting portion G10d for connecting to the outer surface of the G3. As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral portion G10b cannot be seen from the front, but the screw hole G10c penetrates the back wall G3 and can be confirmed from the front. In FIG. 105, the opening G10a It is shown that the screw hole G10c is formed on the side.

In other words, the operation window G10 configured as described above has a shape in which a recess is formed with respect to the outer surface of the back wall G3 and an opening is formed by penetrating most of the recess. Have. The opening corresponds to the opening G10a, and the portion of the recess where the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral edge portion G10b. The peripheral edge portion G10b is formed as a flat surface (vertical surface) substantially parallel to the outer surface of the back wall G3, and the connecting portion G10d is formed as a flat surface in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.

The closing lid G100 is configured as a plate-shaped member, and has a rear surface G100a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, a front surface G100b formed on the opposite side of the back surface G100a, and four bosses provided on the front surface G100b. A peripheral portion G100c and a peripheral peripheral portion G100d formed so as to face forward from the peripheral edge of the back surface G100a are provided. The back surface G100a and the front surface G100b are formed as flat surfaces in the vertical direction.

The outer shape of the closing lid G100 (rear surface G100a) is substantially the same as the outer shape of the peripheral portion G10b of the operation window G10 (similar shape slightly smaller than the peripheral portion G10b), and from the opening G10a of the operation window G10. Is also getting bigger. As a result, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 can be closed by fitting the closing lid G100 into the recess (attaching the closing lid G100 to the back wall G3 so as to fill the recess). It has become.

More specifically, when the closing lid G100 is arranged so that the peripheral portion G100d of the closing lid G100 is aligned with the connecting portion G10d of the operating window G10, the four screw holes G10c of the operating window G10 and the closing The four boss portions G100c of the lid G100 are overlapped with each other, and each screw hole G10c is positioned in front of each boss portion G100c. In this state, the closing lid G100 is attached to the cabinet G (back wall G3) by screwing the screw through which the screw hole G10c is inserted from the front side (inside the cabinet G) into the hole formed in the boss portion G100c. Be done. As a result, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is closed by the closing lid G100. Then, the screw for fastening the closing lid G100 to the back wall G3 is screwed from the inside of the cabinet G (so that the screw head is positioned inside the cabinet G), so that the security for the inside of the cabinet G is secured. Can be secured.

In adjusting the positions and postures of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, with the front door open, the screws that fasten the closing lid G100 and the back wall G3 are operated from the front side as appropriate. By turning it, the screw fastening may be released. As a result, the closing lid G100 can be removed from the back wall G3, and the operation window G10 (opening G10a) closed by the closing lid G100 can be made to appear. In this state, the mounting is inserted into the connecting portions R1, R2, R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 and the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 from the outside (rear side) of the cabinet G through the opening G10a. The positions and orientations of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted by operating the connecting portions R4, R5, and R6 of the screw T, the reflector holding portion B11, and the mirror holder B31.

<Locking the closing lid G100 to the back wall G3>
FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the closing lid as viewed from the rear. FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the closing lid as viewed from the front. FIG. 108 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the back wall as viewed from the front. FIG. 109 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the closing lid is attached to the back wall. FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view showing a closing lid and a back wall in the state shown in FIG. 109.

As shown in FIG. 106, the closing lid G100 has a structure that is substantially symmetrical, and has a first engaging protrusion G101 and a first opening G102 formed near the left end in the rear view, and a first opening. A first recess G103 formed on the right side of the opening G102, a second engaging protrusion G111 and a second opening G112 formed near the right end in rear view, and a second recess formed on the left side of the second opening G112. It is equipped with G113.

The first opening G102 and the second opening G112 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape as through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first engaging projecting portion G101 is formed so as to project forward in the forming portion of the first opening G102. The second engaging projecting portion G111 is formed so as to project forward in the forming portion of the second opening G112. The first recess G103 and the second recess G113 each have a concave shape with respect to the back surface G100a of the closing lid G100, and are formed in a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 107, the first engaging protrusion G101 is formed so as to have a U-shape when viewed from above, and extends in the vertical direction, so that the first engaging protruding portion G101 is in the vertical direction. The length is substantially the same as the length of the long side of the first opening G102. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. As a result, the first engaging protrusion G101 has the inner side surface G107 (the left side surface in the front view) and the closing lid G100 closer to the center of the closing lid G100 as the surfaces corresponding to the two straight portions. It has an outer surface G108 (the surface on the right side in front view) far from the center. The rear end of the inner surface G107 is along the long side G102a of the first opening G102 (the long side on the center side of the closing lid G100 among the two long sides forming the peripheral edge of the first opening G102), and the outer surface. The rear end portion of G108 is positioned near the center of the first opening G102.

On the outer side surface G108, an upper locking piece G108a and a lower locking piece G108b are formed slightly forward of the center in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 117). The upper locking piece G108a and the lower locking piece G108b are formed as protrusions protruding from the side opposite to the center of the closing lid G100 (right side in FIG. 107). A protrusion G108c is also formed at the rear end of the outer side surface G108. The upper locking piece G108a has an engaging surface G108d on the back surface side, and the lower locking piece G108b has an engaging surface G108e on the back surface side (see FIG. 106).

Similarly, the second engaging protrusion G111 is formed so as to have a U-shape when viewed from above, and extends in the vertical direction, and the length of the second engaging protruding portion G111 in the vertical direction is It substantially matches the length of the long side of the second opening G112. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. As a result, the second engaging protrusion G111 has the inner side surface G117 (the right side surface in the front view) and the closing lid G100 closer to the center of the closing lid G100 as the surfaces corresponding to the two straight portions. It has an outer surface G118 (the left surface in front view) far from the center. The rear end of the inner side surface G117 is along the long side G112a of the second opening G112 (the long side on the center side of the closing lid G100 among the two long sides forming the peripheral edge of the second opening G112), and the outer surface. The rear end of the G118 is positioned near the center of the second opening G112.

Although the detailed structure of the second engaging protrusion G111 is not clear from FIG. 107, it has a symmetrical structure with the first engaging protrusion G101. That is, the upper locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118b are formed on the outer surface G118 slightly forward of the center in the front-rear direction. The upper locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118b are formed as protrusions protruding from the side opposite to the center of the closing lid G100 (left side in FIG. 107). A protrusion G118c is also formed at the rear end of the outer side surface G118. The upper locking piece G118a has an engaging surface G118d on the back surface side, and the lower locking piece G118b has an engaging surface G118e on the back surface side.

Further, in FIG. 107, a first convex portion G109 is formed on the left side of the first engaging protrusion G101, and a second convex portion G119 is formed on the right side of the second engaging protruding portion G111. The first convex portion G109 and the second convex portion G119 correspond to the first concave portion G103 and the second concave portion G113 (see FIG. 106), respectively, and correspond to the concave portions of the first concave portion G103 and the second concave portion G113, respectively. It has a shape that protrudes forward with respect to the front surface G100b.

Further, an upper protruding portion G121 is formed slightly below the upper edge portion G100e forming the upper edge (upper side) of the rectangular peripheral edge portion G100d, substantially parallel to the upper edge portion G100e. A lower protruding portion G122 is formed slightly above the lower edge portion G100f forming the lower edge (lower side) of the peripheral edge portion G100d, substantially parallel to the lower edge portion G100f.

Here, as shown in FIG. 104, the shape of the opening G10a formed in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G is not strictly a rectangle, and the peripheral portion G10b is a part thereof (the left side portion in the rear view). It has a notched shape. As shown in FIG. 108, the right edge portion G10f is formed by the cutout portion G10e. The right edge portion G10f is a part of the peripheral edge of the opening G10a (the portion connecting the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3 and the peripheral edge portion G10b), and constitutes the right edge of the peripheral edge in front view. The inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3 is a surface on the front side of the back wall G3. For the sake of clarity, the right edge G10f is shaded in FIG. 108.

The notch portion G10e is a portion with which the first engaging protrusion G101 of the closing lid G100 engages. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109, when the closing lid G100 is attached to the back wall G3, the engaging surface G108d and the lower locking of the upper locking piece G108a in the first engaging protrusion G101. The engaging surface G108e (see FIG. 106) of the piece G108b comes into contact with the inner surface G3a (the portion along the right edge portion G10f) of the back wall G3, and the outer surface G108 (engaging surface G108d and the engaging surface G108d) of the first engaging protrusion G101. The portion continuous with the engaging surface G108e) comes into contact with the right edge portion G10f of the back wall G3 (see FIG. 118).

Similarly, the second engaging protrusion G111 of the closing lid G100 is engaged in the vicinity of the left edge portion G10g. The left edge portion G10g is a part of the peripheral edge of the opening G10a (the portion connecting the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3 and the peripheral edge portion G10b), and constitutes the left edge of the peripheral edge in front view. Specifically, although not shown, in a state where the closing lid G100 is attached to the back wall G3, the engaging surface G118d and the lower locking piece G118b of the upper locking piece G118a in the second engaging protrusion G111. A portion where the engaging surface G118e abuts on the inner surface G3a (a portion along the left edge portion G10g) of the back wall G3 and is continuous with the outer surface G118 (engaging surface G118d and the engaging surface G118e) of the second engaging protrusion G111. ) Contact the left edge portion G10g of the back wall G3.

As described above, the upper locking piece G108a and the lower locking piece G108b of the first engaging protrusion G101, and the upper locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118b of the second engaging protruding portion G111 The closing lid G100 is locked to the back wall G3.

FIG. 110 shows a state in which the closing lid G100 is fixed to the back wall G3 and cut on a surface (vertical surface in the front-rear direction) of the closing lid G100 passing through the first recess G103. As shown in FIG. 110, the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 is in contact with the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10.

Here, the length from the front surface G100b of the closing lid G100 to the front end of the lower protrusion G122 (the forward protrusion length of the lower protrusion G122 with respect to the front surface G100b) is the peripheral portion from the front surface G100b. It is longer than the length to the front end of the G100d (the length of the peripheral portion G100d protruding forward with respect to the front surface G100b). As a result, the front end of the lower protrusion G122 is positioned between the peripheral edge G10b of the back wall G3 and the inner side surface G3a.

Further, the length from the front surface G100b of the closing lid G100 to the front end of the upper protruding portion G121 (the length protruding forward of the upper protruding portion G121 with respect to the front surface G100b) is from the front surface G100b of the closing lid G100. It is longer than the length to the front end of the lower protruding portion G122 (the forward protruding length of the lower protruding portion G122 with respect to the front surface G100b). As a result, the front end of the upper protrusion G121 is positioned in front of the inner surface G3a of the back wall G3.

The lower surface of the lower protrusion G122 and the lower edge portion G10h of the opening G10a are in close proximity (substantially abutting), and the upper surface of the upper protruding portion G121 and the upper edge portion G10i of the opening G10a are in close proximity (substantially abutting). )are doing. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the lower protrusion G122 and the lower edge G10h of the opening G10a and the gap between the upper surface of the upper protrusion G121 and the upper edge G10i of the opening G10a are the peripheral edges G100d of the closing lid G100. It is smaller than the thickness in the vertical direction in.

As a result, when a slight gap is formed between the front end of the peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100 and the peripheral edge G10b of the operation window G10, the peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100 and the back wall G3 Even if an attempt is made to intrude a wire-shaped instrument through a gap with the connecting portion G10d, the upper protruding portion G121 or the lower protruding portion G122 becomes an obstacle so that the invasion can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out through the gap.

The peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100 and the connecting portion G10d of the back wall G3 are basically in contact with each other, but between the peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100 and the connecting portion G10d of the back wall G3. May have a slight gap (for example, smaller than the vertical thickness of the peripheral portion G100d of the closing lid G100). As used herein, the term "contact" is a concept including a case of substantially contact and a case of close contact.

<Attachment of irradiation unit B and closing lid G100 to back wall G3>
The irradiation unit B and the closing lid G100 are attached to the back wall G3 through the following steps (i) to (v).

(I) Temporarily attach (temporarily fix) the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 to the back wall G3.
(Ii) The irradiation unit B is hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000.
(Iii) The irradiation unit B is fixed to the back wall G3 by fastening with the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000.
(Iv) The closing lid G100 is temporarily attached (temporarily fixed) to the back wall G3 by locking using the first engaging protrusion G101 and the second engaging protruding portion G111.
(V) The closing lid G100 is fixed to the back wall G3 by fastening with the lid mounting screw 5100.

Hereinafter, the steps (i) to (v) will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 115.

FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit hooking screw. FIG. 112 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the irradiation unit hooking screw is temporarily fixed to the back wall. FIG. 113 is a front view of the projector cover plate. FIG. 114 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover plate as viewed from slightly above. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the projector cover plate as viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 108, the back wall G3 is formed with two screw holes 5010 for hooking the irradiation unit and two screw holes 5020 for fastening the irradiation unit. The two irradiation unit hooking screw holes 5010 are provided in the vicinity of the two upper corners of the opening G10a and above the two upper screw holes G10c, respectively. The two irradiation unit fastening screw holes 5020 are provided in the vicinity of the two lower corners of the opening G10a and below the two lower screw holes G10c, respectively.

The irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 is screwed into the irradiation unit hooking screw hole 5010. As shown in FIG. 111, the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 includes a screw portion 5001 and a head portion 5002. The threaded portion 5001 has a cylindrical shape extending in a predetermined direction. The head portion 5002 has a shape that bulges around the screw portion 5001 when viewed from the front with respect to the extending direction (axial direction) of the screw portion 5001. The head 5002 includes a head body 5003 and a washer 5004, and both the head body 5003 and the washer 5004 have a diameter larger than that of the screw portion 5001, and the diameter of the washer 5004 is the head. It is larger than the diameter of the main body 5003.

FIG. 112 shows the back wall G3 and the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 at the time when the step (i) is performed. In this state, the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 is loosely attached as compared with the state in which the irradiation unit B and the closing lid G100 are attached to the back wall G3 (the state in which the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed). The screwing amount (degree of screwing) of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 on the back wall G3 is small. As shown in FIG. 112, a part of the screw portion 5001 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 and the entire head portion 5002 project forward from the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3.

In the step (ii) described above, the back surface side of the irradiation unit B is hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 protruding in this way. As described above, the projector cover plate B1000 is attached to the back side of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 98).

As shown in FIG. 113, the projector cover plate B1000 has a shape in which a rectangular opening B1001 is provided in a plate-shaped member having a rectangular front view. The projector cover plate B1000 is formed with two lid fastening screw holes B1002 on the right side portion and the left side portion of the opening B1001.

Further, the projector cover plate B1000 is formed with two screw holes B1010 for hooking the irradiation unit and two screw holes B1020 for fastening the cabinet. The two irradiation unit hooking screw holes B1010 are provided in the vicinity of the two upper corners of the opening B1001 and above the two upper lid fastening screw holes B1002, respectively. The two cabinet fastening screw holes B1020 are provided in the vicinity of the two lower corners of the opening B1001, respectively, and below the two lower lid fastening screw holes B1002.

As shown in FIG. 114, the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 is formed as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 is composed of an upper portion B1010a located on the upper side and a lower portion B1010b formed continuously with the upper portion B1010a, and has a gourd shape as a whole. .. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 114, the boundary (straight line connecting the recessed portions) between the upper portion B1010a and the lower portion B1010b is shown by a virtual line. The diameter of the lower portion B1010b is larger than the diameter of the upper portion B1010a.

A peripheral wall portion B1011 is formed around the screw hole B1010 for hooking the irradiation unit at a position recessed with respect to the main surface B1005 of the projector cover plate B1000. In other words, the vicinity of the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 has a shape in which an elliptical recess is formed with respect to the main surface B1005 and an opening is formed by penetrating most of the recess. ing. The opening corresponds to the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010, and the portion of the recess in which the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral wall portion B1011. For the sake of clarity, the peripheral wall portion B1011 is shown in diagonal lines in FIG. 114.

A peripheral wall portion B1003 is formed around the lid fastening screw hole B1002 at a position recessed with respect to the main surface B1005 of the projector cover plate B1000. In other words, the vicinity of the lid fastening screw hole B1002 has a shape in which an elliptical concave portion is formed with respect to the main surface B1005 and an opening is formed by penetrating a part of the concave portion. There is. The opening corresponds to the screw hole B1002 for fastening the lid, and the portion of the recess where the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral wall portion B1003. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 114, the peripheral wall portion B1003 is shaded.

In the step (ii) above, the irradiation unit is overlapped with the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 of the projector cover plate B1000 and the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 (see FIG. 112) protruding from the back wall G3. Bring B closer to the back wall G3. The diameter of the upper portion B1010a of the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 is smaller than the diameter of the head 5002 (washer portion 5004) of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000, but the diameter of the lower portion B1010b of the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010. The diameter is larger than the diameter of the head 5002 (washer portion 5004).

Specifically, in the upper portion B1010a, the lengths in the left-right direction and the up-down direction (the lengths of the longest portions respectively) are smaller than the diameter of the seat portion 5004, whereas in the lower portion B1010b, the lengths in the left-right direction and the up-down direction. The length in the direction (the length of each of the longest portions) is larger than the diameter of the seat portion 5004. As a result, the head portion 5002 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 cannot be inserted into the upper portion B1010a, but can be inserted into the lower portion B1010b.

When the irradiation unit B is moved slightly downward with the head 5002 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 inserted in the lower portion B1010b, the screw portion 5001 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 and the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 It comes into contact with the upper edge portion B1010c of (upper portion B1010a). The upper edge portion B1010c is a part of the peripheral edge of the upper portion B1010a (the portion connecting the back surface side peripheral edge portion B1012 and the peripheral wall portion B1011 of the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010), and corresponds to the upper end of the upper portion B1010a. .. For clarity, FIG. 115 shows the back peripheral edge B1012 in diagonal lines. In this way, the projector cover plate B1000 can be hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000.

As shown in FIG. 113, the projector cover plate B1000 is formed with two upper screw holes B1030 for fastening the unit and two lower screw holes B1031 for fastening the unit. As shown in FIG. 115, the projector cover B1 is formed with two plate fastening upper boss portions B1040 and two plate fastening lower boss portions B1041.

The formation position of the upper boss portion B1040 for plate fastening corresponds to the formation position of the upper screw hole B1030 for unit fastening, and the screw through which the upper screw hole B1030 for unit fastening is inserted is inserted into the upper boss portion B1040 for plate fastening. Screwed into the formed hole. Further, the formation position of the lower boss portion B1041 for plate fastening corresponds to the formation position of the lower screw hole B1031 for unit fastening, and the screw through which the lower screw hole B1031 for unit fastening is inserted is for plate fastening. It is screwed into the hole formed in the lower boss portion B1041. As a result, the projector cover plate B1000 is fixed to the projector cover B1 by screwing.

In the projector cover B1, the formed portion of the plate fastening upper boss portion B1040 and the formed portion of the plate fastening lower boss portion B1041 are connected by an inclined portion B1042. The inclined portion B1042 is formed so as to have an inclined posture so that the front portion is higher than the rear portion. A pedestal mounting portion B1043, which is a mounting location for the upper pedestal B220, is formed on the back surface side of the inclined portion B1042. As a result, the projector device B2 is also arranged in a posture having an inclination so that the front side is higher than the rear side.

Since the inclined portion B1042 is inclined, the upper boss portion B1040 for plate fastening is positioned in front of the lower boss portion B1041 for plate fastening. On the other hand, the projector cover plate B1000 is formed with a screw hole protruding portion B1035 having a structure protruding from the main surface B1005. The upper screw hole B1030 for fastening the unit is formed at the tip of the screw hole protrusion B1035. As a result, the unit fastening upper screw hole B1030 is positioned in front of the unit fastening lower screw hole B1031.

In this way, the upper screw hole B1030 for unit fastening and the lower side for unit fastening are located at the formation positions of the upper boss portion B1040 for plate fastening and the lower boss portion B1041 for plate fastening (boss portions having different positions in the front-rear direction). It is possible to correspond the formation position of the screw hole B1031. The projector cover plate B1000 is arranged in the vertical direction (so as to be substantially parallel to the back wall G3 and the closing lid G100).

As described above, in the step (ii) above, the projector cover plate B1000 is hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000. After that, in the step (iii) above, the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) is fixed to the back wall G3 by screwing. Specifically, as described above, at the time when the step (ii) is performed, the screwing amount (degree of screwing) of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 on the back wall G3 is small, and the screw is said. By increasing the degree of fitting, screwing is performed firmly.

Further, when the projector cover plate B1000 is hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000, the irradiation unit fastening screw hole 5020 (see FIG. 108) on the back wall G3 and the cabinet fastening screw hole B1020 of the projector cover plate B1000 (see FIG. 108). (See FIG. 113) is superimposed. In this state, the screw through which the cabinet fastening screw hole B1020 is inserted (irradiation unit fastening screw) is screwed into the irradiation unit fastening screw hole 5020 to reinforce the fixed state between the back wall G3 and the projector cover plate B1000. be able to.

The diameter of the cabinet fastening screw hole B1020 is smaller than the diameter of the head (not shown) of the irradiation unit fastening screw. Therefore, the irradiation unit fastening screw cannot be inserted into the cabinet fastening screw hole B1020 from the back side of the projector cover plate B1000, and can be inserted only from the front side of the projector cover plate B1000. The irradiation unit fastening screw has the same configuration as the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000.

As described above, when the irradiation unit B is attached to the back wall G3 by the steps (i) to (iii) above, subsequently, in the step (iv) above, the closing lid G100 is engaged with the back wall G3. Stop it.

Specifically, the side surfaces of the first recess G103 and the second recess G113 (see FIG. 106) are grasped by the left and right thumbs, respectively, and the outer surface G108 and the second engaging protrusion G111 of the first engaging protrusion G101. The closing lid G100 is gripped by grasping the outer side surface G118 (see FIG. 107) with the left and right index fingers or the middle finger, respectively. Then, the closing lid G100 is brought close to the back wall G3 from the back side, and the front portions of the outer surface G108 and the outer surface G118 (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b, and upper locking piece G118a and The closing lid G100 is arranged so that the lower locking piece G118b (front of the lower locking piece G118b) is along the right edge portion G10f and the left edge portion G10g (see FIG. 108) of the back wall G3, respectively.

In this state, by pushing the closing lid G100 forward, the closing lid G100 is locked to the back wall G3 as shown in FIG. 109. At that time, if necessary, a force may be applied in the central direction of the closing lid G100 while putting a finger on the protrusion G108c formed on the outer surface G108 and the protrusion G118c formed on the outer surface G118. As a result, the outer surface G108 and the outer surface G118 are slightly deformed toward the center of the closing lid G100, and the locking can be performed smoothly.

When the closing lid G100 is locked to the back wall G3, the boss portion G100c of the closing lid G100 (see FIG. 107), the screw hole G10c of the back wall G3 (see FIG. 108), and the lid of the projector cover plate B1000. It overlaps with the fastening screw hole B1002 (see FIG. 113). In the step (v) above, in this state, the screw through which the lid fastening screw hole B1002 and the screw hole G10c are inserted (the lid mounting screw 5100 shown in FIG. 120) is screwed into the boss portion G100c. As a result, the closing lid G100 and the irradiation unit B can be integrally fixed to the back wall G3. Unlike the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000, the lid mounting screw 5100 does not have a washer (the head is composed of only the head body).

<Arrangement around the back wall G3>
FIG. 116 is a partially enlarged perspective view around the first cavity. FIG. 117 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the first engaging protrusion. FIG. 118 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the first engaging protrusion is housed in the first cavity. FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the first engaging protrusion is housed in the first cavity. FIG. 120 is a cross-sectional view of the periphery of the irradiation unit hooking screw and the lid mounting screw when the closing lid and the irradiation unit are attached to the back wall. FIG. 121 is a cross-sectional view showing a closing lid, a back wall, and a projector cover plate. FIG. 122 is a front view showing the periphery of the opening on the back wall and the projector cover plate in an exploded manner. FIG. 123 is a partially enlarged front view of the inside of the cabinet in the state shown in FIG. 97.

As shown in FIG. 115, a first cavity B1050 and a second cavity B1060 are formed on the back surface side of the projector cover plate B1000. The first cavity B1050 and the second cavity B1060 each have a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and are formed as recesses recessed with respect to the surrounding surface (the vertical surface including the back peripheral peripheral portion B1012 and the like). That is, the recess has a shape in which one surface (the surface on the back surface side) of the rectangular parallelepiped is opened, and the first cavity B1050 and the second cavity B1060 are surrounded by the remaining five surfaces of the rectangular parallelepiped. It is a part.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the first cavity B1050, the five surfaces (wall portions) are composed of a front wall portion B1050a, an upper wall portion B1050b, a lower wall portion B1050c, and left and right side wall portions B1050d and B1050e. ing. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 116, the trailing edge B1050f of these wall portions B1050a to e are shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 117, in the closing lid G100, a lateral projecting portion G130 projecting forward with respect to the front surface G100b is formed on the side (left side in the front view) of the first engaging projecting portion G101. .. The lateral protrusion G130 has a plate-like shape, and the forward protrusion length of the side protrusion G130 with reference to the front surface G100b is larger than the protrusion length of the first engagement protrusion G101. It's getting shorter. The side protrusion G130 has a side surface G130a facing the inner side surface G107 of the first engagement protrusion G101, and a contact surface G130b formed continuously with the side surface G130a and substantially parallel to the front surface G100b. There is. For clarity, the contact surface G130b is shaded in FIG. 117.

Further, below the first engaging protrusion G101, a lower protrusion G131 that protrudes forward with respect to the front surface G100b is formed. The downward protrusion G131 is configured so that the protrusion length on the left side portion is longer than the protrusion length on the right side portion. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 117, the upper surface G131a of the downward projecting portion G131 is shown by diagonal lines, and the front end surface G131b on the left side portion is shown in black. Above the first engaging protrusion G101, an upward protrusion G132 that protrudes forward with respect to the front surface G100b is formed. Similar to the downward protrusion G131, the upward protrusion G132 is configured such that the protrusion length on the left side portion is longer than the protrusion length on the right side portion.

In FIG. 118, in a state where the closing lid G100 and the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) are attached to the back wall G3, the pieces are cut along a horizontal plane passing through the upper locking piece G108a of the first engaging protrusion G101. It shows the situation. In FIG. 119, the upper locking piece G108a and the lower locking piece G108a of the first engaging protrusion G101 are attached to the back wall G3 with the closing lid G100 and the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) attached. It shows a state of cutting on a vertical surface (plane in the front-rear direction) passing through G108b.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 118, the cut surfaces of the first engaging protrusion G101 and the lateral protrusion G130 are shown by diagonal lines, and the front wall portion B1050a and the left and right side wall portions B1050d constituting the first cavity B1050 are shown. The cut surface of B1050e is shaded, and the cut surface of the back wall G3 is shown in black. In FIG. 119, the upper end of the first engaging protrusion G101 is shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surfaces of the front wall portion B1050a, the upper wall portion B1050b, and the lower wall portion B1050c constituting the first cavity B1050 are shaded. The lower right edge G10j of the back wall G3 is shown in black. The lower right edge portion G10j is a part of the peripheral edge of the opening G10a (the portion connecting the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3 and the peripheral edge portion G10b), and is continuous from the lower end of the right edge portion G10f (see FIG. 108). It is formed as a horizontal plane.

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the first engaging protrusion G101 is housed in the first cavity B1050 of the projector cover plate B1000, and has a front wall portion B1050a, an upper wall portion B1050b, a lower wall portion B1050c, and left and right. It is surrounded by the side wall portions B1050d and B1050e.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118, the front side of the first engaging protrusion G101 is covered with the front wall portion B1050a. Further, the trailing end edge B1050f (see FIG. 116) of the side wall portion B1050d abuts (substantially abuts) with the contact surface 130b (see FIG. 117) of the closing lid G100 (side protrusion G130), and the side wall portion The B1050d and the lateral protrusion G130 are arranged so as to be continuous. As a result, the left side of the first engaging protrusion G101 is covered with the side wall portion B1050d and the side protrusion G130. Further, the trailing edge B1050f (see FIG. 116) of the side wall portion B1050e is in contact (substantially in contact) with the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3. As a result, the right side of the first engaging protrusion G101 is covered with the side wall portion B1050e and the back wall G3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the rear end edge B1050f (see FIG. 116) of the lower wall portion B1050c abuts on the front end surface G131b (see FIG. 117) of the closing lid G100 (lower protrusion G131) on the left side portion. (Approximately abutting), and abutting (substantially abutting) the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3 on the right side portion. The upper surface of the lower wall portion B1050c and the lower right edge portion G10j are arranged so as to be continuous and are located on substantially the same plane. As a result, the lower side of the first engaging protrusion G101 is covered with the lower wall portion B1050c, the downward protrusion G131, and the back wall G3. Similarly, although not shown, the upper side of the first engaging protrusion G101 is covered by the upper wall portion B1050b, the upper protrusion G132, and the back wall G3.

As described above, the front, side, upper, and lower parts of the first engaging protrusion G101 are all surrounded by the wall portion. Similarly, the front, side, upper, and lower parts of the second engaging protrusion G111 are all surrounded by the wall portion. As a result, even if an attempt is made to invade a wire-shaped instrument through a gap such as the first opening G102 or the second opening G112 (see FIG. 106), these walls will be an obstacle to prevent the invasion. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the goto action from being performed through the gap.

In FIG. 120, in a state where the closing lid G100 and the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) are attached to the back wall G3, the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 and the lid attaching screw 5100 pass through the center in the left-right direction. It shows the state of cutting on the vertical surface (plane in the front-back direction). For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 120, the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000, the lid mounting screw 5100, and the cut surface of the back wall G3 are shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the projector cover plate B1000 is shown by shading. The cut surface of the closing lid G100 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 120, in front of the peripheral wall portion B1011 of the projector cover plate B1000, there is a washer portion 5004 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000. That is, the peripheral wall portion B1011 is in contact with the surface on the back surface side of the washer portion 5004. Therefore, even if the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) tries to move forward, the peripheral wall portion B1011 is locked by the washer portion 5004, and the movement of the irradiation unit B is restricted. As a result, the irradiation unit B can be firmly attached to the back wall G3.

Also in the process of assembling the game machine 1, the peripheral wall portion B1011 is arranged on the back side of the washer portion 5004 when the irradiation unit B is hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 (see the step (ii) above). become. As a result, similarly to the above, even if the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) tries to move forward, the peripheral wall portion B1011 is locked by the washer portion 5004, and the hooked state can be stabilized. As a result, the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 can be smoothly fastened.

Note that FIG. 120 shows a state in which there is a gap between the upper ends of the screw portion 5001 and the washer portion 5004 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 and the projector cover plate B1000, but in reality, the screw portion 5001 One or both of the upper end of the screw and the upper end of the washer 5004 may be in contact with the projector cover plate B1000. That is, the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) may be hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000. In the drawings, for convenience, the threaded portion may be shown in a thinner state than it actually is.

Further, in front of the peripheral wall portion B1003 of the projector cover plate B1000, the head of the lid mounting screw 5100 is present. That is, the peripheral wall portion B1003 is in contact with the surface on the back surface side of the head. Therefore, even if the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) tries to move forward, the peripheral wall portion B1003 is locked by the screw head, and the movement of the irradiation unit B is restricted. As a result, the mounting strength of the irradiation unit B on the back wall G3 can be increased.

In FIG. 121, a surface (vertical facing in the front-rear direction) of the closing lid G100 passing through the first recess G103 in a state where the closing lid G100 and the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) are attached to the back wall G3. It shows how it was cut with. FIG. 110 shows the state before the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) is attached, but FIG. 121 shows the state after the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) is attached. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 121 shows the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3 with diagonal lines.

As described with reference to FIG. 110, the front end of the upper protruding portion G121 in the closing lid G100 is positioned in front of the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3. As shown in FIG. 121, the back side of the upper portion of the opening B1001 (see FIG. 113) in the projector cover plate B1000 is substantially in contact with the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3. The upper surface of the upper protruding portion G121 protruding forward from the inner side surface G3a is substantially in contact with the upper edge portion B1001a of the opening B1001 of the projector cover plate B1000. As a result, the structure is such that it is more difficult for the wire-shaped instrument to enter, and it is possible to effectively prevent the goto action.

As shown in FIG. 115, on the back side of the projector cover plate B1000, a substrate mounting portion B1070 is provided in the lower portion of the opening B1001. A projector control board B23 (see FIG. 12) is fixed to the board mounting portion B1070. As shown in FIG. 121, the back side of the lower portion of the opening B1001 in the projector cover plate B1000 is substantially in contact with the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3. Therefore, the projector control board B23 is arranged in the space formed between the back side of the projector cover plate B1000 and the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3.

As described with reference to FIG. 104, the peripheral edge portion G10b of the back wall G3 has a shape in which a part thereof (the left side portion in the rear view) is cut out. As a result, the opening G10a has a left-right asymmetrical shape. At this point, it is assumed that the shaded portion shown in FIG. 122 is formed as the opening G10a so that the opening G10a has a symmetrical shape. In this case, it is necessary to form the two screw holes G10c on the right side on the right side. Then, as a result, the irradiation unit B is arranged on the right side. According to the present embodiment, the space on the right side of the irradiation unit B can be effectively utilized by not setting the shaded portion shown in FIG. 122 as the opening G10a.

As shown in FIG. 123, in front view, the distance (R1) between the right end of the irradiation unit B (projector cover plate B1000) and the right end of the back wall G3 (the inner surface of the right side wall G2R of the cabinet G) is the irradiation unit B. It is larger than the distance (R2) between the left end of the (projector cover plate B1000) and the left end of the back wall G3 (the inner surface of the left side wall G2L of the cabinet G).

Here, as described above, the main control board MS (see FIG. 4) is attached to the inner surface of the right side wall G2R of the cabinet G. A space for opening and sealing the caulking needs to exist in the vicinity of the installation location of the main control board MS. However, according to the present embodiment, the space can be secured.

Corresponding to the left-right asymmetry of the opening G10a of the back wall G3, the distance (distance in the left-right direction) between the right edge portion G10f of the opening G10a and the two screw holes G10c on the right side is the left edge of the opening G10a. It is shorter than the distance (distance in the left-right direction) between the portion G10g and the two screw holes G10c on the left side. Correspondingly, in a state where the closing lid G100 is attached to the back wall G3, the distance (distance in the left-right direction) between the first engaging protrusion G101 and the two screw holes G10c on the right side is determined. It is shorter than the distance (distance in the left-right direction) between the second engaging protrusion G111 and the two screw holes G10c on the left side.

Here, as shown in FIG. 122, in the projector cover plate B1000, the left edge of the front wall portion B1050a constituting the first cavity B1050 (see FIG. 115) is located on the left side of the right edge portion B1001b of the opening B1001. However, the distance between the left edge of the front wall portion B1050a and the right edge portion B1001b of the opening B1001 is small (the positions in the left-right direction are substantially the same). On the other hand, the right edge of the front wall portion B1060a constituting the second cavity B1060 (see FIG. 115) is located considerably to the right of the left edge portion B1001c of the opening B1001 and is about the right half of the second cavity B1060. Is formed so as to project inside the opening B1001. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 122, the front wall portion B1050a and the front wall portion B1060a are shown by diagonal lines.

That is, the first cavity B1050 and the second cavity B1060 have different positional relationships with respect to the opening B1001, and the distance between the right edge of the front wall portion B1060a and the left edge portion B1001c of the opening B1001 is the front wall portion. It is larger than the distance between the left edge of B1050a and the right edge of opening B1001 B1001b. Correspondingly, the distance (distance in the left-right direction) between the first cavity B1050 (front wall portion B1050a) and the two screw holes B1002 for fastening the lid on the right side is the second cavity B1060 (front wall portion B1060a). ) And the two screw holes B1002 for fastening the lid on the left side (distance in the left-right direction).

As a result, the formation positions of the first cavity B1050 and the second cavity B1060 of the projector cover plate B1000 are made to correspond to the formation positions of the first engagement protrusion G101 and the second engagement protrusion G111 of the closing lid G100. The formation position of the lid fastening screw hole B1002 of the projector cover plate B1000 can correspond to the formation position of the screw hole G10c of the back wall G3.

<Formation of space by projector cover B1 and duct cover B2100>
FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the cover portion. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the duct cover as viewed from the left side. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the duct cover as viewed from the right side. FIG. 127 is a cross-sectional view of the duct cover as viewed from the rear. FIG. 128 is a cross-sectional view of the cover portion. FIG. 129 is a cross-sectional view of the cover portion. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the cover portion as viewed from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 124, a duct cover B2100 is attached to the left side portion of the projector cover B1. The duct cover B2100 has a configuration adopted in place of the blind B500 (see FIG. 30). A space P (see FIG. 32) is formed inside the structure (cover portion B2000) composed of the projector cover B1 and the duct cover B2100 so that air can pass through the space P. It has become. Hereinafter, the space P in the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 125, the projector cover B1 has a left side wall portion B2201 constituting the left end of the projector cover B1. As shown in FIG. 126, the left inner wall surface B2201a, which is the inner surface (right side surface) of the left side wall portion B2201, generally has side P, side Q, side R, side S, side T, side U, and side V. And, it is formed in a graphic shape surrounded by the side W.

Further, the projector cover B1 has a right side wall portion B2202 formed substantially parallel to the left side wall portion B2201. The shape of the right side wall portion B2202 is such that the trapezoidal shape shown in the shaded portion of FIG. 125 is cut out from the shape of the left side wall portion B2201. As a result, the surface of the right side wall portion B2202 facing the left inner wall surface B2201a (the left surface) is divided into the upper right inner wall surface B2202a and the lower right inner wall surface B2202b.

Further, the projector cover B1 has a lower side wall surface B2203 connecting the lower end (side S) of the left inner wall surface B2201a and the lower end of the lower right inner wall surface B2202b, and the lower side wall surface 2203 facing upward from the rear end (side T). A rear side wall surface B2204 continuously formed (along the side U), an inclined wall surface B2205 formed continuously diagonally forward and upward (along the side U) from the upper end of the rear side wall surface B2204, and an inclined wall surface. The front side wall surface B2206 formed continuously upward (along the side V) from the front end of the B2205, and the upper side continuously formed forward (along the side W) from the upper end of the front side wall surface B2206. It has a wall surface B2207.

The upper portion of the rear side wall surface B2204 and the right end of the inclined wall surface B2205 are continuous with the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. The front side wall surface B2206 extends to the right side of the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. On the right side of the upper right inner wall surface B2202a, an opening wall surface B2208 substantially parallel to the upper upper wall surface B2207 is formed. The rear end of the opening wall surface B2208 coincides with the lower end of the front side wall surface B2206, and the left end of the opening wall surface B2208 coincides with the upper end of the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. The right end of the front side wall surface B2206 and the right end of the opening wall surface B2208 are connected by the opening wall surface B2209.

The duct cover B2100 has the outer shape of the projector cover B1 as described above (left inner wall surface B2201a, upper right inner wall surface B2202a, lower right inner wall surface B2202b, lower side wall surface B2203, side wall surface B2204, inclined wall surface B2205, and , The outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape formed by the front side wall surface B2206). As a result, the duct cover B2100 has a shape that can be fitted to the front side of the projector cover B1 as a whole.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125, the duct cover B2100 has a left side wall portion B2101 constituting the left end of the duct cover B2100. The shape of the left side wall portion B2101 corresponds to the shape of the left side wall portion B2201 of the projector cover B1, and the rear end edge of the left side wall portion B2101 is the front end edge (side P, side Q, and side) of the left side wall portion B2201. It can be fitted to R). The outer edge of the left side wall portion B2101 includes a side X substantially parallel to the side P, a side Y substantially parallel to the side Q, and a side Z substantially parallel to the side R.

Further, the duct cover B2100 has an upper right wall portion B2102 and a lower right wall portion B2103 formed substantially parallel to the left wall portion B2101. The upper right wall portion B2102 and the lower right wall portion B2103 are portions that are continuous with the right side wall portion B2202 of the projector cover B1 in a state where the duct cover B2100 is attached to the projector cover B1, respectively. The outer edge of the upper right wall portion B2102 includes a side x substantially parallel to the side X, a side y substantially parallel to the side Y, and a side z substantially parallel to the side Z. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 126 shows the upper right wall portion B2102 and the lower right wall portion B2103 with diagonal lines.

Further, the duct cover B2100 has a front lower side wall portion B2104 formed continuously from the front end (side Z) in the lower portion of the left side wall portion B2101 toward the right side, and a front end (side) in the upper portion of the left side wall portion B2101. It has a front upper side wall portion B2205 formed continuously from X) toward the right side. The front lower side wall portion B2104 and the front upper side wall portion B2105 are each formed in a rectangular shape. A lower right wall portion B2103 is continuously formed in the lower right portion of the front lower side wall portion B2104. A lower portion (a portion including the side z) of the upper right wall portion B2102 is continuously formed in the upper right portion of the front lower side wall portion B2104.

The left-right length of the front upper side wall portion B2105 is shorter than the left-right length of the front lower side wall portion B2104. The right end of the inclined wall portion B2106 formed continuously from the right end to the right side of the front upper side wall portion B2105 coincides with the side x forming the outer edge of the upper right wall portion B2102. The upper end of the front lower side wall portion B2104 and the lower ends of the front upper side wall portion B2105 and the inclined wall portion B2106 are connected by the inclined wall portion B2107. The right end of the inclined wall portion B2107 coincides with the side y constituting the outer edge of the upper right wall portion B2102.

Further, the duct cover B2100 has an opening B2108 on the upper side of the front upper side wall portion B2105 and the inclined wall portion B2106. The opening B2108 has a shape in which two opposing surfaces (front surface and back surface) of the rectangular parallelepiped are opened. The lower wall surface B2108a constituting the lower wall surface of the rectangular parallelepiped has a shape as if the shape shown in the shaded portion of FIG. 127 is cut out. Further, the left wall surface B2108b constituting the side wall of the rectangular parallelepiped is continuous with the inner side surface (left inner wall surface B2101a) of the left side wall portion B2101 (it is a part of the left inner wall surface B2101a). Note that FIG. 127 shows a state in which the opening B2108 is cut in a horizontal plane.

Screw holes B2110 are formed on the right side and the left side of the opening B2108 in the duct cover B2100, respectively. Further, a screw hole B2111 is formed in the lower portion of the front lower side wall portion B2104. On the other hand, boss portions B2210 are formed on the right side and the left side of the front side wall surface B2206 of the projector cover B1, respectively. Further, a boss portion B2211 is formed on the lower side wall surface B2203 so that a part thereof is raised.

The formation positions of the screw holes B2110 and the screw holes B2111 in the duct cover B2100 correspond to the formation positions of the boss portion B2210 and the boss portion B2211 in the projector cover B1, respectively. The duct cover B2100 is attached to the projector cover B1 by screwing the screw through which the screw hole B2110 and the screw hole B2111 are inserted into the holes formed in the boss portion B2210 and the boss portion B2211.

When the duct cover B2100 is attached to the projector cover B1, the rear end edge of the left side wall portion B2101 of the duct cover B2100 fits into the front end edge of the left side wall portion B2201 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the inner side surface (left inner wall surface B2201a) of the left side wall portion B2201 of the projector cover B1 and the inner surface surface (left inner wall surface B2101a) of the left side wall portion B2101 of the duct cover B2100 are substantially continuous.

FIG. 128 shows a state in which the cover portion 2000 shown in FIG. 124 is cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction slightly to the right of the left side wall portion B2201 of the projector cover B1 and the left side wall portion B2101 of the duct cover B2100. FIG. 129 shows a state in which the cover portion 2000 shown in FIG. 124 is cut in a horizontal plane passing through the screw hole B2110.

As shown in FIG. 128, the upper right inner wall surface B2202a of the projector cover B1 and the inner side surface (upper right wall surface B2102a) of the upper right wall portion B2102 of the duct cover B2100 are substantially continuous, and the lower right inner wall surface B2202b and the duct cover of the projector cover B1 are substantially continuous. The inner side surface (lower right wall surface B2103a) of the lower right wall portion B2103 in B2100 is substantially continuous.

Further, the duct cover B2100 is formed with a lower side wall portion B2109 that is continuous from the lower end of the front lower side wall portion B2104 toward the rear, and the lower side wall surface B2203 of the projector cover B1 and the lower side wall portion B2109 of the duct cover B2100. It is substantially continuous with the inner side surface (lower side wall surface B2109a). Further, the upper wall surface 2207 of the projector cover B1 and the upper wall surface (upper wall surface B2108c) of the opening B2108 of the duct cover B2100 are substantially continuous.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 128, the lower side wall surface B2203 of the projector cover B1, the upper right wall surface B2102a and the lower right wall surface B2103a of the duct cover B2100 are shown by diagonal lines, and the front lower side wall portion B2104 of the duct cover B2100 is shaded. The upper right inner wall surface B2202a and the lower right inner wall surface B2202b of the projector cover B1 and the lower side wall surface B2109a of the duct cover B2100 are shown in black. Actually, the boss portion B2211 is arranged on the upper portion of the lower side wall surface B2109a, but for convenience, the presence of the boss portion B2211 is ignored and the lower side wall surface B2109a is shown.

Further, as shown in FIG. 129, the opening wall surface B2208 of the projector cover B1 and the lower wall (lower wall surface B2108a) of the opening B2108 of the duct cover B2100 are substantially continuous, and the opening wall surface B2209 and the duct cover of the projector cover B1 are substantially continuous. The right wall (right wall surface B2108d) of the opening B2108 in B2100 is substantially continuous. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 129, the front side wall surface B2206 of the projector cover B1, the lower wall surface B2108a and the right wall surface B2108d of the duct cover B2100 are shown by diagonal lines, and the opening wall surface B2208 of the projector cover B1 is shown by shading. The opening wall surface B2209 of the cover B1 is shown in black.

From the above, the space P (see FIG. 128) is formed by the projector cover B1 and the duct cover B2100 (cover portion B2000). The space P includes a left inner wall surface B2101a, an upper right inner wall surface B2202a, a lower right inner wall surface B2202b, a lower side wall surface B2203, a rear side wall surface B2204, an inclined wall surface B2205, a front side wall surface B2206, an upper wall surface B2207, and an opening wall surface B2208 of the projector cover B1. , And the opening wall surface B2209, the left inner wall surface B2101a of the duct cover B2100, the upper right wall surface B2102a, the right lower wall surface B2103a, the inner surface of the front lower side wall portion B2104 (front lower side wall surface B2104a), and the front upper side wall portion B2205. Inner surface (front upper wall surface B2205a), inner surface of inclined wall portion B2106 (inclined wall surface B2106a), inner surface of inclined wall portion B2107 (inclined wall surface B2107a), wall surfaces B2108a to d constituting the opening B2108, and lower It is surrounded by a side wall surface B2109a.

A part of the space P in front of the space P is connected to the external space of the cover portion B2000 via the opening B2108e. The opening B2108e is a portion surrounded by the front end edges of the wall surfaces B2108a to B2108 constituting the opening B2108. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 130, the front edge of each wall surface B2108a to d is shown in black.

Further, a part of the right side portion of the space P is connected to the external space of the cover portion B2000 via the opening B2010. The opening B2010 has a shape similar to the figure composed of the sides a to f shown in FIG. 130. The side a corresponds to the lower end edge of the upper right inner wall surface B2202a of the projector cover B1 (the upper side of the four sides forming the trapezoid shown in the shaded area in FIG. 125). The side b corresponds to the right end edge of the rear side wall surface B2204 of the projector cover B1 (the rear side of the four sides forming the trapezoid shown in the shaded area in FIG. 125). The side c corresponds to the upper end edge of the lower right inner wall surface B2202b of the projector cover B1 (the lower side of the four sides forming the trapezoid shown in the shaded area in FIG. 125). The side d corresponds to the upper end edge of the lower right wall surface B2103a of the duct cover B2100. The side e corresponds to the right end edge of the front lower side wall surface B2104a in the duct cover B2100. The side f corresponds to the lower end edge of the upper right wall surface B2102a of the duct cover B2100.

Then, in the external space of the cover portion B2000, the intake port B22A (see FIG. 22) of the case B22 is arranged in the vicinity of the opening B2010. As a result, air is taken into the cabinet G from the outside of the game machine 1 through an opening (not shown) formed in the cabinet G or the upper wall of the front door. This air is taken into the inside of the cover portion B2000 through the opening B2108e of the duct cover B2100. The air that has entered the inside of the cover portion B2000 moves rearward and downward through the space P, passes through the opening B2010, and enters the inside of the case B22 through the intake port B22A. The air that has entered the inside of the case B22 travels to the right while taking away the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E. The air exiting the case B22 is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 through an opening formed in the cabinet G or the upper wall of the front door.

In this way, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be discharged to the outside of the game machine 1. In the second embodiment, it has been described that the intake port B22A is provided on the right side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side of the case B22 (see FIGS. 22 and 23). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the intake port B22A is provided on the left side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E is provided on the right side of the case B22 (see FIG. 138).

In addition, in order to facilitate the formation of the above-mentioned air flow, an intake fan or an exhaust fan may be appropriately arranged. For example, a fan similar to the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening (see FIG. 33) may be installed in the opening B2108 of the duct cover B2100. Further, by arranging the same member as the duct cover B600 (see FIG. 35) in the space P, the space P may be divided into an air passage space (space P1) and a liquid storage space (space P2).

<Duct adapter B2500>
FIG. 131 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cover portion and the case are connected via a duct adapter. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the duct adapter as viewed from the front left. FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the duct adapter as viewed from the rear right. FIG. 134 is a left side view of a cross section of the left side portion of the duct adapter. FIG. 135 is a right side view of a cross section on the right side of the duct adapter. FIG. 136 is a front view of the duct adapter. FIG. 137 is a left side view of the duct adapter cut near the center of the connecting portion.

As shown in FIG. 131, the duct adapter B2500 is arranged between the cover portion B2000 and the case B22. For clarity, the duct adapter B2500 is shaded in FIG. 131.

As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the duct adapter B2500 includes a left side portion B2510, a right side portion B2520, and a connecting portion B2530, and has a structure in which the left side portion B2510 and the right side portion B2520 are connected by the connecting portion B2530. ing.

The left side portion B2510 has a flat plate-shaped left main body portion B2511 and an upper left side portion B2512 formed by bending the upper portion of the main body portion B2511 diagonally to the right. The left main body portion B2511 is formed with a left opening B2513 penetrating in the left-right direction. The right side portion B2520 has a flat plate-shaped right main body portion B2521, and the right main body portion B2521 is formed with a right opening B2522 penetrating in the left-right direction.

Further, the left side portion B2510 has a flat left side surface B2510a and a right side surface B2510b. In FIG. 132, the front edge B2510c of the left side portion B2510 is shown by an oblique line. In FIG. 133, the rear end edge B2510d of the left side portion B2510 is shown by diagonal lines, and the right end edge B2512a is shown in black.

In FIG. 134, the left opening B2513 is shaded. The left opening B2513 has a rectangular shape with slightly rounded corners. In FIG. 135, the right opening B2522 is shaded. The right opening B2522 has a rectangular shape with slightly rounded corners. The shape of the right opening B2522 is generally similar to the shape of the left opening B2513, but the right opening B2522 is slightly smaller than the left opening B2513.

The lower end edge of the left side portion B2510 has a structure slightly protruding downward. As a result, a downward projecting portion B2511a is formed on the left main body portion B2511. For the sake of clarity, the downward protrusion B2511a is shaded in FIG. 134.

A cavity B2531 (see FIG. 139) is formed inside the connecting portion B2530, and the cavity B2531 communicates with the left opening B2513 and the right opening B2522. The connecting portion B2530 includes a connecting upper portion B2532 that defines the upper end of the cavity B2531, a connecting lower portion B2533 that defines the lower end of the cavity B2531, a connecting front side portion B2534 that defines the front end of the cavity B2531, and a rear end of the cavity B2531. It has a connecting rear side portion B2535, which defines the above. The connecting upper side portion B2532, the connecting lower side portion B2533, the connecting front side portion B2534, and the connecting rear side portion B2535 form a cylindrical shape with the left and right sides open.

As shown in FIG. 136, the upper and lower portions of the connecting portion B2530 have a recessed shape. Specifically, the vicinity of the center (point A) in the left-right direction in the upper part of the connection front side portion B2534 is lower than the contact B between the connection front side portion B2534 and the left side portion B2510 and the contact point C between the connection front side portion B2534 and the right side portion B2520. It is positioned in. Further, the vicinity of the center (point D) in the left-right direction in the lower part of the connection front side portion B2534 is positioned above the contact point E between the connection front side portion B2534 and the left side portion B2510 and the contact point F between the connection front side portion B2534 and the right side portion B2520. Has been done.

That is, the connection upper portion B2532 has an inclination that goes downward from the connection portion with the left side portion B2510 toward the center, and has an inclination that goes downward from the connection portion with the right side portion B2520 toward the center. There is. Further, the lower connecting portion B2533 has an inclination that goes upward from the connecting portion with the left side portion B2510 toward the center, and also has an inclination that goes upward from the connecting portion with the right side portion B2520 toward the vicinity of the center. ing.

Similarly, the connecting front side portion B2534 has an inclination toward the rear from the connecting portion with the left side portion B2510 toward the center, and has an inclination toward the rear from the connecting portion with the right side portion B2520 toward the center. ing. Further, the connecting rear side portion B2535 has an inclination toward the front from the connecting portion with the left side portion B2510 toward the center, and has an inclination toward the front from the connecting portion with the right side portion B2520 toward the center. ing.

As a result, the connecting upper side portion B2532, the connecting lower side portion B2533, the connecting front side portion B2534, and the connecting rear side portion B2535 are inclined toward the left side portion B2510 and the right side portion B2520, respectively, with the vicinity of the center as a boundary. The surface is formed so as to form an angle of less than 180 ° (for example, about 120 ° to 175 ° or about 150 ° to 170 °).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 137, when the duct adapter B2500 is cut near the center in the left-right direction of the connecting portion B2530, the opening corresponding to the cross section (cross-section opening B2536) is smaller than the left side opening B2513. .. Specifically, the cross-sectional opening B2536 has a rectangular shape, and both the vertical side (long side) and the front-back side (short side) are shorter than the left side opening B2513. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 137, the cross-sectional opening B2536 is shown by diagonal lines, and the inner side surfaces of the connection upper side portion B2532, the connection lower side portion B2533, the connection front side portion B2534, and the connection rear side portion B2535 are shown in black. There is.

Further, the thickness of the connecting portion B2530 (connecting upper portion B2532, connecting lower side portion B2533, connecting front side portion B2534, and connecting rear side portion B2535) is the thickness of the left side portion B2510 (left main body portion B2511 and upper left side portion B2512) and the right side. It is smaller than the thickness of the portion B2520 (right main body portion B2521). Specifically, the thickness of the left side portion B2510 and the right side portion B2520 is about 3 to 5 mm (for example, 4 mm), while the thickness of the connecting portion B2530 is about 0.5 to 1.2 mm (for example, 0.7). ~ 1.0 mm). The left side portion B2510, the right side portion B2520, and the connecting portion B2530 are formed to have a uniform thickness as a whole.

The duct adapter B2500 configured as described above is composed of an elastic member (rubber). As a result, the duct adapter B2500 can be flexibly deformed (has elasticity) when a force is applied from the right side or the left side, and has a repulsive force to return to the original shape. As a material of the duct adapter B2500, synthetic rubber such as urethane rubber (polyurethane) or silicon rubber can be appropriately adopted. The members (projector cover B1, duct cover B2100, and case B22) connected to the duct adapter B2500 are made of a material different from rubber (for example, a thermoplastic resin such as ABS resin). Flexible deformation like the duct adapter B2500 is impossible.

<Locking the duct adapter B2500 to the case B22>
FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the case. FIG. 139 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the duct adapter around the right side portion. FIG. 140 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the duct adapter around the first right-side protrusion and the second right-side protrusion. FIG. 141 is a partially enlarged front view of the right side protrusion shown in FIG. 140.

As shown in FIG. 138, an intake port B22A is formed on the left side surface B22X of the case B22. The intake port B22A is composed of a large number of slits B2022. Each slit B2022 is formed in a rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating the left side surface B22X of the case B22 in the left-right direction. Note that FIG. 138 shows the inside of the case B22 in a see-through state.

As shown in FIG. 139, the right side portion B2520 of the duct adapter B2500 is formed with three right side protrusions B2523 (first right side protrusion B2523a, second right side protrusion B2523b, and third right side protrusion B2523c). ing. These right-side projecting portions B2523 are formed as protrusions that project toward the right side from the right-side main surface B2524 formed around the right-side opening B2522.

The first right-side protrusion B2523a and the second right-side protrusion B2523b are formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction slightly above the upper edge of the right-side opening B2522, respectively. The third right-side protruding portion B2523c is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction slightly below the lower edge of the right-side opening B2522. In FIG. 139, for convenience, the direction along the long side of the right opening B2522 is shown as the vertical direction, and the direction along the short side of the right opening B2522 is shown as the front-back direction.

The first right-side protrusion B2523a, the second right-side protrusion B2523b, and the third right-side protrusion B2523c each have a rectangular parallelepiped shape with rounded apex portions. Further, the protruding directions of the first right protruding portion B2523a, the second right protruding portion B2523b, and the third right protruding portion B2523c are substantially perpendicular to the right main surface B2524, respectively.

In the state where the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the case B22 (the state in which the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the right main surface B2524 of the duct adapter B2500 and the left side surface B22X of the case B22 are substantially in contact with each other. The extending directions of the first right-side protruding portion B2523a, the second right-side protruding portion B2523b, and the third right-side protruding portion B2523c are substantially parallel to the long side direction of the rectangular slit B2022 formed in the case B22. The size and shape of the first right-side protrusion B2523a, the second right-side protrusion B2523b, and the third right-side protrusion B2523c are substantially the same as the size and shape of the slit B2022 (the slit B2022 can be press-fitted). It has a size and shape of about).

As a result, the first right-side protrusion B2523a, the second right-side protrusion B2523b, and the third right-side protrusion B2523c are each inserted into the case B22 via the slit B2022. In FIG. 138, the slit B2022 into which the first right-side protrusion B2523a, the second right-side protrusion B2523b, and the third right-side protrusion B2523c are inserted is shown as slit B2022a, slit B2022b, and slit B2022c, respectively. ..

As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the right-side projecting portion B2523 has a projecting upper surface B2523d and a projecting lower surface B2523e projecting from the right main surface B2524 toward the right side. The protruding upper surface B2523d and the protruding lower surface B2523e are formed in a direction perpendicular to the right main surface B2524, respectively, and form the upper surface and the lower surface of the right side projecting portion B2523. Since the first right-side protrusion B2523a, the second right-side protrusion B2523b, and the third right-side protrusion B2523c each have substantially the same structure, they are not distinguished here and are right-side protrusions. This will be described as part B2523.

On the protruding upper surface B2523d, an upper raised portion B2523f is formed near the center in the protruding direction of the right protruding portion B2523. The upper raised portion B2523f has a raised shape with respect to the flat protruding upper surface B2523d. Similarly, on the protruding lower surface B2523e, a lower raised portion B2523g is formed near the center of the right protruding portion B2523 in the protruding direction. The lower raised portion B2523g has a raised shape with respect to the flat protruding lower surface B2523e. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 141, the upper raised portion B2523f and the lower raised portion B2523g are shown by diagonal lines.

The distance between the protruding upper surface B2523d and the protruding lower surface B2523e is substantially the same as the short side of the slit B2022 formed in the case B22. Therefore, when the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the case B22 (the right protruding portion B2523 is inserted into the slit B2022) and a force is applied in the direction of removing the right protruding portion B2523 from the slit B2022, the upper raised portion B2523f And the lower raised portion B2523g is locked by the peripheral edge portion of the slit B2022. As a result, the connected state of the duct adapter B2500 and the case B22 is maintained, and the duct adapter B2500 is hard to come off from the case B22.

As shown in FIG. 139, the third right side protrusion B2523c is formed at a position symmetrical to the second right side protrusion B2523b with respect to the right side opening B2522, whereas the first right side protrusion B2522 is below the right side opening B2522. No protrusion (right side protrusion B2523) is formed at a position symmetrical to the right side protrusion B2523a. Therefore, the right side protrusion B2523 is not inserted into the slit B2022d (see FIG. 138) formed in the case B22. As a result, it is possible to secure a space in the vicinity of the slit B2022d inside the case B22, and the wiring can be efficiently arranged inside the case B22 using the space.

<Locking the duct adapter B2500 to the cover B2000>
FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the duct cover as viewed from the rear. FIG. 143 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the state in which the duct adapter is connected to the duct cover as viewed from a direction perpendicular to the front lower side wall surface of the duct cover. FIG. 144 is a cross-sectional view of the duct cover and the duct adapter in the state shown in FIG. 143. FIG. 145 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover around the adapter engaging groove. FIG. 146 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover around the first protrusion. FIG. 147 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover around the second to fifth protrusions. FIG. 148 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the duct adapter is connected to the projector cover. FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view of the projector cover and the duct adapter in the state shown in FIG. 148.

As shown in FIG. 142, a right side standing portion B2031 and a left side standing portion B2032 are formed on the front lower side wall surface B2104a (see FIG. 127) of the duct cover B2100. The right side standing portion B2031 and the left side standing portion B2032 are erected in a direction perpendicular to the front lower side wall surface B2104a. The left side wall portion B2101 is also erected with respect to the front lower side wall surface B2104a, but the height (protruding length) of the right side standing portion B2031 and the left side standing portion B2032 with respect to the front lower side wall surface B2104a is the left wall portion B2101. Is lower than.

The right side standing portion B2031 extends in a direction substantially parallel to the right end edge (side e shown in FIG. 130) of the front lower side wall surface B2104a. The left standing portion B2032 is a left standing main body portion B2032a extending in a direction substantially parallel to the right standing portion B2031 and a left standing bending portion extending from the end of the left standing main body portion B2032a. It has B2032b and. Of the ends of the left standing main body B2032a, the end opposite to the connecting portion with the left standing bent B2032b is continuous with the lower side wall surface B2109a (see FIG. 127). Of the ends of the left standing bent portion B2032b, the end on the side opposite to the connecting portion with the left standing main body portion B2032a is continuous with the upper right wall surface B2102a (see FIG. 128).

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, in the state where the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the duct cover B2100 (the state in which the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the right side standing portion B2031. It is arranged between the left side standing portion B2032.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 143, the left side portion B2510 is shown by diagonal lines, and the right side standing portion B2031 and the left side standing portion B2032 are shown in black. FIG. 144 shows a state in which the right side standing portion B2031 and the left side standing main body portion B2032a are cut on a plane perpendicular to the front lower side wall surface B2104a and perpendicular to the extending direction of the right side standing portion B2031 and the left standing main body portion B2032a. In addition to being shown by diagonal lines, the cut surface of the duct adapter B2500 is shown in black.

Specifically, the left side surface B2510a (see FIG. 132) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially abuts on the right side wall surface of the left side standing main body portion B2032a of the duct cover B2100. Further, the right side surface B2510b (see FIG. 133) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially comes into contact with the left side wall surface of the right side standing portion B2031 of the duct cover B2100. Further, the front end edge B2510c (see FIG. 132) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 is substantially in contact with a part of the front lower side wall surface B2104a (between the right side standing portion B2031 and the left side standing portion B2032) of the duct cover B2100. Contact.

Here, the distance between the left side surface B2510a and the right side surface B2510b of the duct adapter B2500 (thickness of the left main body portion B2511) is the distance between the left side standing main body portion B2032a and the right side standing portion B2031 of the duct cover B2100 (left side standing). The distance between the right side wall surface of the main body portion B2032a and the left side wall surface of the right side standing portion B2031) is substantially the same. That is, the thickness of the left main body B2511 is slightly shorter than the distance between the right wall of the left standing main body B2032a and the left wall of the right standing B2031, and the difference is 1 / of the thickness of the left main body B2511. It is 5 or less (or 1/10 or less, 1/20 or less, etc.).

As a result, when the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the duct cover B2100 and a force is applied in the right direction or the left direction, the left main body portion B2511 is locked by the right side standing portion B2031 or the left side standing main body portion B2032a. Ru. As a result, the connected state of the duct adapter B2500 and the duct cover B2100 is maintained, and the duct adapter B2500 is hard to come off from the duct cover B2100.

As shown in FIG. 143, the degree of bending of the left standing bent portion B2032b with respect to the left standing main body portion B2032a is substantially the same as the degree of bending of the upper left side portion B2512 with respect to the left main body portion B2511 in the duct adapter B2500. ing. As a result, the upper left side portion B2512 and the left side vertical bending portion B2032b are arranged so as to be substantially in contact with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, the projector cover B1 is formed with an adapter engaging groove B2040. The adapter engaging groove B2040 is formed so as to straddle the lower side wall surface B2203, the rear side wall surface B2204, and the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. For clarity, the adapter engaging groove B2040 is shaded in FIG. 145.

The adapter engaging groove B2040 is formed as a recess recessed from the peripheral surface, and is composed of a groove bottom portion B2040a and an outer wall surface B2040b and an inner wall surface B2040c connecting the groove bottom portion B2040a and the peripheral surface. .. The outer wall surface B2040b and the inner wall surface B2040c are formed so as to be substantially parallel to each other. For clarity, the outer wall surface B2040b and the inner wall surface B2040c are shaded in FIGS. 146 and 147.

On the edge of the adapter engaging groove B2040, the first protrusion B2041 (first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b), the second protrusion B2042 (second outer protrusion B2042a and second inner protrusion B2042b), and third protrusion B2043 (Third outer protrusion B2043a and third inner protrusion B2043b), fourth outer protrusion B2044 (fourth outer protrusion B2044a and fourth inner protrusion B2044b), and fifth outer protrusion B2045 (fifth outer protrusion B2045a and fifth inner protrusion B2045a). The protrusion B2045b) is formed.

The first outer protrusion B2041a, the second outer protrusion B2042a, the third outer protrusion B2043a, the fourth outer protrusion B2044a, and the fifth outer protrusion B2045a are continuous with a part of the outer wall surface B2040b, so that the adapter engaging groove B2040 It is formed as a protrusion that protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the surrounding surface of the. On the other hand, the first inner protrusion B2041b, the second inner protrusion B2042b, the third inner protrusion B2043b, the fourth inner protrusion B2044b, and the fifth inner protrusion B2045b are for adapter engagement so as to be continuous with a part of the inner wall surface B2040c. It is formed as a protrusion protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface around the groove B2040.

As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, in the state where the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the projector cover B1 (the state where the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the adapter engaging groove B2040. Placed along. In FIG. 149, the left side surface B2510a and the right side surface B2510b of the left side portion B2510 are cut at a surface parallel to the right side surface B2510b (the surface passing through the connecting portion B2530), and the right side surface B2510b is shown by diagonal lines for easy understanding.

Specifically, the left side surface B2510a (see FIG. 132) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially comes into contact with the outer wall surface B2040b of the projector cover B1. Further, the right side surface B2510b (see FIG. 133) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially comes into contact with the inner wall surface B2040c of the projector cover B1. Further, the rear end edge B2510d (see FIG. 133) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially comes into contact with the groove bottom portion B2040a formed on the rear side wall surface B2204 of the projector cover B1.

Further, the downward projecting portion B2511a (see FIG. 134) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially comes into contact with the groove bottom portion B2040a formed on the lower side wall surface B2203 of the projector cover B1. Further, the right end edge B2512a (see FIG. 133) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially comes into contact with the groove bottom portion B2040a formed on the upper right inner wall surface B2202a of the projector cover B1.

The adapter engaging groove B2040 has a bent shape from the rear side wall surface B2204 to the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. The degree of bending of the duct adapter B2500 is substantially the same as the degree of bending of the upper left side portion B2512 with respect to the left main body portion B2511. As a result, the entire left side portion B2510 (rear end edge B2510d) of the duct adapter B2500 can be fitted into the adapter engaging groove B2040.

Here, the distance between the left side surface B2510a and the right side surface B2510b of the duct adapter B2500 (thickness of the left side portion B2510) is the distance between the outer wall surface B2040b and the inner wall surface B2040c of the projector cover B1 (width of the adapter engaging groove B2040). It is almost the same. That is, the thickness of the left side portion B2510 is slightly shorter than the width of the adapter engaging groove B2040, and the difference is 1/5 or less (or 1/10 or less, 1/20 or less, etc.) of the thickness of the left side portion B2510. It has become.

As a result, when the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the projector cover B1 and a force is applied to the left or right, the left side portion B2510 is locked by the outer wall surface B2040b or the inner wall surface B2040c. As a result, the connected state of the duct adapter B2500 and the projector cover B1 is maintained, and the duct adapter B2500 is hard to come off from the projector cover B1.

Further, since the first protrusion B2041, the second protrusion B2042, the third protrusion B2043, the fourth outer protrusion B2044, and the fifth outer protrusion B2045 are formed on the edge of the adapter engagement groove B2040, the duct adapter B2500 The state in which the left side portion B2510 of the above is fitted in the adapter engaging groove B2040 is easily maintained.

Further, although not clear from the figure, the portion of the outer wall surface B2040b that is integrated with the second outer protrusion B2042a, the third outer protrusion B2043a, and the fourth outer protrusion B2044a is compared with the other parts. As a result, it has a slightly raised shape (protruding toward the inner wall surface B2040c side). Similarly, of the inner wall surface B2040c, the portion integrated with each of the second inner protrusion B2042b, the third inner protrusion B2043b, and the fourth inner protrusion B2044b is slightly raised as compared with the other parts. (Like protruding toward the outer wall surface B2040b side). This makes it easier for the duct adapter B2500 to be locked by these protrusions.

A downward protrusion B2511a (see FIG. 134) is formed on the lower end edge of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500, whereby the lower end edge is formed so as to have a step. Similarly, the right end edge B2512a (see FIG. 134) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 is also formed so as to have a step (see FIG. 132). These stepped portions are the connection portion between the lower side wall surface B2203 of the projector cover B1 and the lower side wall surface B2109a of the duct cover B2100, and the upper right inner wall surface B2202a of the projector cover B1 and the upper right wall surface B2102a of the duct cover B2100, respectively. It is positioned at the connection part. As a result, the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 can be easily fitted to these connecting portions.

<Punching B450>
FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view in a state where punching is attached to the duct cover. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and punching as viewed from the front. FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and punching as viewed from the rear. FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and punching as viewed from below.

As shown in FIG. 150, a punching B450 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) is arranged in the opening B2108 of the duct cover B2100. In FIG. 150, in order to make it easy to understand that the punching B450 is attached, the opening B2108 is cut in a horizontal plane (the surface passing through the screw hole B2110), and the upper surface of the punching B450 is shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 151, a right protruding portion B2121 is formed on the right wall surface B2108d of the opening B2108. The right-side protruding portion B2121 protrudes from the right wall surface B2108d toward the inside (left side) of the opening B2108, and extends in the front-rear direction (direction substantially parallel to the lower wall surface B2108a). The right protruding portion B2121 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the apex portion is rounded. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 151, the left side surface of the right side protrusion B2121 is shown by diagonal lines.

The right side protrusion B2121 is formed slightly above the lower wall surface B2108a, and there is a certain distance between the right side protrusion B2121 and the lower wall surface B2108a. A right-side protrusion B2122 is formed between the right-side protrusion B2121 and the lower wall surface B2108a. The right projection B2122 projects from the right wall surface B2108d toward the inside (left side) of the opening B2108. The length from the right wall surface B2108d to the left end of the right side protrusion B2122 (the protruding length of the right side protrusion B2122 to the left side with respect to the right wall surface B2108d) is the length from the right wall surface B2108d to the left end of the right side protrusion B2121 ( It is shorter than the right protruding portion B2121 to the left) when the right wall surface B2108d is used as a reference.

The upper end of the right side protrusion B2122 is continuous with the lower surface of the right side protrusion B2121, and the lower end of the right side protrusion B2122 is continuous with the lower wall surface B2108a. Further, the front end of the right side protruding portion B2108f is continuous with the front end edge (see FIG. 130) of the right wall surface B2108d.

As shown in FIG. 152, a left front protrusion B2123 is formed on the left wall surface B2108b of the opening B2108. The left front protrusion B2123 protrudes from the left wall surface B2108b toward the inside of the opening B2108 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 152) and extends in the front-rear direction (direction substantially parallel to the lower wall surface B2108a). ing. The left front protrusion B2123 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a rounded apex.

The left front protrusion B2123 is formed slightly above the lower wall surface B2108a, and there is a certain distance between the left front protrusion B2123 and the lower wall surface B2108a. A left side protrusion B2124 is formed between the left side front protrusion B2123 and the lower wall surface B2108a. The left protrusion B2124 protrudes from the left wall surface B2108b toward the inside of the opening B2108 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 152). The length from the left wall surface B2108b to the right end of the left side protrusion B2124 (the protrusion length of the left side protrusion B2124 to the right side with respect to the left wall surface B2108b) is the length from the left wall surface B2108b to the right end of the left front protrusion B2123. It is shorter than (the protruding length of the left front protruding portion B2123 to the right when the left wall surface B2108b is used as a reference).

The upper end of the left side protrusion B2124 is continuous with the lower surface of the left front protrusion B2123, and the lower end of the left side protrusion B2124 is continuous with the lower wall surface B2108a. Further, the front end of the left front protrusion B2123 is continuous with the front end edge (see FIG. 130) of the left wall surface B2108b.

The length of the left front protrusion B2123 in the front-rear direction is shorter than the length of the right-side protrusion B2121 in the front-rear direction. The shape and formation position of the left side protrusion B2124 are symmetrical with the shape and formation position of the right side protrusion B2122. The shape of the right side protrusion B2122 and the shape of the left side protrusion B2124 are arch-shaped (the arc and the ends of the arc are connected to each other) in a plan view, similarly to the upper raised portion B2523f and the lower raised portion B2523g (see FIG. 141). It has a shape (a figure surrounded by a string) (see FIG. 153). FIG. 153 shows a state in which the opening B2108 is cut in a horizontal plane passing through the right side protrusion B2122 and the left side protrusion B2124, and the right side protrusion B2121 and the left side front protrusion B2123 are shown by diagonal lines.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152, a left rear protruding portion B2125 is formed on the left wall surface B2108b of the opening B2108. The left rear protruding portion B2125 protrudes from the left wall surface B2108b toward the inside of the opening B2108 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 152) and extends in the front-rear direction (direction substantially parallel to the lower wall surface B2108a). ing. The left rear protruding portion B2125 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a rounded apex. The upper surface of the left rear protrusion B2125 is integrated with the lower wall surface B2108a.

The length from the left wall surface B2108b to the right end of the left rear protrusion B2125 (the length of the left rear protrusion B2125 to the right when the left wall surface B2108b is used as a reference) is the right end of the left front protrusion B2123 from the left wall surface B2108b. (The length of protrusion to the right of the left front protrusion B2123 when the left wall surface B2108b is used as a reference) is substantially the same.

The front end of the left rear protrusion B2125 is positioned slightly rearward of the rear end of the left front protrusion B2123. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 152, the right side surface of the left front protrusion B2123 and the right side of the left rear protrusion B2125 are shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 150, the punching B450 has a shape in which the front portion of a rectangular flat plate is cut out, and a large number of through holes B451 are formed. As a result, the punching B450 can prevent foreign matter from entering the inner side of the space P while securing an air passage inside the space P (see FIG. 128). .. In FIG. 150, the lower wall surface B2108a is exposed corresponding to the notch shape in the front portion of the punching B450.

The thickness of the punching B450 is slightly thinner than the distance between the lower surface of the right side protruding portion B2121 and the lower wall surface B2108a and the distance between the lower surface of the left side front protruding portion B2123 and the lower wall surface B2108a. As a result, the right side portion of the punching B450 is arranged between the lower surface of the right side protrusion B2121 and the lower wall surface B2108a, and the left side portion thereof is arranged between the lower surface of the left side front protrusion B2123 and the lower wall surface B2108a. .. The lower surface of the punching B450 is in contact with the lower wall surface B2108a, and the upper surface of the punching B450 is also substantially in contact with the lower surface of the right side protrusion B2121 and the lower surface of the left front protrusion B2123.

Further, the length in the left-right direction of the punching B450 is slightly shorter than the distance between the right wall surface B2108d and the left wall surface B2108b, and is substantially the same as the distance between the left end of the right side protrusion B2122 and the right end of the left side protrusion B2124. As a result, the right edge of the punching B450 substantially contacts the left end of the right projection B2122, and the left edge of the punching B450 substantially contacts the right end of the left projection B2124.

From the above, the punching B450 can be slid forward in a state of being arranged between the lower wall surface B2108a and the right side protrusion B2121 and the left side front protrusion B2123. Then, while the punching B450 is moved forward, foreign matter and the like adhering to the punching B450 can be removed (cleaned).

Here, a slide locking protrusion B452 that protrudes upward is formed at the left rear corner portion of the punching B450. The length from the upper surface of the punching B450 to the upper end of the slide locking protrusion B452 (the upward protrusion length of the slide locking protrusion B452 when the upper surface of the punching B450 is used as a reference) is the upper and lower sides of the left front protrusion B2123. It is longer than the length in the direction. As a result, the upper end of the slide locking protrusion B452 is positioned above the upper surface of the left front protrusion B2123 in a state where the punching B450 is arranged in the opening B2108.

Therefore, when the punching B450 is slid forward, the front surface of the slide locking protrusion B452 comes into contact with the rear end of the left front protrusion B2123. As a result, the slide locking projection B452 is locked by the left front protrusion B2123, and the punching B450 is restricted from moving further forward. This makes it possible to prevent the punching B450 from coming out of the opening B2108.

Since the front ends of the right side portion and the left side portion of the punching B450 are arranged so as to protrude forward from the front end edge of the lower wall surface B2108a (see FIG. 150), the punching B450 is arranged by pulling these protruding portions. It is easy to slide. Further, as described above, since the right side protrusion B2122 and the left side protrusion B2124 have an arcuate shape and the tip thereof has a rounded shape, the punching B450 can be smoothly slid.

Further, as shown in FIG. 153, the punching B450 is formed with notches B453 at one position on each side. The notch B453 fits with the right side protrusion B2122 and the left side protrusion B2124 with the punching B450 arranged in the opening B2108. As a result, the punching B450 can be stably attached to the opening B2108. Further, although the left rear portion of the lower wall surface B2108a has a notched shape (see FIG. 127), the punching B450 is placed on the left rear protrusion B2125, so that the punching B450 is more stable. Can be placed.

Although the punching B450 has been described above as being attached to the opening B2108, the punching B450 can be arranged at an arbitrary portion in the game machine 1 where foreign matter is likely to enter. For example, a mesh-like portion (a structure for emitting sound generated from the speaker to the outside of the game machine, for example, speaker holes 6151A and 6151B shown in FIG. 49) may be formed by punching B450.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix A>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

In a game machine equipped with such a projector, it is important that the projector is arranged at an appropriate position. That is, if the projector is not arranged at an appropriate position, there will be a gap between the image projected by the projector and the projection surface such as a screen, and in such a case, the production content may be uncomfortable. turn into.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of arranging a projector at an appropriate position.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(A-1) With the projector (projector device B2),
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector and
A connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the accommodating portion is provided.
The projector and the accommodating portion are connected via the connecting member.
The accommodating portion is provided with a protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) that projects inward of the accommodating portion, while the connecting member has the projector with respect to the connecting member. A hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) into which the protrusion can be inserted is formed from the side opposite to the side where the protrusion is arranged (back side).
The connecting member is fixed to the accommodating portion in a state of being hooked on the protruding portion inserted into the hole.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) has a protruding portion (irradiation unit) protruding inward of the accommodating portion (cabinet G). While the hooking screw 5000) is provided, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is provided with the connecting member (projector cover). A hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) into which a protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) can be inserted from the side (rear side) opposite to the side where the projector (projector device B2) is arranged with respect to the plate B1000). ) Is formed. Then, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) is hooked on the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) inserted in the hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010), and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is hooked. ) Is fixed. Therefore, the projector (projector device B2) can be appropriately adjusted by hooking the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) on the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) to align the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000). Can be placed in any position.

(A-2) With the projector (projector device B2),
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector and
A connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the accommodating portion is provided.
The projector and the accommodating portion are connected via the connecting member.
The accommodating portion is provided with a projecting portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) that projects toward the inside of the accommodating portion, while the connecting member penetrates from one side to the other side. A through hole (screw hole B1010 for hooking the irradiation unit) is formed.
The through hole includes a first region (lower side portion B1010b) and a second region (upper side portion B1010a) formed continuously with the first region.
When viewed from the front with respect to the forming direction of the through hole, the first region is larger than the protrusion and the second region is smaller than the protrusion.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) has a protruding portion (irradiation unit) protruding inward of the accommodating portion (cabinet G). The hooking screw 5000) is provided, while the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is provided from one side to the other side. A through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is formed. The through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is a second region (upper side) formed continuously with the first region (lower side portion B1010b) and the first region (lower side portion B1010b). When viewed from the front with respect to the forming direction of the through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) including the portion B1010a), the first region (lower side portion B1010b) is a protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw). It is larger than 5000), and the second region (upper portion B1010a) is smaller than the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000). Therefore, the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) can be inserted into the first region (lower side portion B1010b), and the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) is inserted into the protruding portion (irradiation) through the insertion. It can be engaged with the unit hooking screw 5000). By aligning the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) using such an engaged state, the projector (projector device B2) can be arranged at an appropriate position.

(A-3) With the projector (projector device B2),
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector and
A connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the accommodating portion is provided.
The projector is arranged in an inclined posture so that the predetermined direction side (front side) is higher.
The projector and the accommodating portion are connected via the connecting member.
The accommodating portion is provided with a projecting portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) that projects toward the inside of the accommodating portion, while the connecting member is formed with a recess that is recessed from the periphery. At the same time, a through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is formed by penetrating a part of the recess.
The protruding portion includes a protruding portion (washer portion 5004) that bulges around the protruding direction.
The bulging portion is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the non-penetrating portion (peripheral wall portion B1011) which is a portion of the recess where the through hole is not formed.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) has a protruding portion (irradiation unit) protruding inward of the accommodating portion (cabinet G). While the hooking screw 5000) is provided, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) has a recess recessed from the surroundings. Along with the formation, a through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is formed by penetrating a part of the recess. The protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) provided in the accommodating portion (cabinet G) includes a protruding portion (washer portion 5004) that bulges around the protruding direction. Here, the projector (projector device B2) is arranged in an inclined posture so that the predetermined direction side (front side) is higher, and the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) has a bulging portion (washer portion). The 5004) is a non-penetrating portion (peripheral wall portion B1011) which is a portion of the recess formed in the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) in which the through hole (screw hole B1010 for hooking the irradiation unit) is not formed. It is arranged on the predetermined direction side (front side). Therefore, even when a force for moving the non-penetrating portion (peripheral wall portion B1011) to the predetermined direction side (front side) is applied, the non-penetrating portion (peripheral wall portion B1011) is formed by the bulging portion (washer portion 5004). Due to being locked, the movement of the non-penetrating portion (peripheral wall portion B1011) can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the position of the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) from shifting with respect to the accommodating portion (cabinet G), and the projector (projector device B2) can be arranged at an appropriate position. it can.

(A-4) With the projector (projector device B2),
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism. B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector and
A connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the accommodating portion is provided.
The projector and the accommodating portion are connected via the connecting member.
The connecting member is fixed to the accommodating portion by a first screw (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) and a second screw (lid mounting screw 5100).
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. Ori,
A first screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) into which a part of the first screw can be inserted and a second screw into which a part of the second screw can be inserted into the connecting member. A screw insertion portion (screw hole B1002 for fastening the lid) is formed.
A third screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole 5010) into which a part of the first screw can be inserted is formed in the accommodating portion.
A fourth screw insertion portion (boss portion G100c) into which a part of the second screw can be inserted is formed in the closing member.
When the first screw insertion portion is engaged with the first screw partially inserted into the third screw insertion portion in a state where the connecting member is not attached to the accommodating portion, the first screw insertion portion is engaged. The two screw insertion portions and the fourth screw insertion portion are arranged so as to face each other.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) is used to adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mounting parts of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) from the outside. An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is attached. Further, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) includes a first screw (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) and a second screw (a second screw). It is fixed to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) by the lid mounting screw 5100). A first screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) into which a part of the first screw (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) can be inserted into the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000), and a second screw hole B1010. A second screw insertion portion (screw hole B1002 for fastening the lid) into which a part of the screw (screw 5100 for attaching the lid) can be inserted is formed, and the first screw (irradiation) is formed in the accommodating portion (cabinet G). A third screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole 5010) into which a part of the unit hooking screw 5000) can be inserted is formed, and a second screw (lid) is formed on the closing member (closing lid G100). A fourth screw insertion portion (boss portion G100c) into which a part of the mounting screw 5100) can be inserted is formed. Here, in a state where the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) is not attached to the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the first screw is partially inserted into the third screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole 5010). When the first screw insertion part (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is engaged with the screw (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000), the second screw insertion part (lid fastening screw hole B1002) and the fourth screw insertion part (Boss portion G100c) is arranged so as to face each other. In other words, a connecting member (projector cover) with respect to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) so that the second screw insertion portion (lid fastening screw hole B1002) and the fourth screw insertion portion (boss portion G100c) face each other. By arranging the plate B1000) and the closing member (closing lid G100), it is possible to align the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000), thereby making the projector (projector device B2) suitable. Can be placed in position. In addition, a screw (second screw (lid mounting screw 5100)) for fixing the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) and the closing member (closing lid G100) are accommodated. By also using the screws for fixing to the portion (cabinet G), the number of screws used around the accommodating portion (cabinet G) can be reduced, and a simple configuration can be obtained. ..

In the sixth embodiment, it has been described that the accommodating portion (back wall G3 of the cabinet G) and the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) are composed of separate members. In the present invention, the accommodating portion (back wall G3 of the cabinet G) and the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) may be integrally formed as one member. That is, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) itself may be configured to have a protruding structure protruding inward of the accommodating portion (cabinet G).

<Appendix B>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

However, conventionally, in a game machine equipped with such a projector, once the projector is fixed inside the game machine, it is difficult to make fine adjustments to the projector thereafter.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of making adjustments to a projector with the projector mounted inside.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(B-1) With the projector (projector device B2),
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism. B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector is provided.
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. Ori,
The closing member includes locking pieces (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b, upper locking piece G118a, and upper locking piece G118a) that can be locked to a part of the peripheral edge of the opening provided in the accommodating portion. The lower locking piece G118b) is formed.
The closing member is locked by the locking piece and fixed to the accommodating portion by a screw.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) is used to adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mounting parts of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) from the outside. An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is attached. Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) is made to appear. The adjustment portion (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221) is possible from the outside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). , The attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated. As a result, even after the projector (projector device B2) is fixed inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the projector (projector device B2) is accommodated while being mounted inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G). From the outside of the part (cabinet G) to the adjustment part (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the mounting part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, and the reflector holding part B11 of the mirror mechanism B3. The traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) can be adjusted by operating the mounting portion of the projector (projector device B2). Further, the closing member (closing lid G100) has a locking piece (upper locking) that can be locked to a part of the peripheral edge of the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) provided in the accommodating portion (cabinet G). A piece G108a and a lower locking piece G108b, and an upper locking piece G118a and a lower locking piece G118b) are formed, and the closing member (closing lid G100) is a locking piece (upper locking piece G108a). And the lower locking piece G108b, and the upper locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118b), and are fixed to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) by screws. Therefore, by locking the closing member (closing lid G100) to the accommodating portion (cabinet G), it is possible to fasten the screws in a temporarily fixed state, and accommodating the closing member (closing lid G100). It can be easily attached to the part (cabinet G).

(B-2) With the projector (projector device B2),
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism. B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector and
A connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the accommodating portion is provided.
The projector and the accommodating portion are connected via the connecting member.
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. Ori,
The closing member is provided with openings (first opening G102 and second opening G112), and protrusions (first engagement protrusion G101 and second engagement protrusion G101) projecting inward of the accommodating portion. G111) is provided, and the protruding portion is provided with an engaging portion (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b, and upper locking piece G118a and lower locking piece) that are engaged with the accommodating portion. G118b) is formed,
Storage recesses (first cavity B1050 and second cavity B1060) for accommodating the projecting portion are formed in the connecting member, and the projecting portion is arranged so as to be surrounded by the connecting member. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) is used to adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mounting parts of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) from the outside. An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is attached. Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) is made to appear. The adjustment portion (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221) is possible from the outside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). , The attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated. As a result, even after the projector (projector device B2) is fixed inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the projector (projector device B2) is accommodated while being mounted inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G). From the outside of the part (cabinet G) to the adjustment part (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the mounting part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, and the reflector holding part B11 of the mirror mechanism B3. The traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) can be adjusted by operating the mounting portion of the projector (projector device B2). Further, the closing member (closing lid G100) is provided with protruding portions (first engaging protruding portion G101 and second engaging protruding portion G111) protruding toward the inside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G). The portions (first engaging protrusion G101 and second engaging protrusion G111) include engaging portions (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b) that are engaged with the accommodating portion (cabinet G). , The upper locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118b) are formed. Therefore, by engaging the closing member (closing lid G100) with the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the closing member (closing lid G100) can be attached to the accommodating portion (cabinet G). Here, the closing member (closing lid G100) is provided with openings (first opening G102 and second opening G112), and the inside of the game machine is provided through the openings (first opening G102 and second opening G112). There is a concern that various devices existing in the game may be illegally accessed (the game medium is illegally acquired by the so-called goto act). However, according to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) has a protruding portion (third). Storage recesses (first cavity B1050 and second cavity B1060) for accommodating the first engagement protrusion G101 and the second engagement protrusion G111) are formed, and the protrusions (first engagement protrusion G101 and second) are formed. The engaging protrusion G111) is arranged so as to be surrounded by the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000). As a result, even if an attempt is made to intrude a wire-shaped instrument from the openings (first opening G102 and second opening G112) toward the inside of the game machine, the protrusions (first engagement protrusion G101 and The intrusion can be prevented by the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) surrounding the second engaging protrusion G111), and unauthorized access to the inside of the game machine can be prevented.

(B-3) With the projector (projector device B2),
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism. B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector and
A connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the accommodating portion is provided.
The projector and the accommodating portion are connected via the connecting member.
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. Ori,
The closing member is formed with an engaging portion (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b, and upper locking piece G118a and lower locking piece G118b) that are engaged with the accommodating portion. Ori,
The closing member is fixed to the accommodating portion by one screw (lid mounting screw 5100), and the connecting member is also fixed to the accommodating portion by the one screw.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) is used to adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mounting parts of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) from the outside. An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is attached. Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) is made to appear. The adjustment portion (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221) is possible from the outside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). , The attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated. As a result, even after the projector (projector device B2) is fixed inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the projector (projector device B2) is accommodated while being mounted inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G). From the outside of the part (cabinet G) to the adjustment part (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the mounting part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, and the reflector holding part B11 of the mirror mechanism B3. The traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) can be adjusted by operating the mounting portion of the projector (projector device B2). Further, the closing member (closing lid G100) is fixed to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) by one screw (lid mounting screw 5100), and the closing member (closing lid G100) has an accommodating portion. Engaging portions (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b, and upper locking piece G118a and lower locking piece G118b) that are engaged with (cabinet G) are formed. Therefore, by engaging the closing member (closing lid G100) with the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the screw can be fastened in a temporarily fixed state, and the closing member (closing lid G100) can be accommodated. It can be easily attached to the part (cabinet G). Further, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is also a screw (lid mounting screw 5100) (closing member (closing lid). G100) is fixed to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) by the same screw as the screw for fixing the accommodating portion (cabinet G). As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of screws used for fixing the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) and the closing member (closing lid G100) to the accommodating portion (cabinet G). It can be a simple configuration.

(B-4) With the projector (projector device B2),
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism. B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector is provided.
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) penetrating the inside and outside of the accommodating portion at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a recess (periphery) is provided around the opening. Part G10b) is formed, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is fitted in the recess.
The closing member is formed with protruding portions (upper protruding portion G121 and lower protruding portion G122) protruding inward of the accommodating portion along a part of the peripheral edge of the opening provided in the accommodating portion. Has been
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) is used to adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mounting parts of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) from the outside. An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is attached. Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) is made to appear. The adjustment portion (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221) is possible from the outside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). , The attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated. As a result, even after the projector (projector device B2) is fixed inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the projector (projector device B2) is accommodated while being mounted inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G). From the outside of the part (cabinet G) to the adjustment part (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the mounting part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, and the reflector holding part B11 of the mirror mechanism B3. The traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) can be adjusted by operating the mounting portion of the projector (projector device B2). Further, a recess (peripheral portion G10b) is formed around the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) provided in the accommodating portion (cabinet G), and the closing member (closing lid G100) is the recess. It is fitted to (peripheral portion G10b). Here, unauthorized access to various devices existing inside the game machine is performed through a slight gap generated between the recess (peripheral portion G10b) of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) and the closing member (closing lid G100). There is a concern that the game medium may be illegally acquired by the so-called goto act. However, according to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the closing member (closing lid G100) has one of the peripheral edges of the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) provided in the accommodating portion (cabinet G). Along the portion, projecting portions (upper projecting portion G121 and lower projecting portion G122) projecting toward the inside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) are formed. As a result, even if a wire-shaped instrument is attempted to enter the inside of the game machine through the gap, the protruding portion (upper protruding portion G121 and lower) formed on the closing member (closing lid G100) is formed. It is possible to prevent the intrusion by the side protrusion G122), and it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the game machine.

<Appendix C>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

However, since the projector tends to generate heat and become hot as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like, there is a problem that the projector does not function normally unless the generated heat is released.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of releasing heat generated by a projector.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(C-1) With the projector (projector device B2),
A first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having a first air passage space (space P) through which air can pass, and
A second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500) having a second air passage space (cavity B2531) through which air can pass is provided.
A first opening (opening B2108e) and a second opening (opening B2010) are formed in the first space forming portion, and the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other. 1 Air passage space is formed,
A third opening (left side opening B2513) and a fourth opening (right side opening B2522) are formed in the second space forming portion so as to communicate with the third opening and the fourth opening. The second air passage space is formed,
The first space forming portion and the projector are connected by the second space forming portion.
The first air passage space and the second air passage space communicate with each other through the second opening and the third opening.
The second space forming portion has elasticity.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, a first opening (opening B2108e) and a second opening (opening B2010) are formed in the first space forming portion (cover portion B2000), and the first opening (opening B2010) is formed. A first air passage space (space P) is formed so as to communicate with the first opening (opening B2108e) and the second opening (opening B2010). A third opening (left side opening B2513) and a fourth opening (right side opening B2522) are formed in the second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500), and a third opening (left side opening B2513) and a fourth opening are formed. A second air passage space (cavity B2531) is formed so as to communicate with the opening (right side opening B2522). The first air passage space (space P) and the second air passage space (cavity B2531) communicate with each other through a second opening (opening B2010) and a third opening (left opening B2513), and the projector (hollow) The projector device B2) is connected by a second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500). This makes it possible for the air that has passed through the first air passage space (space P) and the second air passage space (cavity B2531) to flow into the projector (projector device B2), and through the flow of the air, the projector ( The heat generated by the projector device B2) can be released. Further, even after the projector (projector device B2) is once connected to the second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500), the projector (projector) is used to adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). A situation is also assumed in which the position of the device B2) is finely adjusted. In this respect, since the second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500) has elasticity and is deformable, it is possible to flexibly cope with such position adjustment of the projector (projector device B2).

For example, by operating the adjustment unit (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, etc.), the projector (projector device B2) projects. When adjusting the traveling direction of the light, it is necessary to move the projector (projector device B2) within a range of about 5 mm. In this regard, if synthetic rubber such as urethane rubber is used as the material of the second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500), the second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500) can be located in the moving region of the projector (projector device B2). It can be flexibly deformed within a range, and the traveling direction of light can be smoothly adjusted without creating a gap due to the movement.

(C-2) With the projector (projector device B2),
A space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having an air passage space (space P) through which air can pass, and
With an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) having elasticity,
The elastic member is arranged between the space forming portion and the projector.
A first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522) are formed in the elastic member, and a space (cavity) is formed so as to communicate with the first opening and the second opening. B2531) is formed,
The air passage space communicates with the space formed in the elastic member.
The area of the opening (cross-section opening B2536) corresponding to the cross section when the elastic member is cut between the first opening and the second opening is the area of the first opening and the second opening. Smaller than the area of
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is arranged between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector (projector device B2), and the elastic member (duct). The adapter B2500) is formed with a first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522), and a first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522). A space (cavity B2531) is formed so as to communicate with. The space (cavity B2531) communicates with the air passage space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000). As a result, air that has passed through the space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the space (cavity B2531) formed in the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) flows into the projector (projector device B2). It is possible to release the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) through the flow of the air. Further, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) has elasticity and can be deformed according to the relative positional relationship between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector (projector device B2). Therefore, the work of arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector (projector device B2) can be smoothly performed. Further, when the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is cut between the first opening (left side opening B2513) and the second opening (right side opening B2522) (the portion near the center of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500)). The area of the opening (cross-sectional opening B2536) corresponding to the cross section of is smaller than the area of the first opening (left side opening B2513) and the area of the second opening (right side opening B2522). That is, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) has a shape in which the portion near the center is recessed. As a result, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) can be deformed along the recess when an external force is applied, so that the above-mentioned arrangement work of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is more efficient. Can be done.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the thickness of the connecting portion B2530 (connecting upper portion B2532, connecting lower side portion B2533, connecting front side portion B2534, and connecting rear side portion B2535) is 0.5 to 0.5 to It is about 1.2 mm (for example, 0.7 to 1.0 mm), which is considerably thinner than the thickness (for example, 4 mm) of the left side portion B2510 and the right side portion B2520. As a result, the flexibility (stretchability) can be fully exhibited, and the efficiency of the arrangement work of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) can be further improved.

In the sixth embodiment, the opening (cross-section opening B2536) corresponding to the cross section when the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is cut between the first opening (left side opening B2513) and the second opening (right side opening B2522). ) Is smaller than the area of the first opening (left side opening B2513) and the area of the second opening (right side opening B2522). In the present invention, the area of the opening (cross-section opening B2536) corresponding to the cross section is not particularly limited, and is among the area of the first opening (left side opening B2513) and the area of the second opening (right side opening B2522). It may be substantially the same as the area of at least one, and is larger than the area of at least one of the area of the first opening (left opening B2513) and the area of the second opening (right opening B2522). May be good. For example, the connection upper portion B2532, the connection lower portion B2533, the connection front side portion B2534, and the connection rear side portion B2535 are configured so that the surface closer to the right side portion B2520 is substantially perpendicular to the right side main surface B2524. You may. In this case, the area of the opening (cross-section opening B2536) corresponding to the cross section is substantially equal to the area of the second opening (right side opening B2522).

(C-3) With the projector (projector device B2),
A case (case B22) for accommodating the projector and
A space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having an air passage space (space P) through which air can pass, and
With an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) having elasticity,
The elastic member is arranged between the space forming portion and the case.
A first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522) are formed in the elastic member, and a space (cavity) is formed so as to communicate with the first opening and the second opening. B2531) is formed, and the first opening is arranged on the space forming portion side, while the second opening is arranged on the case side.
The air passage space communicates with the space formed in the elastic member.
The case is formed with a vent (intake port B22A) for taking in air.
On the second opening side of the elastic member, locking portions (first right-side protruding portion B2523a, second right-side protruding portion B2523b, and third right-side protruding portion B2523c) that can be inserted into the vent are formed. The elastic member can be locked by the locking portion inserted into the vent.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is arranged between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector accommodating case (case B22), and is elastic. The member (duct adapter B2500) is formed with a first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522), and a first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side). A space (cavity B2531) is formed so as to communicate with the opening B2522). The space (cavity B2531) communicates with the air passage space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000). As a result, air that has passed through the space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the space (cavity B2531) formed in the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) flows into the projector (projector device B2). It is possible to release the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) through the flow of the air. Further, since the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) has elasticity, it can be deformed according to the relative positional relationship between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the case (case B22). , The work of arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the case (case B22) can be smoothly performed. Further, the case (case B22) is formed with a vent (intake port B22A) for taking in air, and the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is on the side of the second opening (right side opening B2522) (case (case). On the B22) side), locking portions (first right-side protrusion B2523a, second right-side protrusion B2523b, and third right-side protrusion B2523c) that can be inserted into the ventilation port (intake port B22A) are formed. , The elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is engaged by the locking portions (first right side protrusion B2523a, second right side protrusion B2523b, and third right side protrusion B2523c) inserted into the ventilation port (intake port B22A). It can be stopped. As a result, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is connected to the case (case B22) via the locking portions (first right-side protrusion B2523a, second right-side protrusion B2523b, and third right-side protrusion B2523c). Therefore, the work of arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) as described above can be performed more efficiently.

In the sixth embodiment, it has been described that the size and shape of the locking portion (right protruding portion B2523) are substantially the same as the size and shape of the vent (slit B2022). In the present invention, the size and shape of the locking portion (right protruding portion B2523) is such that it can be press-fitted into the vent (slit B2022) and cannot be easily disengaged (locked) after press-fitting. ) Can be appropriately adopted in size and shape. For example, the length of the locking portion (right protruding portion B2523) in the short side direction (distance between the protruding upper surface B2523d and the protruding lower surface B2523e) is substantially the same as the short side of the vent (slit B2022), and the locking portion. The length in the long side direction (extending direction) of the (right protruding portion B2523) may be shorter than the long side of the vent (slit B2022). Further, the length in the long side direction (extending direction) of the locking portion (right protruding portion B2523) is substantially the same as the long side of the vent (slit B2022), and the end portion in the extending direction is raised upward. It may be raised as in the portion B2523f and the lower raised portion B2523g. The position where such a raised portion (protrusion for locking) is formed is not particularly limited, and the locking piece may be provided at an arbitrary position in the locking portion (right protruding portion B2523).

(C-4) With the projector (projector device B2),
A space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having an air passage space (space P) through which air can pass, and
With an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) having elasticity,
The elastic member is arranged between the space forming portion and the projector.
A first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522) are formed in the elastic member, and a space (cavity) is formed so as to communicate with the first opening and the second opening. B2531) is formed, and the first opening is arranged on the space forming portion side, while the second opening is arranged on the projector side.
The air passage space communicates with the space formed in the elastic member.
A locking portion (left side portion B2510) that can be locked to the space forming portion is formed on the first opening side of the elastic member, while two protruding portions (right side) are formed on the space forming portion. Standing part B2031 and left side standing part B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b, second outer protrusion B2042a and second inner protrusion B2042b, third outer protrusion B2043a and third inner protrusion B2043b, fourth outer The protrusion B2044a and the fourth inner protrusion B2044b, the fifth outer protrusion B2045a and the fifth inner protrusion B2045b) are formed, and the locking portion is arranged between the two protrusions.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is arranged between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector (projector device B2), and the elastic member (duct). The adapter B2500) is formed with a first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522), and a first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522). A space (cavity B2531) is formed so as to communicate with. The space (cavity B2531) communicates with the air passage space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000). As a result, air that has passed through the space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the space (cavity B2531) formed in the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) flows into the projector (projector device B2). It is possible to release the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) through the flow of the air. Further, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) has elasticity and can be deformed according to the relative positional relationship between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector (projector device B2). Therefore, the work of arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector (projector device B2) can be smoothly performed. Further, on the first opening (left side opening B2513) side (space forming portion (cover portion B2000) side) of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500), there is a locking portion that can be locked to the space forming portion (cover portion B2000). (Left side portion B2510) is formed, while the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) has two protrusions (right side standing portion B2031 and left side standing portion B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion). B2041b, 2nd outer protrusion B2042a and 2nd inner protrusion B2042b, 3rd outer protrusion B2043a and 3rd inner protrusion B2043b, 4th outer protrusion B2044a and 4th inner protrusion B2044b, 5th outer protrusion B2045a and 5th inner protrusion B2045b) Is formed, and the locking portion (left side portion B2510) has the two protruding portions (right side standing portion B2031 and left standing portion B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b, second outer protrusion B2042a). And the second inner protrusion B2042b, the third outer protrusion B2043a and the third inner protrusion B2043b, the fourth outer protrusion B2044a and the fourth inner protrusion B2044b, the fifth outer protrusion B2045a and the fifth inner protrusion B2045b). As a result, the locking portion (left side portion B2510) is locked into the two protruding portions (right side standing portion B2031 and left standing portion B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b, second outer protrusion B2042a and second. Positioning is performed by arranging between the inner protrusion B2042b, the third outer protrusion B2043a and the third inner protrusion B2043b, the fourth outer protrusion B2044a and the fourth inner protrusion B2044b, the fifth outer protrusion B2045a and the fifth inner protrusion B2045b). Therefore, the arrangement work of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) as described above can be performed more efficiently.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the thickness of the locking portion (left side portion B2510) is about 3 to 5 mm (for example, 4 mm), and the connecting portion B2530 (connecting upper portion B2532, connecting lower side). Compared with the thickness (for example, 0.7 to 1.0 mm) of the portion B2533, the connection front side portion B2534, and the connection rear side portion B2535), the thickness is considerably thicker. As a result, the two protrusions (right side standing part B2031 and left side standing part B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b, second outer protrusion B2042a and second inner protrusion B2042b, third outer protrusion B2043a Stable locking of the locking portion (left side portion B2510) between the third inner protrusion B2043b, the fourth outer protrusion B2044a and the fourth inner protrusion B2044b, the fifth outer protrusion B2045a and the fifth inner protrusion B2045b). It is possible to further improve the efficiency of the arrangement work of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500).

In the sixth embodiment, it has been described that the image is displayed on the screen when the light projected from the projector (projector device B2) is incident on the screen. In the present invention, a part or all of the light projected from the projector (projector device B2) may irradiate an object other than the screen, and the irradiated object may be a component provided in the game machine. However, it may be an object existing outside the game machine. For example, it is assumed that a part of the light projected from the projector (projector device B2) (for example, the light that has passed around the screen) reaches the player and irradiates the clothes worn by the player. Good. When a part or all of the light projected from the projector (projector device B2) irradiates an object other than the screen, the screen may not be provided.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is provided with a protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000), while the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000: irradiation unit B) is provided with a hole (irradiation unit). The hooking screw hole B1010) is formed, and by inserting the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) into the hole of the irradiation unit B (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010). It has been described that the irradiation unit B is hooked on the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000). In the present invention, conversely, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000: irradiation unit) is provided with a protruding portion, while the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is provided with a hole (for example, the same as the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010). (Hole having the shape of) is formed, and the irradiation unit may be hooked into the hole (recessed portion) of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) by inserting the protruding portion of the irradiation unit into the hole.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, it has been described that the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000: irradiation unit B) is attached to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) by screwing. In the present invention, the mounting method of the irradiation unit and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is not particularly limited, and the irradiation unit may be fixed to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) by locking instead of fastening with screws. Further, the irradiation unit may be directly fixed to the accommodating portion (cabinet G), or may be indirectly fixed by interposing another member. For example, another member (intervening member) is arranged between the irradiation unit and the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the intervening member is screwed to the accommodating portion (cabinet G), and the irradiation unit is locked to the intervening member. You may do it.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the air taken into the cabinet G from the outside of the game machine 1 is taken into the inside of the cover portion B2000 through the opening B2108e of the duct cover B2100, and the inside of the cover portion B2000 (space). After moving P), it is described that it enters the inside of the case B22 through the intake port B22A, proceeds inside the case B22 while taking away the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E. .. The projector device B2 can be cooled through such an air flow. In the present invention, the air for cooling the projector (projector device B2) can be taken into the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) from an arbitrary space in the accommodating portion (cabinet G). At that time, the air that existed outside the game machine until just before may be taken into the space forming part (cover part B2000), or the air that has stayed inside the game machine for a certain period of time may be taken into the space forming part (cover part B2000). It may be incorporated into Part B2000). Further, as in the second embodiment (as opposed to the sixth embodiment), the intake port B22A may be provided on the right side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E may be provided on the left side of the case B22. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the air after passing through the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) flows into the case B22, but conversely, the air after passing through the case B22 flows into the space forming portion (cover). It may be configured to flow into the part B2000). Further, when cooling the projector (projector device B2), the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) is not an indispensable configuration, and air is taken into the inside of the case B22 without providing the space forming portion (cover portion B2000). May be.

[7th Embodiment]
The first to sixth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the seventh embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment also applies to the seventh embodiment will be omitted.

<Adjusting the height of the reel unit>
FIG. 154 is a front view for explaining a schematic configuration inside the cabinet. FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit and the reel adapter are removed from the inside of the cabinet shown in FIG. 154. FIG. 156 (a) is a schematic view of the game machine according to the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front with the front door closed. FIG. 156 (b) is a schematic view of the game machine according to the seventh embodiment as viewed from the front with the front door closed. FIG. 156 (c) is a schematic view of the inside of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front. FIG. 156 (d) is a schematic view of the inside of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment as viewed from the front.

In the above-described embodiment, the game machine on which the display unit A (projection mapping device) is mounted has been described, but the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is not equipped with the projection mapping device. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the irradiation unit B is arranged in the upper space inside the cabinet G, and the screen is provided in the upper space or the upper portion (upper door mechanism UD) of the front door. (See FIGS. 4, 5, 64, 97, etc.). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the irradiation unit B is not arranged in the upper space inside the cabinet G, and the screen is not provided in the upper space or the upper portion of the front door.

In the above-described embodiment (a form in which the projection mapping device is mounted), the upper portion of the game machine 1 is used to display the image projected from the projector on the screen, which is provided on the front door. The image displayed on the screen can be visually recognized by the player through the window (for example, the upper display window UD1 shown in FIG. 3). Then, below the window (the window for making the image displayed on the screen visible), the main display window DD4 (operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and drawing on each reel RL, RC, RR). A window) is provided to make the design visible.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the projection mapping device is not mounted, a window for making the image displayed on the screen visible is not formed, and due to this, the main display window The DD4 is formed above the embodiment described above. As a result, the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the visibility of the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR are improved.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, in the present embodiment, the reel adapter 6000 is mounted on the upper surface of the middle board 4000, and the reel unit RU is mounted on the upper surface of the reel adapter 6000. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the reel unit RU is directly mounted on the middle board 4000 (see FIGS. 95 and 96), whereas in the present embodiment, the reel unit RU is located between the middle board 4000 and the reel unit RU. , The reel adapter 6000 is interposed. The configuration inside the cabinet G is basically the same between the sixth embodiment and the present embodiment except for the reel adapter 6000. In this embodiment, since the irradiation unit B is not provided, the operation window G10 is not formed on the back wall G3.

As shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b), in the present embodiment, the main display window DD4 is upward by a distance d (about 3 to 10 cm, for example, 6 cm) as compared with the sixth embodiment. It is formed. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 156 (c) and 156 (d), the arrangement position (height) of the middle board 4000 in the cabinet G is the same in the sixth embodiment and the present embodiment. Then, in the present embodiment, the reel unit RU is arranged at a reel position as compared with the sixth embodiment, corresponding to the fact that the reel adapter 6000 is interposed between the middle board 4000 and the reel unit RU. It is upward by the height (distance d) of the adapter 6000.

As a result, in the present embodiment, both the main display window DD4 and the reel unit RU are positioned upward by a distance d as compared with the sixth embodiment. As a result, as in the sixth embodiment, the formation position of the main display window DD4 and the arrangement position of the reel unit RU (reel RL) are substantially coincident (superimposed) in the front view. As a result, the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR are easily visible to the player.

Note that, in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b), only the main display window DD4 and the reel unit RU are shown, and the other configurations are not shown. In FIG. 156 (c), only the middle board 4000 and the reel unit RU are shown, and the other configurations are not shown. In FIG. 156 (d), only the middle board 4000, the reel adapter 6000, and the reel unit RU are shown, and the other configurations are not shown.

<Reel adapter 6000>
FIG. 157 is a perspective view of the reel adapter as viewed from the front right. FIG. 158 is a perspective view of the reel adapter as viewed from the rear right. FIG. 159 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the right rear portion of the reel adapter. FIG. 160 is a rear view of the right rear portion shown in FIG. 159. FIG. 161 is a cross-sectional view of the lower protruding portion of the right rear portion shown in FIG. 159. FIG. 162 is a perspective view of the reel adapter as viewed from below. FIG. 163 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter as viewed from below. FIG. 164 is a front view of the reel adapter cut in the vertical plane in the left-right direction. FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the reel adapter as viewed from above. FIG. 166 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the step recess in a state where the reel adapter is cut in the vertical direction in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the reel adapter 6000 has a box-shaped external shape, and has upper surface 6001, front surface 6002, and upper surface 6001, front surface 6002, respectively, as upper surface, front surface, and rear surface, respectively. It also has a rear surface 6003. The right side portion (right rear surface 6003R) and the left side portion (left rear surface 6003L) of the rear surface 6003 are formed so as to have a step with respect to the central portion (middle rear surface 6003C) of the rear surface 6003, respectively.

Further, the reel adapter 6000 has a right rear portion 6010 and a left rear portion 6020, respectively, as a structure protruding rearward in the right side portion and the left side portion of the rear end. The right rear portion 6010 includes an upper protruding portion 6011 projecting rearward with respect to the right rear surface 6003R at the upper part of the right rear surface 6003R, and a lower projecting portion 6012 projecting rearward with respect to the right rear surface 6003R at the lower portion of the right rear surface 6003R. have.

The left rear portion 6020 includes an upper protruding portion 6021 projecting rearward with respect to the left rear surface 6003L at the upper portion of the left rear surface 6003L, and a lower projecting portion 6022 projecting rearward with respect to the left rear surface 6003L at the lower portion of the left rear surface 6003L. have. Since the left rear portion 6020 has substantially the same structure as the right rear portion 6010, only the right rear portion 6010 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 159, the upper protruding portion 6011 includes a right side portion 6011a and a left side portion 6011b extending in the vertical direction and a connecting portion 6011c extending in the left-right direction to connect the right side portion 6011a and the left side portion 6011b. ,have. The lower protruding portion 6012 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the rear upper portion is rounded. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 159, the rear end surface of the upper protrusion 6011 and the rear end face of the lower protrusion 6012 are shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 160, the lower end of the connecting portion 6011c is positioned above the upper surface 6001, whereby the opening 6013 surrounded by the right side portion 6011a, the left side portion 6011b, the connecting portion 6011c, and the upper surface 6001 is opened. It is formed. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 160, the rear end surface of the upper protrusion 6011 and the rear end face of the lower protrusion 6012 are shown by diagonal lines, and the opening 6013 is shown by shading. Although not shown, similarly, the upper protruding portion 6021 has an opening having a right side portion 6021a, a left side portion 6021b, and a connecting portion 6021c, and is surrounded by a right side portion 6021a, a left side portion 6021b, a connecting portion 6021c, and an upper surface 6001. 6023 is formed.

FIG. 161 shows a state in which the lower protruding portion 6012 is cut in a vertical plane (plane in the left-right direction), and the cut plane is shown by diagonal lines. As shown in FIG. 161, the lower protruding portion 6012 has a protruding upper surface 6012a protruding rearward from the right rear surface 6003R. The protruding upper surface 6012a is formed so as to have an inclination that is slightly lower toward the rear, and constitutes the upper surface of the lower protruding portion 6012. An upper raised portion 6012b is formed on the protruding upper surface 6012a. The upper raised portion 6012b has a raised shape with respect to the flat protruding upper surface 6012a.

As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the upper surface 6001 of the reel adapter 6000 is formed with three upper surface recesses 6030 (upper left surface recess 6030L, middle upper surface recess 6030C, and right upper surface recess 6030R). The left upper surface recess 6030L, the middle upper surface recess 6030C, and the right upper surface recess 6030R are each formed as recesses with respect to the upper surface 6001, and are one surface in a hexahedron surrounded by six rectangular surfaces ( It has a shape with the upper surface) open.

The left upper surface recess 6030L, the middle upper surface recess 6030C, and the right upper surface recess 6030R are formed so as to be arranged in the left-right direction, and are on the left side of the upper left surface recess 6030L, between the upper left surface recess 6030L and the middle upper surface recess 6030C. A recess non-forming region 6001a, a recess non-forming region 6001b, a recess non-forming region 6001c, and a recess non-forming region 6001d are formed between the upper surface recess 6030C and the right upper surface recess 6030R, respectively, on the right side of the right upper surface recess 6030R. Has been done. The recess non-forming region 6001a, the recess non-forming region 6001b, the recess non-forming region 6001c, and the recess non-forming region 6001d are a part of the upper surface 6001.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, three back surface convex portions 6031 (left back surface convex portion 6031L, middle back surface convex portion 6031C, and right back surface convex portion 6031R) are formed on the back side of the reel adapter 6000. .. The left back surface convex portion 6031L, the middle back surface convex portion 6031C, and the right back surface convex portion 6031R correspond to the upper left surface concave portion 6030L, the middle upper surface concave portion 6030C, and the right upper surface concave portion 6030R, respectively, and the upper left surface concave portion 6030L, It has a shape that protrudes downward with respect to the back surface 6004 (the surface opposite to the upper surface 6001) according to the recesses of the middle upper surface recess 6030C and the right upper surface recess 6030R.

The back surface convex portion 6031 has a bottom surface 6031a formed substantially parallel to the back surface 6004, and a side surface 6031b connecting the back surface 6004 and the bottom surface 6031a. Further, on the back side of the reel adapter 6000, a rib 6032 projecting downward (in a direction substantially perpendicular to the back surface 6004) or the bottom surface 6031a is formed. The rib 6032 is composed of left and right ribs 6032a extending in the left-right direction and five front-rear ribs 6032b extending in the front-rear direction.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 163, the side surface of the rib 6032 (the surface substantially perpendicular to the back surface 6004 or the bottom surface 6031a) is shown by diagonal lines. The left and right ribs 6032a intersect the five front and rear ribs 6032b below the bottom surface 6031a, respectively. The portion of the rib 6032 projecting downward from the back surface 6004 is continuous with the side surface 6031b, and the portion projecting downward from the back surface 6004 is integrated with the portion projecting downward from the bottom surface 6031a.

FIG. 164 shows a state in which the reel adapter 6000 is cut on a vertical surface (plane in the left-right direction) passing through the left and right ribs 6032a, and the cut surface is shown by diagonal lines. As shown in FIG. 164, the length from the bottom surface 6030a (see FIG. 157) of the top surface recess 6030 to the lower end of the left and right ribs 6032a in the portion of the left and right ribs 6032a protruding downward from the bottom surface 6031a (r in the figure). Is shorter than the length (R in the figure) from the upper surface 6001 to the lower ends of the left and right ribs 6032a in the portion protruding downward from the back surface 6004.

Here, R is a length including the distance between the upper surface 6001 and the back surface 6004 (thickness of the reel adapter 6000 in the upper surface recess non-forming region), and r is the distance between the bottom surface 6030a and the bottom surface 6031a (upper surface recess forming region). The length including the thickness of the reel adapter 6000). The thickness of these reel adapters 6000 is substantially uniform. Therefore, of the left and right ribs 6032a, the length from the bottom surface 6031a to the lower end of the left and right ribs 6032a in the portion protruding downward from the bottom surface 6031a (the length protruding downward from the left and right ribs 6032a when the bottom surface 6031a is used as a reference) is The length from the back surface 6004 to the lower ends of the left and right ribs 6032a in the portion protruding downward from the back surface 6004 (the length of the left and right ribs 6032a projecting downward based on the back surface 6004) is shorter.

Similarly, the length from the bottom surface 6031a to the lower end of the front-rear rib 6032b in the portion of the front-rear rib 6032b protruding downward from the bottom surface 6031a (the downward protrusion length of the front-rear rib 6032b with respect to the bottom surface 6031a). Is shorter than the length from the back surface 6004 to the lower end of the front and rear ribs 6032b in the portion protruding downward from the back surface 6004 (the downward protrusion length of the front and rear ribs 6032b when the back surface 6004 is used as a reference). The downward protrusion length of the front and rear ribs 6032b when the bottom surface 6031a is used as a reference is substantially the same as the downward protrusion length of the left and right ribs 6032a when the bottom surface 6031a is used as a reference.

As shown in FIGS. 157 and 165, two step recesses 6040 (left step recess 6040L and right step recess 6040R) are formed on the front surface 6002 of the reel adapter 6000. The left step recess 6040L and the right step recess 6040R are each formed to have a step, and the upper wall surface 6040a formed continuously from the upper surface 6001 and substantially parallel to the front surface 6002 and in front of the upper wall surface 6040a. It has a lower side wall surface 6040b formed substantially parallel to the upper wall surface 6040a. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 165, the upper wall surface 6040a and the lower side wall surface 6040b are shown by diagonal lines.

FIG. 166 shows a state in which the reel adapter 6000 is cut on a vertical surface (surface in the front-rear direction) passing through the left step recess 6040L. As shown in FIG. 166, a lower protrusion 6041 is formed in the lower portion of the step recess 6040. The front surface 6041a of the lower protrusion 6041 is formed continuously from the lower end of the lower side wall surface 6040b downward. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 166, the cut surface of the lower protrusion 6041 is shown in black, and the cut surface other than the lower protrusion 6041 is shown by diagonal lines. The lower end of the lower side wall surface 6040b is substantially the same height as the lower end of the region where the step recess 6040 is not formed on the front surface 6002, and the lower protrusion 6041 is a portion protruding downward from these lower ends.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 157 and 165, two screw hole recesses 6050 (left screw hole recess 6050L and right screw hole recess 6050R) are formed on the front surface 6002 of the reel adapter 6000. The left screw hole recess 6050L and the right screw hole recess 6050R are each composed of a lower surface 6050a that defines the lower end and a side surface 6050b that is formed so as to have a tapered shape that is narrower at the lower end. The lower surface 6050a is formed with a screw hole 6050c that penetrates toward the back side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 157 and 165, three front upper recesses 6060 (left front upper recess 6060L, middle front upper recess 6060C, and right front upper recess 6060R) are formed on the upper portion of the front surface 6002 of the reel adapter 6000. It is formed. The left front upper recess 6060L, the middle front upper recess 6060C, and the right front upper recess 6060R each have a rectangular parallelepiped shape at the boundary between the front 6002 and the upper surface 6001. The left side of the left front upper recess 6060L communicates with the left step recess 6040L, and the left side of the right front upper recess 6060R communicates with the right screw hole recess 6050R.

<Reel unit RU>
FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the reel unit. FIG. 168 is a perspective view showing a state in which the right unit is removed from the reel unit shown in FIG. 167. FIG. 169 is a perspective view of the reel frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 170 is a perspective view of the reel frame as viewed from below. FIG. 171 is a perspective view of the reel frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 172 is a perspective view of the motor frame.

As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the reel unit RU includes a reel frame R10, a left unit R30L, a middle unit R30C, and a right unit R30R, and the left unit R30L, the middle unit R30C, and the right unit R30R are the reel frame R10. Is housed in. Since the left unit R30L, the middle unit R30C, and the right unit R30R have the same configuration, the configuration of the right unit R30R will be mainly described below.

The right unit R30R includes a right reel RR, a right motor frame R50R, and a right front guard R70R. FIG. 168 shows a state in which the right motor frame R50R and the right front guard R70R are removed from the right unit R30R. The right reel RR has a tubular right reel drum R31R, and a right reel band R32R on which a plurality of symbols are arranged is wound and fixed to the right reel drum R31R. Further, although not shown, a rotary gear having the same central axis as the right reel drum R31R is arranged inside the right reel drum R31R.

The right motor frame R50R is arranged on the right side of the right reel RR. An opening R51R is formed in the center of the right motor frame R50R, and a motor cover R52R is attached so as to fill the opening R51R. The motor cover R52R is housed in a state of covering the motor drive unit. Although not shown, the motor drive unit includes a stepping motor and a drive gear that meshes with a rotary gear.

The driving force of the stepping motor is transmitted to the right reel RR via the driving gear and the rotating gear. As a result, the right motor frame R50R supports the stepping motor and rotatably supports the right reel RR. The right front guard R70R is arranged at the lower part on the front side of the right reel RR and covers a part of the symbols arranged on the right reel RR.

Similarly, the left unit R30L includes a left reel RL, a left motor frame R50L, and a left front guard R70L. The left motor frame R50L supports the stepping motor and rotatably supports the left reel RL. The left front guard R70L is arranged at the lower part on the front side of the left reel RL and covers a part of the symbols arranged on the left reel RL.

Further, the middle unit R30C includes a middle reel RC, a middle motor frame R50C, and a middle front guard R70C. The middle motor frame R50C supports the stepping motor and rotatably supports the middle reel RC. The middle front guard R70C is arranged at the lower part on the front side of the middle reel RC and covers a part of the symbols arranged on the middle reel RC.

As shown in FIG. 169, the reel frame R10 is formed in a box shape with the front side open. The reel frame R10 has three first lower side surfaces R11 (left first lower side surface R11L, middle first lower side surface R11C) as surfaces defining the lower ends of the accommodation space of the left unit R30L, the middle unit R30C, and the right unit R30R. , And right first lower side surface R11R), and three second lower side surfaces R12 (left second lower side surface R12L, middle second lower side surface R12C, and right second lower side surface R12R). For the sake of clarity, FIG. 169 shows the second lower side surface R12 with diagonal lines.

The left second lower side surface R12L, the middle second lower side surface R12C, and the right second lower side surface R12R are on the right side of the left first lower side surface R11L, the middle first lower side surface R11C, and the right first lower side surface R11R, respectively. In, it is formed as a recess slightly recessed with respect to these first lower side surfaces R11. A left reel RL, a middle reel RC, and a right reel RR are arranged above the left first lower side surface R11L, the middle first lower side surface R11C, and the right first lower side surface R11R, respectively. The left motor frame R50L, the middle motor frame R50C, and the right motor frame R50R are mounted on the left second lower side surface R12L, the middle second lower side surface R12C, and the right second lower side surface R12R, respectively.

The first lower side surface R11 and the second lower side surface R12 are formed to be substantially flat. Further, the reel frame R10 is a downward projecting portion that projects downward (in a direction substantially perpendicular to the first lower side surface R11 and the second lower side surface R12) at the front ends of the first lower side surface R11 and the second lower side surface R12. It has R13. In the lower protrusion R13, three mounting holes R14 (left mounting hole R14L, middle mounting hole R14C, and right mounting hole R14R) and one screw hole R15 are used to move the lower protrusion R13 back and forth. It is formed so as to penetrate in the direction.

On the front surface side of the downward protrusion R13, a pair of protrusions R16 are formed on the left and right sides of the left mounting hole R14L, the middle mounting hole R14C, and the right mounting hole R14R at predetermined distances. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 170, on the back surface side of the downward protrusion R13, one on each side is provided in the vicinity of the peripheral edges of the left mounting hole R14L, the middle mounting hole R14C, and the right mounting hole R14R. The protrusion R17 is formed.

The reel frame R10 has three first back side surfaces R18 (left first back side surface R18L, middle first back side surface R18C, and middle first back side surface R18C) as surfaces on the back side (opposite side of the first lower side surface R11 and the second lower side surface R12). It has a right first back side surface R18R) and three second back side surfaces R19 (left second back side surface R19L, middle second back side surface R19C, and right second back side surface R19R). The left first back side surface R18L, the middle first back side surface R18C, and the right first back side surface R18R correspond to the left first lower side surface R11L, the middle first lower side surface R11C, and the right first lower side surface R11R, respectively. The left second back side surface R19L, the middle second back side surface R19C, and the right second back side surface R19R are the left second lower side surface R12L, the middle second lower side surface R12C, and the right second lower side surface, respectively. It corresponds to the side surface R12R.

The left second back side surface R19L, the middle second back side surface R19C, and the right second back side surface R19R are recesses of the left second lower side surface R12L, the middle second lower side surface R12C, and the right second lower side surface R12R, respectively. It has a shape that protrudes slightly downward with respect to the left first back surface R18L, the middle first back surface R18C, and the right first back surface R18R.

The first back surface R18 and the second back surface R19 are formed substantially flat, and are continuous with the downward projecting portion R13 at the front end and continuous with the rear wall portion R20 at the rear end. The downward projecting portion R13 and the rear wall portion R20 are formed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the first back surface surface R18 and the second back surface surface R19, respectively. The lower end edge of the rear wall portion R20 is positioned on the same plane as the second back surface surface R19.

As shown in FIG. 171, the reel frame R10 has two rear projecting portions R21 (right rear projecting portion R21R and left rear projecting portion R21L) projecting rearward from the rear wall portion R20. The rear projecting portion R21 has a projecting upper surface R21a projecting rearward from the rear wall portion R20. The protruding upper surface R21a is formed so as to have an inclination that is slightly lower in the rear portion, and constitutes the upper surface of the rear protruding portion R21. An upper raised portion R21b is formed on the protruding upper surface R21a. The upper raised portion R21b has a raised shape with respect to the flat protruding upper surface R21a. The size and shape of the right rear protrusion R21R and the left rear protrusion R21L are substantially the same as the size and shape of the lower protrusion 6012 and the lower protrusion 6022 (see FIG. 158) in the reel adapter 6000, respectively. ing.

As shown in FIG. 172, the motor frame R50 (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) has a mounting surface R52 as a surface defining the lower end. For the sake of clarity, the mounting surface R52 is shown in diagonal lines in FIG. 172. The width of the mounting surface R52 in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the width of the second lower side surface R12 of the reel frame R10 in the left-right direction.

In the left motor frame R50L, the middle motor frame R50C, and the right motor frame R50R, the mounting surface R52 abuts on the left second lower side surface R12L, the middle second lower side surface R12C, and the right second lower side surface R12R, respectively. In this state, it is housed in the reel frame R10. As a result, the motor frame R50 is supported by the reel frame R10, and as a result, each reel RL, RC, RR and the stepping motor are also supported by the reel frame R10.

Further, the motor frame R50 has a downward projecting portion R53 that projects downward (in a direction substantially perpendicular to the mounting surface R52) at the front end of the mounting surface R52. A mounting hole R54 is formed in the downward projecting portion R53 so as to penetrate the downward projecting portion R53 in the front-rear direction. The width of the downward protrusion R53 in the left-right direction corresponds to the distance between the pair of protrusions R16 formed on the downward protrusion R13 of the reel frame R10.

In the state where the motor frame R50 is housed in the reel frame R10 (the state in which the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the downward protrusion R53 of the motor frame R50 is a pair of protrusions on the front side of the downward protrusion R13 of the reel frame R10. It is arranged so as to be sandwiched between R16, and the mounting hole R54 formed in the downward protruding portion R53 and the mounting hole R14 formed in the downward protruding portion R13 overlap each other. In this state, the motor frame R50 is fastened to the reel frame R10 by using the fastening member inserted through the mounting hole R54 and the mounting hole R14. In this embodiment, Niflatch (registered trademark) is used as the fastening member.

<Middle board 4000>
FIG. 173 is a perspective view of the middle board.

As shown in FIG. 173, the middle board 4000 has a plate-like shape, and the upper surfaces are the first upper surface 4010, the second upper surface 4030, the third upper surface 4050, the fourth upper surface 4070, and the first surface. It is composed of 5 upper surfaces 4080. The second upper surface 4030, the third upper surface 4050, the fourth upper surface 4070, and the fifth upper surface 4080 are each formed as recesses recessed with respect to the first upper surface 4010. For clarity, FIG. 173 shows the first upper surface 4010 with diagonal lines.

A right side mounting wall portion 4001 is erected on the right side portion of the trailing edge of the middle board 4000. A screw hole 4002 is formed in the right side mounting wall portion 4001. Further, a left side mounting wall portion 4003 is erected on the left side portion of the trailing edge of the middle board 4000. A screw hole 4004 is formed in the left side mounting wall portion 4003. The middle board 4000 is attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G by the screws through which the screw holes 4002 and the screw holes 4004 are inserted.

Further, the middle board 4000 is attached to another member (not shown) by a screw through which four screw holes 4005 formed in the first upper surface 4010 are inserted. The other members are attached to the right side wall G2R and the left side wall G2L of the cabinet G, whereby the middle board 4000 is fixed to the right side wall G2R and the left side wall G2L.

The second upper surface 4030 is formed in front of the right side mounting wall portion 4001. A rectangular opening 4031 is formed in the second upper surface 4030, and a right opening is provided along the trailing edge (rear side) of the opening 4031 in a direction substantially perpendicular to the second upper surface 4030. The installation section 4032 is erected. A rectangular opening 4033 is formed in the central portion of the standing portion 4032 with a right opening. The size and shape of the opening 4033 are substantially the same as the size and shape of the opening 6013 (see FIG. 160) formed by the upper protrusion 6011 of the reel adapter 6000. Further, the lower edge of the opening 4033 has substantially the same height as the first upper surface 4010.

The third upper surface 4050 is formed in front of the left side mounting wall portion 4003. A rectangular opening 4051 is formed in the third upper surface 4050, and a left opening is provided along the trailing edge (rear side) of the opening 4051 in a direction substantially perpendicular to the third upper surface 4050. The installation section 4052 is erected. A rectangular opening 4053 is formed in the central portion of the standing portion 4052 with a left opening. The size and shape of the opening 4053 are substantially the same as the size and shape of the opening 4033 formed in the standing portion 4032 with the right opening. Further, the lower edge of the opening 4053 has substantially the same height as the first upper surface 4010.

The fourth upper surface 4070 is formed so as to extend in the left-right direction in front of the second upper surface 4030 and the third upper surface 4050. The fifth upper surface 4080 is formed in front of the fourth upper surface 4070 toward the front end of the middle board 4000. The fifth upper surface 4080 includes a first raised surface 4081, a second raised surface 4082, a third raised surface 4083, and a fourth raised surface 4084 as raised portions with respect to the surrounding surface.

The second raised surface 4082 is formed with a front hole 4082a, a rear hole 4082b, and a notch 4082c. The front side hole 4082a and the rear side hole 4082b are formed in a rectangular shape with slightly rounded corners as through holes that penetrate the middle board 4000 in the vertical direction. The front hole 4082a and the rear hole 4082b extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and the extending direction of the front hole 4082a and the extending direction of the rear hole 4082b are substantially parallel to each other. The front hole 4082a and the rear hole 4082b are substantially the same in size and shape.

Similarly, the third raised surface 4083 is formed with an anterior hole 4083a, a posterior hole 4083b, and a notch 4083c. The front side hole 4083a and the rear side hole 4083b are formed in a rectangular shape with slightly rounded corners as through holes that penetrate the middle board 4000 in the vertical direction. The front hole 4083a and the rear hole 4083b extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and the extending direction of the front hole 4083a and the extending direction of the rear hole 4083b are substantially parallel to each other. The size and shape of the front hole 4083a and the rear hole 4083b are substantially the same. A notch 4084a is formed on the fourth raised surface 4084.

A screw hole 4085 is formed between the first raised surface 4081 and the second raised surface 4082. A screw hole 4086 is formed between the second raised surface 4082 and the third raised surface 4083. A screw hole 4087 is formed between the third raised surface 4083 and the fourth raised surface 4084.

The first upper surface 4010, the second upper surface 4030, the third upper surface 4050, the fourth upper surface 4070, and the fifth upper surface 4080 (first raised surface 4081, second raised surface 4082, third raised surface 4083, and , 4th raised surface 4084) are all formed substantially flat and arranged substantially horizontally.

<Mounting of reel adapter 6000 on middle board 4000>
FIG. 174 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is mounted on the middle board. FIG. 175 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is slightly displaced with respect to the middle board from the state shown in FIG. 174. FIG. 176 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the step recess in a state where the reel adapter and the middle board shown in FIG. 174 are cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction. FIG. 177 is a perspective view of the reel adapter and the middle board shown in FIG. 174 as viewed from the side. FIG. 178 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter and the middle board shown in FIG. 177 in a state of being cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction.

In the state where the reel adapter 6000 is mounted on the middle board 4000 (see FIG. 174, the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the upper surface 6001, the front surface 6002, the rear surface 6003, and the lower end of the side surface 6005 of the reel adapter 6000. The edge and the lower end edge of the rib 6032 (see FIG. 163) protruding downward from the bottom surface 6031a come into contact with the first upper surface 4010 (see FIG. 173) of the middle board 4000.

In this state, the recess 6050L for the left screw hole of the reel adapter 6000 is arranged above the portion of the fifth upper surface 4080 of the middle board 4000 located between the first raised surface 4081 and the second raised surface 4082. , The right side screw hole recess 6050R of the reel adapter 6000 is arranged above the portion of the fifth upper surface 4080 of the middle board 4000 that is located between the third raised surface 4083 and the fourth raised surface 4084 (FIG. 175). reference).

At this time, the screw hole 6050c of the screw hole recess 6050 (the left screw hole recess 6050L and the right screw hole recess 6050R) overlaps with the screw hole 4085 and the screw hole 4087 of the middle board 4000, and these screw holes are inserted. The reel adapter 6000 is fastened to the middle board 4000 using the screw. Although not shown, a downwardly projecting portion is formed on the back side of the lower surface 6050a (see FIG. 165) of the screw hole recess 6050, and the portion is stable when it comes into contact with the fifth upper surface 4080. Can be screwed to.

FIG. 176 shows a state in which the reel adapter 6000 and the middle board 4000 are cut on a vertical surface (plane in the front-rear direction) passing through the left step recess 6040L in a state where the reel adapter 6000 is mounted on the middle board 4000. As shown in FIG. 176, in this state, the lower protrusion 6041 (see FIG. 166) formed in the lower part of the left step recess 6040L of the reel adapter 6000 is inserted into the front hole 4082a of the middle board 4000. Similarly, although not shown, a lower protrusion 6041 formed in the lower part of the right step recess 6040R of the reel adapter 6000 is inserted into the front hole 4083a of the middle board 4000.

The size and shape of the lower protrusion 6041 correspond to the size and shape of the front hole 4082a and the front hole 4083a, and when the lower protrusion 6041 is inserted into the front hole 4082a and the front hole 4083a, the lower side The protrusion 6041 is substantially in contact with or close to the wall portions (wall portions formed in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction, respectively) forming the peripheral edges of the front side hole 4082a and the front side hole 4083a, and the lower protrusion 6041 and the peripheral wall portion The interval is less than or equal to a predetermined distance (for example, 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.). As a result, the movement of the lower protrusion 6041 in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction is restricted, and when the reel adapter 6000 is mounted on the middle board 4000, the alignment is performed while suppressing the misalignment in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. It can be carried out.

In the present embodiment, the lower protrusion 6041 is inserted into the front hole 4082a and the front hole 4083a, but in other embodiments, the lower protrusion 6041 is inserted into the rear hole 4082b and the rear hole 4083b. There is also. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device is not mounted on the front door, but the present invention can be applied to a game machine equipped with the liquid crystal display device. When the liquid crystal display device is mounted on the front door, the thickness of the front door increases, and it is necessary to arrange the reel unit RU rearward by the amount of the increase in the thickness of the front door.

In this regard, if the reel adapter 6000 is placed on the middle board 4000 so that the lower protrusion 6041 is inserted into the rear hole 4082b and the rear hole 4083b, the reel unit RU can be positioned rearward from the present embodiment. It is possible to easily respond to such design changes. The screw hole 6050c of the reel adapter 6000 has an elliptical shape that is long in the front-rear direction. As a result, in either case where the lower protrusion 6041 is inserted into the front hole 4082a and the front hole 4083a, or when the lower protrusion 6041 is inserted into the rear hole 4082b and the rear hole 4083b, the reel The screw hole 6050c of the adapter 6000 overlaps with the screw hole 4085 and the screw hole 4087 of the middle board 4000.

Further, as shown in FIG. 177, when the reel adapter 6000 is mounted on the middle board 4000, the lower protrusion 6012 (see FIG. 158) of the reel adapter 6000 is a standing portion with a right opening of the middle board 4000. It is inserted into an opening 4033 (see FIG. 173) formed in 4032, and a part of the lower protrusion 6012 projects rearward of the opening 4033. Similarly, the lower protrusion 6022 (see FIG. 158) of the reel adapter 6000 is inserted into the opening 4053 (see FIG. 173) formed in the left opening standing portion 4052 of the middle board 4000, and the lower protrusion 6022 A part protrudes to the rear of the opening 4053.

FIG. 178 shows a state in which the reel adapter 6000 and the middle board 4000 are cut at a surface (vertical surface in the front-rear direction) passing through the highest portion of the upper raised portion 6012b (see FIG. 161) of the lower protruding portion 6012. For the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the middle board 4000 and the standing portion 4032 with the right opening are shown in black, the back surface of the right mounting wall portion 4001 of the middle board 4000 is shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the reel adapter 6000 is shown. Is shaded, and the portion of the lower protruding portion 6012 of the reel adapter 6000 other than the cut surface is indicated by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 178, the upper end of the lower protrusion 6012 is substantially in contact with or close to the upper edge of the opening 4033, and the distance between the upper end of the lower protrusion 6012 and the upper edge of the opening 4033 is a predetermined distance (for example). , 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.) or less. Although not shown, similarly, the upper end of the lower protrusion 6022 is substantially in contact with or close to the upper edge of the opening 4053, and the distance between the upper end of the lower protrusion 6022 and the upper edge of the opening 4053 is a predetermined distance (for example). , 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.) or less. As a result, the upward movement of the lower protrusion 6012 and the lower protrusion 6022 is restricted, and when the reel adapter 6000 is mounted on the middle board 4000, the alignment is performed while suppressing the vertical displacement. It can be carried out.

<Mounting of reel unit RU on reel adapter 6000>
FIG. 179 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit is mounted on the reel adapter. FIG. 180 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is shifted downward with respect to the reel unit from the state shown in FIG. 179. FIG. 181 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a state in which the reel adapter and the reel frame in the state shown in FIG. 179 are cut in the vertical direction in the left-right direction. FIG. 182 is a cross-sectional view in a state where the reel unit is fastened to the reel adapter. FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the reel adapter and the reel frame in the state shown in FIG. 179 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 184 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter and the reel frame shown in FIG. 183 cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction.

In the state where the reel unit RU is mounted on the reel adapter 6000 (see FIG. 179, the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the left reel RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR are reel adapters, respectively. It is arranged above the upper left surface recess 6030L, the middle upper surface recess 6030C, and the right upper surface recess 6030R (see FIG. 157) of the 6000. Further, the left motor frame R50L, the middle motor frame R50C, and the right motor frame R50R (see FIG. 168) have the recess non-forming region 6001b, the recess non-forming region 6001c, and the recess non-forming region 6001d of the reel adapter 6000, respectively. It is located above (see FIG. 157) (see FIG. 180). Note that FIG. 180 shows a state in which the left front guard R70L, the middle front guard R70C, and the right front guard R70R are removed from the reel unit RU.

FIG. 181 shows a state in which the reel adapter 6000 and the reel frame R10 are cut at a surface (vertical surface in the left-right direction) passing through the upper left surface recess 6030L, the middle upper surface recess 6030C, and the right upper surface recess 6030R. As shown in FIG. 181, in this state, the left second back side surface R19L, the middle second back side surface R19C, and the right second back side surface R19R (see FIG. 170) of the reel frame R10 are reel adapters 6000, respectively. In contact with the concave non-formed region 6001b, the concave non-formed region 6001c, and the concave non-formed region 6001d. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 181 the cut surface of the reel frame R10 is shown by diagonal lines, the cut surface of the reel adapter 6000 is shown in black, and the left second lower side surface R12L, the middle second lower side surface R12C, and the right second side are shown. 2 The lower side surface R12R (the left second back side surface R19L, the middle second back side surface R19C, and the front side surface corresponding to the right second back side surface R19R, see FIG. 169) is shaded.

In FIG. 182, when the reel unit RU is fastened to the reel adapter 6000 (the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the vertical plane (front-back direction) passes through the right front upper recess 6060R (see FIG. 157) of the reel adapter 6000. (Surface) shows how it was cut. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 182, the cut surface of the reel adapter 6000 is shown by diagonal lines, the cut surface of the reel frame R10 is shown in black, the cut surface of the right motor frame R50R is shown by shading, and the fastening member R100R (FIG. A part of (see 180) is shown by diagonal lines.

As described above, in the state where the motor frame R50 is housed in the reel frame R10 (the state in which the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the downward protrusion R53 (see FIG. 172) of the motor frame R50 is below the reel frame R10. A mounting hole R54 formed in the downward protruding portion R53 and a mounting hole R14 formed in the downward protruding portion R13, which are arranged on the front surface side of the protruding portion R13 (see FIG. 169), overlap each other. In this state, a motor is used by using a fastening member (Nifratch (registered trademark), fastening member R100L, 100C, 100R shown in FIG. 180 in this embodiment) inserted through the mounting hole R54 and the mounting hole R14. The frame R50 is fastened to the reel frame R10.

As shown in FIG. 182, the mounting holes R54 formed in the downward protruding portion R53 of the right motor frame R50R and the right mounting holes R14R formed in the downward protruding portion R13 of the reel frame R10 are right front surfaces of the reel adapter 6000. It is arranged on the front side of the upper recess 6060R, and a part of the fastening member R100R is housed in the right front upper recess 6060R. Further, the back surface of the lower protrusion R53 of the right motor frame R50R and the front surface of the lower protrusion R13 of the reel frame R10 are in contact with each other, and the back surface of the reel frame R10 of the lower protrusion R13. And the front surface 6002 (see FIG. 157) of the reel adapter 6000 are in contact with each other.

Note that FIG. 182 shows that a part of the fastening member R100R for fastening the right motor frame R50R to the reel frame R10 is housed in the right front upper recess 6060R of the reel adapter 6000. Similarly. A part of the fastening member R100L for fastening the left motor frame R50L to the reel frame R10 is housed in the left front upper concave portion 6060L of the reel adapter 6000, and for fastening the middle motor frame R50C to the reel frame R10. A part of the fastening member R100C is housed in the middle front upper recess 6060C of the reel adapter 6000.

Further, as described above, the screw hole R15 is formed in the downward protruding portion R13 of the reel frame R10, while the boss portion 6070 is formed in the upper portion of the reel adapter 6000 (see FIG. 180). In the state where the reel unit RU is mounted on the reel adapter 6000, the screw hole R15 and the boss portion 6070 are overlapped with each other, and the screw through which the screw hole R15 is inserted is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 6070. The reel unit RU is fastened to the reel adapter 6000.

Further, as shown in FIG. 183, when the reel unit RU (reel frame R10) is mounted on the reel adapter 6000, the right rear protruding portion R21R (see FIG. 171) of the reel frame R10 is above the reel adapter 6000. It is inserted into the opening 6013 (see FIG. 160) formed by the protrusion 6011, and a part of the right rear protrusion R21R projects rearward of the opening 6013. Similarly, the left rear protruding portion R21L (see FIG. 171) of the reel frame R10 is inserted into the opening 6023 formed by the upper protruding portion 6021 of the reel adapter 6000, and a part of the left rear protruding portion R21L is moved to the rear of the opening 6023. It stands out.

FIG. 184 shows a state in which the reel adapter 6000 and the reel frame R10 are cut at a surface (vertical surface in the front-rear direction) passing through the highest portion of the upper raised portion R21b (see FIG. 171) of the right rear protruding portion R21R. For the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the reel adapter 6000 and the rear end surface of the upper protrusion 6011 (see FIG. 159) are shown in black, the cut surface of the reel frame R10 is shaded, and the right rear protrusion R21R of the reel frame R10 is shown. Of these, the parts other than the cut surface are indicated by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 184, the upper end of the right rear protruding portion R21R is substantially in contact with or close to the lower end of the connecting portion 6011c in the upper protruding portion 6011, and the distance between the upper end of the right rear protruding portion R21R and the lower end of the connecting portion 6011c. Is less than or equal to a predetermined distance (for example, 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.). Although not shown, similarly, the upper end of the left rear protruding portion R21L is substantially in contact with or close to the lower end of the connecting portion 6021c in the upper protruding portion 6021, and the distance between the upper end of the left rear protruding portion R21L and the lower end of the connecting portion 6021c. Is less than or equal to a predetermined distance (for example, 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.). As a result, the upward movement of the right rear protrusion R21R and the left rear protrusion R21L is restricted, and when the reel unit RU (reel frame R10) is mounted on the reel adapter 6000, the vertical displacement is suppressed. At the same time, alignment can be performed.

<Mounting of reel unit RU on middle board 4000>
FIG. 185 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit is mounted on the middle board. FIG. 186 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel unit and the middle board shown in FIG. 185 in a state of being cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reel adapter 6000 is interposed between the middle board 4000 and the reel unit RU, whereas in the sixth embodiment, the reel unit RU is directly mounted on the middle board 4000. It is placed (see FIGS. 95 and 96). FIG. 185 shows a state in which the reel unit RU is mounted on the middle board 4000 in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 185, when the reel unit RU is mounted on the middle board 4000, the right rear protrusion R21R (see FIG. 171) of the reel frame R10 is placed on the right opening standing portion 4032 of the middle board 4000. It is inserted into the formed opening 4033 (see FIG. 173), and a part of the right rear protrusion R21R projects rearward of the opening 4033. Similarly, the left rear protruding portion R21L (see FIG. 171) of the reel frame R10 is inserted into the opening 4053 (see FIG. 173) formed in the standing portion 4052 with the left opening of the middle board 4000, and the left rear protruding portion R21L A part protrudes to the rear of the opening 4053.

FIG. 186 shows a state in which the reel unit RU and the middle board 4000 are cut at a surface (vertical surface in the front-rear direction) passing through the highest portion of the upper raised portion R21b (see FIG. 171) of the right rear protruding portion R21R. For the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the middle board 4000 and the standing portion 4032 with the right opening are shown in black, the back surface of the right mounting wall portion 4001 of the middle board 4000 is shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the reel frame R10 is shown. Is shaded, and the portion of the reel frame R10 on the right rear protruding portion R21R other than the cut surface is indicated by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 186, the upper end of the right rear protruding portion R21R is substantially in contact with or close to the upper edge of the opening 4033, and the distance between the upper end of the right rear protruding portion R21R and the upper edge of the opening 4033 is a predetermined distance (for example). , 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.) or less. Although not shown, similarly, the upper end of the left rear protrusion R21L is substantially in contact with or close to the upper edge of the opening 4053, and the distance between the upper end of the left rear protrusion R21L and the upper edge of the opening 4053 is a predetermined distance (for example). , 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.) or less. As a result, the upward movement of the right rear protrusion R21R and the left rear protrusion R21L is restricted, and when the reel unit RU is mounted on the middle board 4000, the alignment is performed while suppressing the vertical displacement. It can be carried out.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has been described.

<Appendix D>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal, etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that the start lever is operated by the player, and the plurality of reels are used. Detects that the start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels have been pressed by the player, and outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. The operation of the stepping motor is based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the driving force of each reel to each reel, and the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, it draws a lot based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”) A so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected is known.

As such a conventional game machine, a game machine in which the layout of the front door can be easily changed is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-128389).

However, even if the layout of the front door can be easily changed, if the position of the reel (variable display unit) is changed, it is necessary to drastically change the design inside the housing. There was a problem that the cost increased.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily and at low cost to change the position of the variable display unit.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(D-1) A variable display unit (reel unit RU) having a variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A visible area (main display window DD4) that makes the variable display of the variable display unit visible to the player, and
A mounting member (reel adapter 6000) on which the variable display unit is mounted and having a predetermined height, and
It is equipped with an installation unit (middle board 4000) on which the above-mentioned mounting members are installed.
The installation portion and the visible area are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction.
The above-mentioned mounting member is installed in the mounting portion, and the variable display unit is placed on the mounting member.
The vertical position of the variable display unit is fixed so that the variable display unit can be easily viewed via the visible area.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the player displays the variable display of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) via the visible area (main display window DD4). The visible area (main display window DD4) and the installation portion (middle board 4000) are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. A mounting member (reel adapter 6000) is installed in the installation unit (middle board 4000), and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the mounting member (reel adapter 6000). The mounting member (reel adapter 6000) has a predetermined height, and the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) is visible via a visible area (main display window DD4). The vertical position of the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is fixed so that it can be easily seen. That is, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is positioned higher by interposing a mounting member (reel adapter 6000) between the installation unit (middle board 4000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU). This makes it possible to make the arrangement position of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) correspond to the height of the visible area (main display window DD4). Therefore, as a result of using the mounting member (reel adapter 6000), it is possible to create a situation in which the player can easily see the variable display of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR). Therefore, the position of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) can be changed easily and at low cost.

In the seventh embodiment, the visible area (main display window DD4) and the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) are described as being superimposed in front view. “Superimposition” means that the position of at least a part of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) coincides with the visible area (main display window DD4) when viewed from a predetermined direction. This means that at least a part of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) is visible through the visible area (main display window DD4). In the present invention, it is not necessary that the visible area (main display window DD4) and the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) completely match in front view. .. For example, when the player looks down at the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) through the visible area (main display window DD4) from diagonally above ( For example, when the present invention is applied to a game machine in which a large liquid crystal is provided but the reels are small and low (below the liquid crystal), the variable display is displayed when viewed from diagonally above. Since the position of at least a part of the unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) matches the visible area (main display window DD4), the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel) At least a part of the RC and the right reel RR) may be visible through the visible area (main display window DD4). Further, when the player looks up at the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) through the visible area (main display window DD4) from diagonally below ( For example, in the case of applying the present invention to a game machine in which the reel is arranged slightly above the housing (above the liquid crystal), the variable display unit (left reel) when viewed from diagonally below. Since the positions of at least a part of the RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR match the visible area (main display window DD4), the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) At least a part of the right reel RR) may be visible through the visible area (main display window DD4).

In the present invention, when the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) is viewed from the height assumed as the height of the player's line of sight (viewpoint assumed position), the variable display is displayed. The parts (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) should be at a height that makes it easy to see (for example, when the player looks down at the reel, the reel is placed slightly lower than the main display window. It is possible to design the height of the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) so that the reel is arranged slightly higher than the main display window when the player looks up at the reel. Further, in the present invention, by interposing a mounting member (reel adapter 6000), the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is not only positioned upward (raised upward), but is raised as a result of raising (raised). The variable display unit (reel unit RU) may be positioned diagonally upward (compared to the previous case). That is, the mounting surface of the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) has a structure for tilting the variable display unit (reel unit RU), and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is mounted on the mounting surface. When placed, the reels are slightly tilted toward the player's expected viewpoint position so that the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) can be easily seen by the player (for example, It may be configured so that it is arranged so as to be tilted). For example, an inclined portion may be provided on the top surface of the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) (the upper surface of the mounting member may be configured to have an inclination). In this case, the visible area (main display window DD4) may also be arranged in an inclined state. For example, the upper surface of the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) may be configured to have an inclination substantially perpendicular to the inclination of the visible region (main display window DD4).

(D-1') The gaming machine according to (D-1).
The above-mentioned placing member includes a first position defining portion (upper protrusion 6011 and upper protrusion 6021) and a second position defining portion (lower protrusion 6012 and lower protrusion 6022).
The variable display unit includes a third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L).
The installation portion includes a fourth position defining portion (standing portion 4032 with a right opening and standing portion 4052 with a left opening).
The first position defining unit and the third position defining portion define the relative positions of the above-mentioned placing member and the variable display unit within a predetermined range.
The second position defining part and the fourth position defining part define the relative positions of the above-mentioned mounting member and the installation part within a predetermined range.
When the variable display unit is installed on the installation unit without using the above-mentioned placing member, the third position defining unit and the fourth position defining unit are relative to the variable display unit and the installation unit. Position can be specified within a predetermined range,
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) has a first position defining portion (upper protruding portion 6011 and an upper protruding portion 6021) and a second position defining portion (lower protruding portion). The variable display unit (reel unit RU) is provided with a third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L), and the installation portion (middle board 4000) is provided with 6012 and a lower protruding portion 6022). , A fourth position defining portion (standing portion 4032 with right opening and standing portion 4052 with left opening) is provided. The first position defining portion (upper protrusion 6011 and upper protrusion 6021) and the third position defining portion (right rear protrusion R21R and left rear protrusion R21L) are a mounting member (reel adapter 6000) and a variable display unit (reel adapter 6000). The position relative to the reel unit RU) is defined within a predetermined range, and the second position defining portion (lower protrusion 6012 and lower protrusion 6022) and the fourth position defining portion (standing with a right opening) are defined. The portion 4032 and the standing portion 4052 with an opening on the left side) define the relative positions of the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) and the installation portion (middle board 4000) within a predetermined range. As a result, the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) uses the first position defining portion (upper protrusion 6011 and upper protrusion 6021) and the third position defining portion (right rear protrusion R21R and left rear protrusion R21L). And the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be aligned, and the second position defining part (lower protrusion 6012 and lower protrusion 6022) and the fourth position defining part (standing with right opening). The mounting member (reel adapter 6000) and the mounting portion (middle board 4000) can be aligned by using the setting portion 4032 and the standing portion 4052 with a left opening. Here, if the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is installed on the installation unit (middle board 4000) without the mounting member (reel adapter 6000), the third position defining unit (right rear protrusion) The variable display unit (reel unit RU) and the installation unit (middle board 4000) are the portion R21R and the left rear protrusion R21L) and the fourth position defining portion (right side opening standing portion 4032 and left side opening standing portion 4052). It is possible to specify the relative position with and within a predetermined range. As a result, in this case, the third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L) and the fourth position defining portion (right side opening standing portion 4032 and left opening standing portion 4052) are formed. It can be used to align the variable display unit (reel unit RU) and the installation unit (middle board 4000). Therefore, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be arranged on the installation portion (middle board 4000) via the mounting member (reel adapter 6000), while via the mounting member (reel adapter 6000). It is also possible to place it directly on the installation part (middle board 4000) without any need. Therefore, regardless of the position change (presence or absence of mounting member (reel adapter 6000)) of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR), the common variable display unit (reel unit RU) and It is possible to use the installation unit (middle board 4000), and the position of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) can be changed more easily and further cost. You can try to go down.

(D-2) A variable display unit (reel unit RU) having a variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A visible area (main display window DD4) that makes the variable display of the variable display unit visible to the player, and
An installation unit (middle board 4000) arranged below the visible area by a predetermined distance, and
An intervening member (reel adapter 6000) arranged between the variable display unit and the installation portion is provided.
The intervening member has a height corresponding to the predetermined distance, and has a height corresponding to the predetermined distance.
The intervening member is installed in the installation portion, and the variable display unit is arranged on the intervening member.
The intervening member has recesses (upper left recess 6030L, middle upper recess 6030C, and right upper recess 6030R) on the upper surface, and ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) on the bottom surface on the back side of the recess. The length of the provided rib is shorter than the length of the rib provided on the back side of the region where the recess is not formed.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the player displays the variable display of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) via the visible area (main display window DD4). The installation unit (middle board 4000) is arranged below the visible area (main display window DD4) by a predetermined distance. An intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is installed in the installation portion (middle board 4000), and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the intervening member (reel adapter 6000). Here, since the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) has a height corresponding to the predetermined distance, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) (variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and) The arrangement position of the right reel RR)) can be made to correspond to the height of the visible area (main display window DD4). Therefore, as a result of using the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), it is possible to create a situation in which the player can easily see the variable display of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR). Yes, the position of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) can be changed easily and at low cost. Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is provided with recesses (upper left recess 6030L, middle upper recess 6030C, and right upper recess 6030R) on the upper surface, and the bottom surface. Ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) are provided on the back side of the recesses (upper left recess 6030L, middle upper surface recess 6030C, and right upper surface recess 6030R), and the ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) are provided. ) Is the length of the ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) provided on the back side of the region where the recesses (upper left recess 6030L, middle upper recess 6030C, and right upper recess 6030R) are not formed. It is shorter than the length. In this regard, a variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), and the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) receives a corresponding load associated with the variable display unit (reel unit RU). Although it occurs, the present inventor forms recesses (upper left recess 6030L, middle upper recess 6030C, and right upper recess 6030R) and ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) in such an manner. It has been found that sufficient strength can be obtained to withstand the load. Further, the present inventor has made the ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) different in length in such an manner, so that the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) can be used at the molding stage of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000). Was found to be easier to remove from the mold. As a result, the strength of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) can be improved while efficiently molding the intervening member (reel adapter 6000).

(D-2') The gaming machine according to (D-2).
The intervening member includes a first position defining portion (upper protrusion 6011 and upper protrusion 6021) and a second position defining portion (lower protrusion 6012 and lower protrusion 6022).
The variable display unit includes a third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L).
The installation portion includes a fourth position defining portion (standing portion 4032 with a right opening and standing portion 4052 with a left opening).
One of the first position defining portion and the third position defining portion can be inserted into the other.
One of the second positioning portion and the fourth positioning portion can be inserted into the other.
When the variable display unit is installed on the installation portion without using the intervening member, either one of the third position defining portion and the fourth position defining portion can be inserted into the other. ,
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) includes a first position defining portion (upper protruding portion 6011 and an upper protruding portion 6021) and a second position defining portion (lower protruding portion 6012). The variable display unit (reel unit RU) is provided with a third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L), and the installation portion (middle board 4000) is provided with a lower protruding portion 6022). It is provided with a fourth position defining portion (standing portion 4032 with right opening and standing portion 4052 with left opening). One of the first positioning portion (upper protruding portion 6011 and upper protruding portion 6021) and the third positioning portion (right rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L) can be inserted into the other. One of the second position defining part (lower protrusion 6012 and lower protrusion 6022) and the fourth position defining part (right side opening standing part 4032 and left side opening standing part 4052) is the other. Can be inserted into. As a result, by using the first position defining portion (upper protrusion 6011 and upper protrusion 6021) and the third position defining portion (right rear protrusion R21R and left rear protrusion R21L) (by inserting one into the other). ), The intervening member (reel adapter 6000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be aligned, and the second position defining portion (lower protruding portion 6012 and lower protruding portion 6022) and the second position are defined. Intervening member (reel adapter 6000) and installation part (middle board 4000) using four position defining parts (standing part 4032 with right opening and standing part 4052 with left opening) (by inserting one into the other) It can be aligned with. Here, if the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is installed on the installation portion (middle board 4000) without the intervention member (reel adapter 6000), the third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion) One of the R21R and the left rear protrusion R21L) and the fourth position defining portion (right side opening standing portion 4032 and left side opening standing portion 4052) can be inserted into the other. As a result, in this case, the third position defining portion (right side rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L) and the fourth position defining portion (right side opening standing portion 4032 and left side opening standing portion 4052) are formed. It can be used (by inserting one into the other) to align the variable display unit (reel unit RU) with the installation unit (middle board 4000). Therefore, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be arranged on the installation portion (middle board 4000) via the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), but without intervening member (reel adapter 6000). It is also possible to place it directly on the installation part (middle board 4000). Therefore, regardless of the position change (presence or absence of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000)) of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR), the common variable display unit (reel unit RU) and installation. It is possible to use the unit (middle board 4000), and the position of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) can be changed more easily, and the cost is further reduced. Can be planned.

In the seventh embodiment, the third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L) can be inserted into the first position defining portion (upper protruding portion 6011 and upper protruding portion 6021), and the second position. The defining portion (lower protruding portion 6012 and lower protruding portion 6022) can be inserted into the fourth position defining portion (standing portion 4032 with right opening and standing portion 4052 with left opening), and the third positioning portion (3rd position defining portion ( It has been described that the right rear protruding portion R21R and the left rear protruding portion R21L) can be inserted into the fourth position defining portion (right side opening standing portion 4032 and left side opening standing portion 4052). In the present invention, the first position defining portion (structure protruding in a predetermined direction) may be inserted into the third position defining portion (opening or recess), or the fourth position defining portion (projecting in a predetermined direction) may be inserted. The structure) may be inserted into the second position defining portion (opening or recess), or the fourth position defining portion (structure protruding in a predetermined direction) may be inserted into the third position defining portion (opening or recess). It may be insertable.

(D-3) A plurality of variable display units (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and a plurality of drive units for driving each of the variable display units. A variable display unit (reel unit RU) having a (motor drive unit) and a plurality of support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) that support each of the drive units.
An installation unit (middle board 4000) arranged below the variable display unit, and
An intervening member (reel adapter 6000) arranged between the variable display unit and the installation portion is provided.
The intervening member is installed on the installation portion, and the variable display unit is arranged on the intervening member.
On the upper part of the intervening member, three recesses, a first recess (upper left recess 6030L), a second recess (middle upper surface recess 6030C), and a third recess (right upper surface recess 6030R), are formed in the left-right direction. Formed to line up,
In the upper part of the intervening member, between the first recess and the second recess, between the second recess and the third recess, and the second recess in the third recess. On the opposite side to each other, a recess non-forming region (recess non-forming region 6001b, recess non-forming region 6001c, and recess non-forming region 6001d) in which the recess is not formed is formed.
The plurality of variable display units are respectively positioned above the recess, and the plurality of support members are respectively positioned above the recess non-forming region.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the installation portion (middle board 4000) is arranged below the variable display unit (reel unit RU), and the intervening member (reel) is placed on the installation portion (middle board 4000). The adapter 6000) is installed, and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the intervening member (reel adapter 6000). As a result, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is positioned upward by the height of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) as compared with the case where the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is not installed. That is, by interposing an intervening member (reel adapter 6000) between the installation unit (middle board 4000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU), the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right). The effect of raising the position of the reel RR) has been obtained, which makes it possible to easily and inexpensively change the position of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR). it can. Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the upper portion of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) has a first recess (upper left recess 6030L), a second recess (middle upper surface recess 6030C), and , A third recess (right upper surface recess 6030R) is formed so as to be arranged in the left-right direction. As a result, the wall portion can be provided in the height direction of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), and the strength of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) can be improved. Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, in the upper part of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), between the first recess (upper left recess 6030L) and the second recess (middle upper surface recess 6030C). , Between the second recess (middle upper surface recess 6030C) and the third recess (right upper surface recess 6030R), and with the second recess (middle upper surface recess 6030C) in the third recess (right upper surface recess 6030R). On the opposite side, a recess non-forming region (recess non-forming region 6001b, a recess non-forming region 6001c, and a recess non-forming region 6001d) in which no recess is formed are formed, respectively. Here, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) includes a plurality of variable display units (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) and each variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and A plurality of drive units (motor drive units) for driving the right reel RR) and a plurality of support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor) that support each drive unit (motor drive unit). The frame R50R) and the plurality of variable display units (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) have recesses (upper left surface recess 6030L, middle upper surface recess 6030C, and right), respectively. The plurality of support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) are positioned above the upper surface recess 6030R), and the recess non-forming region (recess non-forming region 6001b, recess non-forming region 6001b, recess non-forming, respectively). It is positioned above the region 6001c and the recess non-forming region 6001d). The support member (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) supports the drive unit (motor drive unit), and the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) supports the support member (left motor frame R50L). , Middle motor frame R50C and right motor frame R50R), a corresponding load is generated by the drive unit (motor drive unit), but the support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C) , And the right motor frame R50R) is positioned above the recess non-forming region (recess non-forming region 6001b, recess non-forming region 6001c, and recess non-forming region 6001d), so that the load is concentrated locally. It is possible to prevent this. As a result, the load can be dispersed and the support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) (drive unit (motor drive unit)) can be supported in a well-balanced manner.

(D-4) A variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and a support member (left motor frame R50L, middle) that supports the variable display unit. A variable display unit (reel unit RU) having a motor frame R50C and a right motor frame R50R), an accommodating portion (reel frame R10) accommodating the variable display unit and the support member, and
An installation unit (middle board 4000) arranged below the variable display unit, and
An intervening member (reel adapter 6000) arranged between the variable display unit and the installation portion is provided.
The intervening member is installed on the installation portion, and the variable display unit is arranged on the intervening member.
A plurality of recesses (left front upper recess 6060L, middle front upper recess 6060C, and right front upper recess 6060R) are formed on the front surface side of the intervening member.
The support member is attached to the accommodating portion by using an attachment member (fastening member R100L, 100C, 100R).
Mounting holes (mounting holes R54 and mounting holes R14) through which at least a part of the mounting members are inserted are formed in the support member and the housing portion, respectively.
A part of the mounting member through which the mounting hole is inserted is arranged in the recess.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the installation portion (middle board 4000) is arranged below the variable display unit (reel unit RU), and the intervening member (reel) is placed on the installation portion (middle board 4000). The adapter 6000) is installed, and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the intervening member (reel adapter 6000). As a result, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is positioned upward by the height of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) as compared with the case where the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is not installed. That is, by interposing an intervening member (reel adapter 6000) between the installation unit (middle board 4000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU), the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right). The effect of raising the position of the reel RR) has been obtained, which makes it possible to easily and inexpensively change the position of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR). it can. Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is a support member (left) that supports the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR). Motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R), variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) and support member (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, It also has an accommodating portion (reel frame R10) for accommodating the right motor frame R50R), and the support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) are support members (reel frame R50R). Partially inserted into the mounting holes (mounting holes R54 and mounting holes R14) formed in the left motor frame R50L, the middle motor frame R50C, and the right motor frame R50R) and the accommodating portion (reel frame R10), respectively. It is attached to the accommodating portion (reel frame R10) by using an attachment member (fastening member R100L, 100C, 100R). As a result, when the support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) are attached to the accommodating portion (reel frame R10), the mounting holes (mounting holes R54 and mounting holes R14) A part of the mounting member (fastening member R100L, 100C, 100R) through which the above is inserted is in a state of protruding in the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Here, if a recess is not formed at a position corresponding to the mounting hole (mounting hole R54 and mounting hole R14) on the front side of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), the protruding mounting member Intervening member (reel adapter 6000) and variable display unit (reel unit RU) (support member (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and middle motor frame R50C, and) in order to secure the arrangement space of (fastening members R100L, 100C, 100R). , Right motor frame R50R) or accommodating portion (reel frame R10)) must be separated to some extent. However, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, there are a plurality of recesses (left front upper recess 6060L, middle front upper recess 6060C, and right front upper recess 6060C) on the front side of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000). 6060R) is formed, and a part of the mounting member (fastening member R100L, 100C, 100R) through which the mounting hole (mounting hole R54 and mounting hole R14) is inserted is the recess (left front upper recess 6060L). , The middle front upper recess 6060C and the right front upper recess 6060R) are arranged (stored). Therefore, the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) (support member (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) or accommodating portion (reel frame R10)) Even if these are arranged in contact with each other, the recesses (left front upper recess 6060L, middle front upper recess 6060C, and right front upper recess 6060R) are attached to the mounting members (fastening members R100L, 100C, 100R). Since it can be used as an arrangement space, it is possible to realize such an arrangement in a contact state. As a result, the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be fixed in contact with each other, and the variable display unit (reel unit) with respect to the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) can be fixed. The mounting strength of RU) can be increased.

In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that Nifratch (registered trademark) is used as the mounting member (fastening member R100L, 100C, 100R). In the present invention, in addition to general screws (screws), conventionally known mounting members such as (button type) panel fasteners can be appropriately adopted.

In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the number of reels adopted as the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) is three. However, in the present invention, the number of reels is not limited to this, and may be one, two, or four or more. Further, the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) may be provided with a number of recesses (upper surface recesses 6030) corresponding to the number of reels (the same number as the number of reels).

Further, the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) in the present invention includes four reels in a housing on the premise that three reels are arranged when one reel is added (for example, three reels are arranged). It may be used for (when repairing to the mounted housing). In such a case, although the original housing has an installation part for installing three reels, the addition is made because there is no installation part for installing one additional reel. It may be necessary to provide an installation part for installing one reel to be added, or it may be necessary to adjust the height of one additional reel. In such a case, a mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) may be used for the arrangement portion of the reel to be added.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the variable display unit (reel unit RU) includes a main reel (variable display unit regarding the progress of the game and winning a prize), and the height of the main reel is adjusted. However, in the present invention, in order to adjust the height of the effect reel (variable display device for effect, sub reel) that does not affect the winning, the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is used as in the seventh embodiment. ) Etc. may be used. Further, the mechanism may be adopted for the effect reel (reel that produces an effect such as suggesting the degree of expectation regarding the game) in the pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is mounted on the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000). However, in the present invention, a game machine component other than the variable display unit (reel unit RU) may be mounted on a pedestal mechanism similar to the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000). For example, a height adjusting mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) having the same function as that of the seventh embodiment is used so that the movable decorative unit for directing and the like can be easily seen by the player. May be. The movable decorative portion may move only inside the game machine, or may move from the inside of the game machine to the outside (upper or front of the game machine, etc.). In this way, by adjusting the height of the arrangement of various game machine components using the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000), the housing of the pachislot game machine and the game machine frame of the pachinko game machine (outside). Since it is not necessary to make a major design change of the frame and the main body frame, it is possible to reduce the cost when creating a new game machine.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is arranged on the installation portion (middle board 4000). The installation portion in the present invention is not limited to the middle board, and a member on which a mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) can be installed can be appropriately adopted. For example, a bottom plate of a housing (cabinet) is adopted as an installation portion, a mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is installed on the bottom plate, and the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is placed on the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000). A variable display unit (reel unit RU) may be mounted. Further, in the present invention, when the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is installed on a member other than the middle board, the middle board may not be provided in the housing (cabinet). For example, in a managed game machine that can be played only by using the game value managed by electronic data without using a game medium such as a medal, parts such as a hopper are unnecessary. In this case, a middle board is used. A mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) may be installed on the bottom plate of the housing without the provision.

In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the installation portion (middle board 4000) is attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and is fixed to the right side wall G2R and the left side wall G2L. In the present invention, the installation portion (middle board 4000) may be fixed to any of the plates (back plate, left and right plates, bottom plate, etc.) constituting the housing (cabinet), for example, the back wall G3. It may be attached only to the right side wall G2R and the left side wall G2L, or may be attached to only one of them.

Another example of the installation part in the present invention is a middle door. The middle door is a small door (a door placed between the front door and the cabinet) that is placed behind the front door (front door), and is configured to be rotatable with respect to the front door and has a variable display. A unit (reel unit RU) is mounted. In this example, a mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is mounted on an installation portion provided on the middle door, and a variable display unit (reel unit RU) is mounted on the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000). May be placed.

[8th Embodiment]
The first to seventh embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the eighth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first to seventh embodiments also applies to the eighth embodiment will be omitted.

<Lumbar panel 7000>
FIG. 187 is a front view of the lumbar panel. FIG. 188 is a perspective view of the lumbar panel as viewed from the front. FIG. 189 is a perspective view of the lumbar panel as viewed from the rear. FIG. 190 is an exploded perspective view of the lumbar panel as viewed from the front. FIG. 191 is an exploded perspective view of the lumbar panel as viewed from the rear.

In the first embodiment, it has been described that the lower door mechanism DD (see FIG. 1) is provided with the lumbar panel DD18 (see FIG. 3). On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the lumbar panel 7000 shown in FIG. 187 is provided in the region below the center of the front door.

As shown in FIGS. 187 to 191, the lumbar panel 7000 includes a lower panel film 7100, a lower panel base 7200, a lower panel frame 7300 (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L), and a lower panel back 7400. The lower panel lower 7500, the lower panel right 7600, and the lower panel left 7700 are provided.

The lower panel base 7200 is arranged on the front side of the lower panel film 7100, the lower panel frame 7300 is arranged on the front side of the lower panel base 7200, and the lower panel back 7400 is arranged on the back side of the lower panel film 7100. , The lower panel lower 7500 is arranged on the back side in the lower portion of the lower panel back 7400. Further, the lower panel right 7600 and the lower panel left 7700 constitute a right side portion and a left side portion (right side wall and left side wall) of the lumbar panel 7000, respectively. Although not shown, a light emitting mechanism in which a plurality of LEDs are installed on an LED substrate may be arranged on the back side of the lower panel back 7400 and above the lower panel lower 7500.

The lower panel base 7200 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin) and is decorated in the shape of a three-dimensional shape (for example, a character shape indicating a logo or the like according to the model) (not shown). There is. The lower panel film 7100 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin) and is provided with a pattern or pattern (for example, a pattern or pattern corresponding to the decoration applied to the lower panel base 7200) which is not shown. There is. The lower panel film 7100 can be formed by printing a light-shielding ink on a pattern printing sheet.

Similar to the lower panel film 7100 and the lower panel base 7200, the lower panel back 7400, the lower panel lower 7500, the lower panel right 7600, and the lower panel left 7700 also have translucency. On the other hand, the lower panel frame 7300 does not have translucency, and the portion of the lower panel film 7100 and the lower panel base 7200 that overlaps with the lower panel frame 7300 in front view is the lower panel frame 7300. It is covered and invisible. In FIG. 187, the lower panel frame 7300 is shown in black. The lower panel frame 7300 is three-dimensionally decorated with irregularities.

<Lower panel film 7100>
FIG. 192 is a perspective view of the lower panel film viewed from slightly above. FIG. 193 is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel film. FIG. 194 is a schematic view of a cut surface of the lower panel film shown in FIG. 193. FIG. 195 is a perspective view showing a state in which the lower panel frame is arranged on the front side of the lower panel film shown in FIG. 192.

As shown in FIGS. 192 to 194, the lower panel film 7100 has a curved shape of a flexible flat sheet. FIG. 193 shows a state in which the lower panel film 7100 is cut on a horizontal plane, and the cut surface is shown thick for easy understanding.

Specifically, the lower panel film 7100 includes a central portion 7101 extending to the left and right, and a right curved portion 7102 formed having a curved shape from the right end (point A shown in FIG. 193) of the central portion 7101 to the rear. , From the left curved portion 7103 formed with a curved shape from the left end (point B shown in FIG. 193) of the central portion 7101 and the right end (rear end: point C shown in FIG. 193) of the right curved portion 7102. It has a right rear portion 7104 extending rearward and a left rear portion 7105 extending rearward from the left end (rear end: point D shown in FIG. 193) of the left curved portion 7103.

The lower panel film 7100 has a shape that is substantially symmetrical except that a notch 7102a is formed in the upper part of the right curved portion 7102. Further, the central portion 7101, the right curved portion 7102, and the left curved portion 7103 are each curved so that the center of curvature is on the back side. The central portion 7101 is only slightly curved, and the curvatures of the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103 are considerably larger than the curvature of the central portion 7101. For example, the radius of curvature of the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103 is 1/5 or less (or 1/10 or less, 1/20 or less, 1/50 or less, 1/100 or less, etc.) of the radius of curvature of the central portion 7101. ).

The curvature is a quantity that represents the degree of bending of a curved surface or a curved surface, but the degree of local bending can be approximated to a circle, and the radius of the approximated circle is called the radius of curvature. For example, the radius of curvature of the circumference of radius r is 1 / r, and the radius of curvature is r. The tighter the curve, the larger the curvature and the smaller the radius of curvature. The radius of curvature can be represented by the radius of the arc when the curve is an arc, while the radius of curvature is represented by a predetermined function representing the degree of bending of the curve when the curve is different from the arc. Can be done.

The curvature at any position on the right-curved portion 7102 and at any position on the left-curved portion 7103 is greater than the curvature at any position on the central portion 7101. Correspondingly, the length in the left-right direction of the right curved portion 7102 and the length in the left-right direction of the left curved portion 7103 (r2 shown in FIG. 194 (a)) are the lengths in the left-right direction of the central portion 7101. While shorter than r1) shown in FIG. 194 (a), the length in the front-rear direction of the right curved portion 7102 and the length in the front-rear direction of the left curved portion 7103 (r4 shown in FIG. It is longer than the length in the front-rear direction (r3 shown in FIG. 194 (a)) in the central portion 7101.

Further, a straight line (L2 (Y) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) perpendicular to the tangent line (L1 (Y) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) at an arbitrary point Y on the right curved portion 7102 and the front-back direction. The angle (β shown in FIG. 194 (b)) with the straight line (L shown in FIG. 194 (b)) is a tangent line at an arbitrary point X on the central portion 7101 (L1 (X) shown in FIG. 194 (b)). ) From the angle (α shown in FIG. 194 (b)) formed by the straight line (L2 (X) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) and the straight line in the front-rear direction (L shown in FIG. 194 (b)). Is also getting bigger.

Similarly, although not shown, the angle formed by the straight line perpendicular to the tangent at any point on the left curved portion 7103 and the straight line in the front-rear direction (L shown in FIG. 194 (b)) is on the central portion 7101. A straight line perpendicular to the tangent line (L1 (X) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) at an arbitrary point X (L2 (X) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) and a straight line in the front-rear direction (in FIG. 194 (b)). It is larger than the angle formed by L) (α shown in FIG. 194 (b)).

FIG. 195 shows the lower panel film 7100 and the lower panel frame 7300 (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) in a state where the lumbar panel 7000 is assembled while maintaining their relative positional relationships. Therefore, the illustration of other components is omitted. For the sake of clarity, the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L are shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 195, the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L are arranged at positions where they overlap with a part of the right bending portion 7102 and the left bending portion 7103 of the lower panel film 7100 in front view, respectively. There is. As a result, a part of the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103 is hidden.

<Lower panel base 7200>
FIG. 196 is a perspective view of the lower panel base as viewed from the front and slightly above. FIG. 197 is a perspective view of the lower panel base viewed from diagonally below. FIG. 198 is a perspective view of the lower panel base as viewed from the rear and slightly above. FIG. 199 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the lower panel base viewed from the rear and slightly below.

As shown in FIGS. 196 to 198, the lower panel base 7200 has a main body portion 7210 having a curved shape corresponding to the lower panel film 7100, and a lower side portion 7220 formed by bending the lower end of the main body portion 7210 rearward. And have.

The lower side portion 7220 is a first inclined portion 7221 formed continuously from the lower end of the main body portion 7210 toward the diagonally rearward, and a first inclined portion 7221 which is continuously formed from the rear end of the first inclined portion 7221 toward the diagonally rearward. It has a second inclined portion 7222 formed so as to have a gentler inclination than 7221, and a horizontal portion 7223 formed continuously from the rear end of the second inclined portion 7222 toward the rear. The horizontal portion 7223 is arranged substantially horizontally. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 197, the first inclined portion 7221 is shaded, the second inclined portion 7222 is indicated by an oblique line, and the horizontal portion 7223 is shown in black.

The main body 7210 has a central portion 7211 extending to the left and right, a right curved portion 7212 formed to have a curved shape from the right end to the rear of the central portion 7211, and a curved shape from the left end to the rear of the central portion 7211. 7213, a right rear portion 7214 extending from the right end to the rear of the right curved portion 7212, and a left rear portion 7215 extending from the left end to the rear of the left curved portion 7213. ing.

In the state where the lumbar panel 7000 is assembled, the central portion 7211, the right curved portion 7212, the left curved portion 7213, the right rear portion 7214, and the left rear portion 7215 are the central portion 7101 and the right curved portion 7101 of the lower panel film 7100, respectively. It is arranged so as to face (overlap in front view) the portion 7102, the left curved portion 7103, the right rear portion 7104, and the left rear portion 7105 (see FIG. 192).

Three screw holes 7230 (screw holes 7230a, 7230b, 7230c) are formed in the right curved portion 7212, and one temporary fixing hole 7235 is formed. Three screw holes 7240 (screw holes 7240a, 7240b, 7240c) are formed in the left curved portion 7213, and one temporary fixing hole 7245 is formed. These screw holes 7230 and screw holes 7240, as well as temporary fixing holes 7235 and temporary fixing holes 7245 are formed as through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 199, a peripheral wall portion 7231 is formed around the screw hole 7230 at a position recessed with respect to the back surface 7216 of the main body portion 7210. In other words, the vicinity of the screw hole 7230 has a shape in which a concave circular recess 7232 is formed with respect to the back surface 7216 and an opening is formed by penetrating a part of the recess 7232. The opening corresponds to the screw hole 7230, and the portion of the recess 7232 where the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral wall portion 7231.

Further, around the temporary fixing hole 7235, a peripheral wall portion 7236 is formed at a position recessed with respect to the back surface 7216 of the main body portion 7210. In other words, the vicinity of the temporary fixing hole 7235 has a shape in which an elliptical recess 7237 is formed with respect to the back surface 7216 and an opening is formed by penetrating a part of the recess 7237. There is. The opening corresponds to the temporary fixing hole 7235, and the portion of the recess 7237 where the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral wall portion 7236.

Regarding the point that the recesses are formed around the screw hole 7230 and around the temporary fixing hole 7235 as described above, the circumference of the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 and the lid fastening screw hole described in the sixth embodiment The same description as in which a recess is formed around B1002 (see FIG. 114) is valid. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 199 shows the peripheral wall portion 7231 and the peripheral wall portion 7236 with diagonal lines. Although not shown, similarly, a recess 7242 and a recess 7247 are formed around the screw hole 7240 and around the temporary fixing hole 7245, respectively.

Further, the lower panel base 7200 has an upper edge portion 7250 formed by slightly bending the upper end of the main body portion 7210 rearward. The upper edge portion 7250 has a locking protrusion 7251 (right side locking protrusion 7251R and left side locking protrusion 7251L) formed by projecting a part of the right side and the left side from the center to the rear. are doing.

The right-side locking protrusion 7251R and the left-side locking protrusion 7251L are each formed in a rectangular shape with rounded corners and are arranged substantially horizontally. Further, the right-side locking protrusion 7251R and the left-side locking protrusion 7251L each have a rectangular-shaped through hole penetrating in the vertical direction as a locking hole 7252 (right-side locking hole 7252R and left-side locking). The hole 7252L) is formed.

Further, the lower panel base 7200 has a horizontal portion 7217 formed continuously from the lower end of the central portion 7211 (rear surface 7216) toward the rear. The horizontal portion 7217 is arranged in a substantially horizontal direction. For clarity, the horizontal portion 7217 is shaded in FIG. 198.

The lower side portion 7220 has a right side portion 7225 formed by slightly bending the right end upward and outward, and a left side portion 7226 formed by bending the left end upward and outward. A boss portion 7233 is formed on the front portion of the right side portion 7225 (below the right curved portion 7212), and a boss portion 7243 is formed on the front portion of the left side portion 7226 (below the left curved portion 7213).

The right rear portion 7214 has an upper right edge portion 7214a and a lower right edge portion 7214b formed by slightly bending the rear end to the right. The upper right edge portion 7214a and the lower right edge portion 7214b are vertically separated from each other. The left rear portion 7215 has an upper left edge portion 7215a and a lower left edge portion 7215b formed by slightly bending the rear end to the left. The upper left edge portion 7215a and the lower left edge portion 7215b are vertically separated from each other.

Screw holes 7234 (screw holes 7234) are formed in the upper part of the upper right edge portion 7214a, the upper part of the lower right edge portion 7214b, and the portion protruding to the right from the upper right end of the lower portion 7220 (the forming position of the boss portion 7233). Screw holes 7234a, 7234b, 7234c) are formed. Screw holes 7244 (screw holes 7244) are formed in the upper part of the upper left edge portion 7215a, the upper part of the lower left edge portion 7215b, and the portion protruding to the left from the upper left end of the lower portion 7220 (the forming position of the boss portion 7243). Screw holes 7244a, 7244b, 7244c) are formed.

Further, at the rear end of the lower portion 7220, two locking pieces 7260 that project rearward and are bent downward are formed. The lumbar panel 7000 is attached to the front door by locking the locking piece 7260 to the front door. A notch 7212a is formed in the upper part of the right curved portion 7212. The notch 7212a has a shape similar to the notch 7102a (see FIG. 192) of the lower panel film 7100, and is arranged so as to overlap the notch 7102a.

<7400 behind the lower panel>
FIG. 200 is a perspective view of the back of the lower panel as viewed from slightly above. FIG. 201 is a perspective view of the lower panel film as viewed from the rear. FIG. 202 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the back of the lower panel as viewed from the rear and slightly below.

As shown in FIG. 200, the lower panel back 7400 has a curved shape corresponding to the lower panel film 7100. Specifically, the lower panel back 7400 has a central portion 7401 extending to the left and right, a right curved portion 7402 formed with a curved shape from the right end to the rear of the central portion 7401, and a left end to the rear of the central portion 7401. Left curved portion 7403 formed with a curved shape, right rear portion 7404 extending from the right end to the rear of the right curved portion 7402, and left rear portion 7405 extending from the left end to the rear of the left curved portion 7403. And have.

In the state where the lumbar panel 7000 is assembled, the central portion 7401, the right curved portion 7402, the left curved portion 7403, the right rear portion 7404, and the left rear portion 7405 are the central portion 7101 and the right curved portion of the lower panel film 7100, respectively. It is arranged so as to face (overlap in front view) the portion 7102, the left curved portion 7103, the right rear portion 7104, and the left rear portion 7105 (see FIG. 192).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the lower panel back 7400 has an upper edge portion 7450 formed by slightly bending the upper end rearward. The upper edge portion 7450 has a locking protrusion 7451 (right side locking protrusion 7451R and left locking protrusion 7451L) formed by projecting a part of the right side and the left side from the center to the rear. are doing.

The right-side locking protrusion 7451R and the left-side locking protrusion 7451L are each formed in a rectangular shape with rounded corners and are arranged substantially horizontally. Further, locking pieces 7452 (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L) are formed on the right side locking protrusion 7251R and the left side locking protrusion 7251L, respectively. The right side locking piece 7452R and the left side locking piece 7452L are formed in a rectangular shape in a plan view as protrusions erected on the upper surface 7451a of the right side locking protrusion 7451R and the left side locking protrusion 7451L, respectively. ing.

Further, the lower panel back 7400 has a horizontal portion 7411 formed continuously from the lower end of the central portion 7401 (back surface 7410) toward the rear, and a vertical portion formed substantially perpendicular to the horizontal portion 7411 below the horizontal portion 7411. It has a part 7412 and. The horizontal portion 7411 is arranged in the substantially horizontal direction, and the vertical portion 7412 is arranged in the substantially vertical direction. For clarity, the horizontal portion 7411 is shaded in FIG. 201.

A plurality of posterior projecting portions 7413 are formed at substantially equal intervals on the back surface side of the vertical portion 7412. The posterior projecting portion 7413 is formed as a protrusion projecting rearward from the vertical portion 7412, and extends in the vertical direction. The trailing edge of the horizontal portion 7411 and the posterior protruding portion 7413 are continuously formed and positioned on substantially the same plane.

A notch 7402a is formed in the upper part of the right curved portion 7402. The notch 7402a has a shape similar to the notch 7102a of the lower panel film 7100, and is arranged so as to overlap the notch 7102a.

<Lower panel frame 7300>
FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the lower panel frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 204 is a rear view of the lower panel frame.

As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, the lower panel frame 7300 (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) each has a columnar shape extending in the vertical direction.

On the back side of the lower right panel frame 7300R, three screw fastening boss portions 7310 (screw fastening boss portions 7310a, 7310b, 7310c) are formed, and one temporary fixing boss portion 7315 is formed. .. On the back side of the lower left panel frame 7300L, three screw fastening boss portions 7320 (screw fastening boss portions 7320a, 7320b, 7320c) are formed, and one temporary fixing boss portion 7325 is formed.

A notch 7301 is formed in the upper part of the lower right panel frame 7300R. The notch 7301 has a shape similar to the notch 7102a (see FIG. 192) of the lower panel film 7100, and is arranged so as to overlap the notch 7102a.

<Lower panel lower 7500>
FIG. 205 is a perspective view of the lower part of the lower panel as viewed from the front. FIG. 206 is a perspective view of the lower part of the lower panel as viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the lower panel lower 7500 is formed as a member extending in the left-right direction, and has a front side portion 7501 formed in a substantially vertical direction and an obliquely rearward portion from the upper end of the front side portion 7501. The first inclined portion 7502 formed continuously toward the rear, the upper portion 7503 formed continuously from the rear end of the first inclined portion 7502 toward the rear, and formed substantially horizontally, and diagonally rearward from the lower end of the front side portion 7501. A second inclined portion 7504 formed continuously toward the surface, and a second inclined portion 7504 formed so as to have a gentler inclination than the second inclined portion 7504, which is continuously formed from the rear end of the second inclined portion 7504 toward the rear diagonally. It has three inclined portions 7505 and a lower portion 7506 formed continuously from the rear end of the third inclined portion 7505 toward the rear in a substantially horizontal direction.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 205, the front surface 7501a of the front side portion 7501 is shown by diagonal lines, and the upper surface of the upper side portion 7503 is shaded. In FIG. 206, the upper surface of the upper portion 7503 is shown by diagonal lines, the upper surface of the lower portion 7506 is shown by shading, and the back surface 7501b of the front side portion 7501 (the surface opposite to the front surface 7501a) is shown in black.

An L-shaped right side portion 7510 is formed at the right end of the lower panel lower 7500, and an inverted L-shaped left side portion 7520 is formed at the left end of the lower panel lower 7500. The right edge bent portion 7511, which is a portion of the right side portion 7510 extending in the front-rear direction, has a shape formed by slightly bending the right end of the lower portion 7506 to the right. Similarly, the left edge bent portion 7521, which is a portion of the left side portion 7520 extending in the front-rear direction, has a shape formed by slightly bending the left end of the lower portion 7506 to the left side.

A screw hole 7512 is formed in the upper portion of the right side portion 7510 (near the right end of the upper portion 7503), and a screw hole 7522 is formed in the upper portion of the left side portion 7520 (near the left end of the upper side portion 7503).

<Lower panel right 7600 and lower panel left 7700>
FIG. 207 is a perspective view of the lower panel right and the lower panel left as viewed from the left rear side. FIG. 208 is a perspective view of the lower panel right and the lower panel left as viewed from the rear right side.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the lower panel right 7600 has a right side wall 7601 forming the right side portion of the lumbar panel 7000 and a side view triangular-shaped protrusion formed so as to project forward and left from the right side wall 7601. It has 7602 and. The lower panel left 7700 has a left side wall 7701 forming a left side portion of the lumbar panel 7000, and a side view triangular-shaped protrusion 7702 formed so as to project forward and to the right from the left side wall 7701.

On the inner surface (left side surface) of the lower panel right 7600, a boss portion 7610 is formed along the left edge, and a boss portion 7611 is formed on the upper and lower portions. On the inner side surface (right side surface) of the lower panel left 7700, a boss portion 7710 is formed along the right edge, and a boss portion 7711 is formed on the upper portion and the lower portion. Screws for fastening the waist panel 7000 to the front door are screwed into the holes formed in the boss portion 7611 and the boss portion 7711.

<Assembly of lumbar panel 7000>
FIG. 209 is a perspective view of the state in which the lower panel frame is attached to the lower panel base as viewed from the front. FIG. 210 is a perspective view of the lower panel frame attached to the lower panel base as viewed from the rear. FIG. 211 is a perspective view of the state in which the back of the lower panel is locked to the lower panel base and the lower panel frame in the state shown in FIG. 210 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 212 is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel base and the back of the lower panel in the state shown in FIG. 211. FIG. 213 is a perspective view of the lower panel base, the lower panel frame, and the state in which the lower panel lower portion is attached to the back of the lower panel as viewed from the rear in the state shown in FIG. 211. FIG. 214 is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel base, the back of the lower panel, and the lower panel in the state shown in FIG. 213.

The lumbar panel 7000 is assembled through the following steps (i) to (v).
(I) The lower panel frame 7300 (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is attached to the lower panel base 7200.
(Ii) The lower panel film 7100 is arranged on the back side of the lower panel base 7200.
(Iii) The back 7400 of the lower panel is locked to the lower panel base 7200.
(Iv) The lower panel lower 7500 is attached to the lower panel base 7200.
(V) The lower panel right 7600 and the lower panel left 7700 are attached to the lower panel base 7200.

In the step (i) above, first, a hole formed in the temporary fixing boss portion 7315 of the lower right panel frame 7300R and a hole formed in the temporary fixing boss portion 7325 of the lower left panel frame 7300L (see FIG. 204). ), The temporary fixing member 7800 (see FIG. 210) is press-fitted into each. Then, the lower panel base 7200 is brought close to the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L in the state where the temporary fixing member 7800 is press-fitted, and the temporary fixing hole 7235 and the temporary fixing hole 7245 of the lower panel base 7200 ( (See FIG. 198), the temporary fixing member 7800 is press-fitted. As a result, the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L are temporarily attached (temporarily fixed) to the lower panel base 7200 via the temporary fixing member 7800.

In this state, the screw holes 7230 (screw holes 7230a, 7230b, 7230c shown in FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and the screw fastening boss portion 7310 (screw fastening boss portion 7310a shown in FIG. 204) of the lower right panel frame 7300R. , 7310b, 7310c) are superimposed, and the screw holes 7240 (screw holes 7240a, 7240b, 7240c shown in FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and the screw fastening boss portion 7320 (screws shown in FIG. 204) of the lower left panel frame 7300L. The lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 are arranged so as to overlap with the fastening boss portions 7320a, 7320b, 7320c). Then, the screw 7810 (see FIG. 210) through which the screw hole 7230 and the screw hole 7240 are inserted is screwed into the holes formed in the screw fastening boss portion 7310 and the screw fastening boss portion 7320 from the back surface side. As a result, the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L are fixed to the lower panel base 7200 by screwing.

At that time, since the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 are temporarily fixed by using the temporary fixing member 7800, the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 are maintained in a relative positional relationship. It is possible to turn over the panel base 7200 and fasten the screws, which facilitates the mounting work. The holes formed in the temporary fixing boss portion 7315 and the temporary fixing boss portion 7325 are formed in the screw fastening boss portion 7310 and the screw fastening boss portion 7320 so that the temporary fixing member 7800 can be press-fitted. The temporary fixing hole 7235 and the temporary fixing hole 7245 are larger than the screw hole 7230 and the screw hole 7240.

Here, as described above, in the lower panel base 7200, recesses (recesses 7232 and 7242) are formed around the screw holes 7230 and around the screw holes 7240 (see FIG. 199). As a result, the screw 7810 used for screwing the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 is housed in the recess, and the rear end of the screw 7810 (the end on the head side of the screw) is the lower panel base. Positioned anterior to the back surface 7216 of the 7200 (screw 7810 does not project rearward of the back surface 7216). Similarly, in the lower panel base 7200, recesses (recesses 7237 and 7247) are formed around the temporary fixing holes 7235 and around the temporary fixing holes 7245 (see FIG. 199). As a result, the temporary fixing member 7800 used for temporarily fixing the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 is housed in the recess, and the rear end of the temporary fixing member 7800 is the back surface 7216 of the lower panel base 7200. Positioned in front of (the temporary fixing member 7800 does not protrude rearward from the back surface 7216).

As described above, in the state where the lower panel frame 7300 (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is attached to the lower panel base 7200, the lower right panel frame 7300R has a right curved portion 7212 in the lower panel base 7200. It is arranged on the front side of the left curved portion 7213 in the lower left panel frame 7300L (see FIG. 209).

In this state, in the step (ii), the lower panel film 7100 is pressed against the lower panel base 7200 from the back side of the lower panel base 7200. The central portion 7101, the right curved portion 7102, the left curved portion 7103, the right rear portion 7104, and the left rear portion 7105 (see FIG. 192) of the lower panel film 7100 are the central portion 7211 of the lower panel base 7200, respectively. The lower panel film 7100 is arranged so as to face the right curved portion 7212, the left curved portion 7213, the right rear portion 7214, and the left rear portion 7215 (see FIG. 196).

In this state, in the step (iii), the central portion 7401, the right curved portion 7402, the left curved portion 7403, the right rear portion 7404, and the left rear portion 7405 (see FIG. 200) of the lower panel back 7400 are respectively. On the back side of the lower panel film 7100 so as to face the central portion 7101, the right curved portion 7102, the left curved portion 7103, the right rear portion 7104, and the left rear portion 7105 (see FIG. 192) of the lower panel film 7100. The back 7400 of the lower panel is arranged. Then, the right locking piece 7452R and the left locking piece 7452L (see FIG. 200) of the lower panel back 7400 are inserted into the right locking hole 7252R and the left locking hole 7252L (see FIG. 196) of the lower panel base 7200, respectively. By doing so, the lower panel back 7400 is locked to the lower panel base 7200 (see FIG. 211).

FIG. 212 shows a state in which the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel back 7400 are cut in the vertical direction (the surface passing through the right locking piece 7452R) at the time when the above step (iii) is completed, for easy understanding. Therefore, the cut surface of the lower panel back 7400 is shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the lower panel base 7200 is shown in black. As shown in FIG. 212, the rear ends of the right locking piece 7452R and the left locking piece 7452L substantially contact the trailing edges of the right locking hole 7252R and the left locking hole 7252L to the rear of the lower panel back 7400. Movement is restricted. Further, the upper surface 7451a (see FIG. 202) of the right side locking protrusion 7451R and the left side locking protrusion 7451L of the lower panel back 7400 is the right side locking protrusion 7251R and the left side locking protrusion of the lower panel base 7200. It substantially comes into contact with the lower surface 7251a (see FIG. 199) of the 7251L, and the upward movement of the lower panel back 7400 is restricted. Further, the lower surface of the horizontal portion 7411 (see FIG. 201) of the lower panel back 7400 substantially contacts the upper surface of the horizontal portion 7217 (see FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200, and the vertical portion 7412 (see FIG. 201) of the lower panel back 7400. The lower end of the lower panel base 7200 substantially abuts on the upper surface of the first inclined portion 7221 (see FIG. 197) of the lower panel base 7200, and the downward movement of the lower panel back 7400 is restricted. The lower end of the vertical portion 7412 is formed so as to have an inclination similar to that of the first inclined portion 7221. Further, the front side of the vertical portion 7412 of the lower panel back 7400 substantially contacts the rear end edge of the horizontal portion 7217 of the lower panel base 7200, and the forward movement of the lower panel back 7400 is restricted.

Further, at this time, in the space formed between the back surface 7216 of the lower panel base 7200 (see FIG. 198) and the front surface 7420 of the lower panel back surface 7400 (the surface opposite to the back surface 7410, see FIG. The panel film 7100 is arranged. As a result, the front surface of the lower panel film 7100 substantially contacts the back surface 7216 of the lower panel base 7200, and the back surface of the lower panel film 7100 substantially contacts the front surface 7420 of the lower panel back surface 7400. As shown in FIG. 212, the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel back 7400 are arranged so close to each other (substantially in contact with each other), but since the lower panel film 7100 is configured as a thin sheet, It can be accommodated in the gap formed between the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel back 7400. The lower panel film 7100, the lower panel base 7200, and the lower panel back 7400 have substantially the same curved shape, and the space formed between the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel back 7400 is lower. It is filled with the panel film 7100 so that there is almost no gap.

After that, in the above step (iv), the boss portion 7233 and the boss portion 7243 (see FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and the screw holes 7512 and the screw holes 7522 (see FIG. 205) of the lower panel lower 7500 are superimposed, respectively. As described above, the lower panel lower 7500 is arranged on the back side of the lower panel back 7400. At this time, the lower portion 7506 (see FIG. 206) of the lower panel lower 7500 is placed on the horizontal portion 7223 (see FIG. 197) of the lower panel base 7200, and the right edge bent portion 7511 and the left edge bent of the lower panel lower 7500. Section 7521 (see FIG. 206) is placed on the right side portion 7225 and the left side portion 7226 (see FIG. 198) of the panel base 7200, respectively (see FIG. 213). Then, the screw 7820 (see FIG. 213) through which the screw hole 7512 and the screw hole 7522 are inserted is screwed into the holes formed in the boss portion 7233 and the boss portion 7243 from the back surface side. As a result, the lower panel lower 7500 is fixed to the lower panel base 7200 by screwing.

In FIG. 214, the lower panel base 7200, the lower panel back 7400, and the lower panel lower 7500 at the time when the step (iv) is completed pass through the vertical facing surface in the front-rear direction (the rear protruding portion 7413 of the lower panel back 7400). The cut surface of the lower panel base 7200 is shown in diagonal lines, the cut surface of the lower panel back 7400 is shaded, and the cut surface of the lower panel lower 7500 is shown in black to show the state of cutting with the lower panel). ing. As shown in FIG. 214, the front side portion 7501 (see FIG. 205) of the lower panel lower 7500 substantially contacts the posterior protruding portion 7413 (see FIG. 201) of the lower panel back 7400, and the second inclined portion of the lower panel lower 7500. The 7504, the third inclined portion 7505, and the lower portion 7506 (see FIG. 206) are the first inclined portion 7221, the second inclined portion 7222, and the horizontal portion 7223 (see FIG. 197) of the lower panel base 7200, respectively. It is almost in contact. As a result, the lower panel back 7400 is in a state of being sandwiched between the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel lower 7500, and is difficult to come off even when an impact is applied by opening and closing the front door, for example. ..

In this state, in the step (v) above, the screw holes 7234 (screw holes 7234a, 7234b, 7234c shown in FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and the boss portion 7610 (see FIG. 207) of the lower panel right 7600 are superimposed. The lower panel right 7600 is arranged so as to do so. Then, the screw through which the screw hole 7234 is inserted is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 7610 from the back surface side. As a result, the lower panel right 7600 is fixed to the lower panel base 7200 by screwing. Further, the lower panel left 7700 is arranged so that the screw holes 7244 (screw holes 7244a, 7244b, 7244c shown in FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and the boss portion 7710 (see FIG. 208) of the lower panel left 7700 overlap. To do. Then, the screw through which the screw hole 7244 is inserted is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 7710 from the back surface side. As a result, the lower panel left 7700 is fixed to the lower panel base 7200 by screwing.

As described above, the assembly of the lumbar panel 7000 is completed, and the lumbar panel 7000 is completed. The lower end of the lower right panel frame 7300R has a shape that can be fitted with the front portion of the protruding portion 7602 (see FIG. 207) in the lower panel right 7600, and the lower end of the lower left panel frame 7300L is the lower panel left 7700. It has a shape that can be fitted to the front portion of the protruding portion 7702 (see FIG. 208) (see FIG. 187).

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix E>
Conventionally, a game machine provided with a curved decorative sheet is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-198777). According to such a game machine, the decoration applied to the decorative sheet can be visually recognized by the player, and the decorativeness of the game machine can be enhanced.

However, when the printed flat sheet is arranged in a curved shape, the curved portion looks distorted, which causes a problem that the appearance is poor and the design is deteriorated. On the other hand, in order to improve the appearance, it is conceivable to create a design assuming a curved state, but it is difficult to create such a design, and it is possible to create a design. Even so, there is a problem that the development man-hours required for that purpose increase.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of easily realizing good-looking visibility.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has the following features.

(E-1-1) A gaming machine provided with a visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by a player.
The visual object portion includes a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103), and the visual target surface formed over the first region and the second region. Have and
In the portion of the visible object surface formed in the first region, the visible object surface is formed in the first direction (direction L1 (X) shown in FIG. 194 (b)).
The portion of the visible object surface formed in the second region has a second direction in which the visible object surface is different from the first direction (the direction of L1 (Y) shown in FIG. 194 (b)). Is formed in
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) that makes it difficult to see at least a part of the second region is arranged on the outer side of the game machine with respect to the visual object portion.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player is the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102). And a left curved portion 7103), and has a visible object surface formed over a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103). The portion of the visible target surface formed in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) is in the direction of surface formation as compared with the portion formed in the first region (central portion 7101). Is different. A shielding member (lower right) that makes it difficult to see at least a part of the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) on the outer side of the game machine from the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100). The panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L) are arranged. As a result, even if the portion of the visible object surface formed in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) looks poor, the portion is shielded by the shielding member (lower right panel). It can be hidden by the frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good-looking visibility can be easily realized.

(E-1-1') The gaming machine according to (E-1-1).
The visual object surface has a curved shape and has a curved shape.
The degree of curvature in the portion of the visible object surface formed in the second region is larger than the degree of curvature in the portion of the visible object surface formed in the first region.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visible object surface has a curved shape, and is formed in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visible object surface. The degree of curvature in the present portion is larger than the degree of curvature in the portion formed in the first region (central portion 7101) of the visual object surface. As a result, even if the portion of the visual object surface formed in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) appears to be distorted, the portion is shielded by the shielding member (lower right panel frame). It can be hidden by the 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good-looking visibility can be easily realized.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having the following features.
(E-1-1 ″) The gaming machine according to (E-1-1) above.
The visible object portion is formed by joining a plurality of members.
The second region corresponds to a joint portion between one of the plurality of members and the other member.
The first region corresponds to a portion other than the joint.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine, the visual object portion is formed by joining a plurality of members, and the second region corresponds to a joint portion between one member of the plurality of members and the other member. are doing. As a result, even if the portion of the visible object surface formed in the second region (the joint portion between one member of the plurality of members and the other member) appears to be distorted, the said The portion can be hidden by a shielding member, and good-looking visibility can be easily realized.

The present invention is not particularly limited as long as the shielding member is arranged so as to make it difficult to visually recognize a region of the visual target portion whose surface formation direction is different from that of other regions. Also in the game machine of the above (E-1-1 ″), since the direction of surface formation at the joint portion is different from the direction of surface formation at the portion other than the joint portion, the present invention is applicable. In addition to the above forms, it can also be applied to a form in which a shielding member is arranged so as to make the unevenness difficult to see when, for example, an unevenness is generated in the visual object portion due to a molding problem. is there. Also in this case, since the direction of surface formation is different between the region where the unevenness is generated and the other region, the present invention is applicable. Further, in the joint portion and the uneven portion, the direction of the tangent line in the region is different from the direction of the tangent line in the other region (see FIG. 194 (b)). However, it can also be applied to a form in which a shielding member is arranged so as to make a region different from other regions difficult to see. Further, in the joint portion and the uneven portion, the angle of incidence of light on the region is different from the angle of incidence of light on other regions (see FIG. 194 (b)). It can also be applied to a form in which a shielding member is arranged so as to make it difficult to see a region where the incident angle of light is different from other regions. Further, in the joint portion and the uneven portion, the traveling direction of the light incident on the region is different from the traveling direction of the light incident on the other region, and the present invention thus describes the traveling of the incident light. It can also be applied to a form in which a shielding member is arranged so as to make it difficult to see an area whose direction is different from other areas.

(E-1-2) A visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100) that allows the player to visually recognize at least a part thereof.
A cover member (lower panel base 7200) located on the outer side of the game machine with respect to the visual object sheet,
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) fixed to the cover member is provided.
The visual inspection target sheet has at least a bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103).
The shielding member makes it difficult to see at least a part of the bent portion of the visual inspection target sheet.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visible object sheet (lower panel film 7100) that can be visually recognized by the player has at least a bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103). ing. On the other hand, the cover member (lower panel base 7200) is located on the outer side of the game machine from the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the cover member (lower panel base 7200) is a shielding member. (Lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are fixed. Then, at least a part of the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is made difficult to be visually recognized by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). It is configured in. As a result, even if the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100) appears to be distorted, the portion is covered with the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower right panel frame 7300R). It can be hidden by the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good-looking visibility can be easily realized.

(E-2-1) A visible object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player, and
A cover member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visibility target portion, and
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the cover member is provided.
The visual object portion includes a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103), and has a predetermined direction (forward direction) with respect to the first region and the second region. Assuming that the light is incident from the above, the traveling direction of the light incident on the first region and the traveling direction of the light incident on the second region are different.
The shielding member is fixed to the cover member by a fixing member (screw 7810) that can be attached from the back surface side of the cover member.
The cover member includes openings (screw holes 7230 and screw holes 7240) for accommodating the fixing member so that the fixing member does not interfere with the visual object portion.
The shielding member makes it difficult to see at least a part of the second region in the visual object portion.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visible object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player is the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102). And left curved portion 7103), and assuming that light is incident on the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) from a predetermined direction, the second region The traveling direction of the light incident on (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) is different from the traveling direction of the light incident on the first region (central portion 7101). Then, at least a part of the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) in the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) becomes difficult to see due to the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). It is configured as follows. As a result, even if the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) appears to be distorted, the portion is shielded by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R). And the lower left panel frame 7300L) can be hidden, and good-looking visibility can be easily realized. Further, a cover member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visibility target portion (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is a cover member (lower left panel frame 7300L). It is arranged on the surface side of the lower panel base 7200). Specifically, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is covered by a fixing member (screw 7810) that can be attached from the back surface side of the cover member (lower panel base 7200). The cover member (lower panel base 7200) has an opening (screw hole) for accommodating the fixing member (screw 7810) so that the fixing member (screw 7810) does not interfere with the visible portion (lower panel film 7100). 7230 and screw holes 7240) are provided. This makes it possible to prevent the fixing member (screw 7810) from interfering with the visible object portion (lower panel film 7100), and due to distortion or the like caused by the interference, the visible object portion (lower panel). It is possible to prevent the visibility of the film 7100) from being lowered.

(E-2-2) A visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100) having a curved portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) formed at least in part having a predetermined curved shape.
A cover member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual inspection target sheet and
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) fixed to the cover member is provided.
The shielding member is fixed to the cover member by a fixing member (screw 7810) that can be attached from the back surface side of the cover member.
The cover member includes openings (screw holes 7230 and screw holes 7240) for accommodating the fixing member so that the fixing member does not interfere with the visual inspection target sheet.
The shielding member makes it difficult to see at least a part of the bent portion.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100) is formed with curved portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) having a predetermined curved shape at least in part. Has been done. On the other hand, a cover member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100), and a shielding member (lower right panel frame) is arranged on the cover member (lower panel base 7200). 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are fixed. Then, at least a part of the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is made difficult to be visually recognized by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). It is configured in. As a result, even if the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100) appears to be distorted, the portion is covered with the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower right panel frame 7300R). It can be hidden by the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good-looking visibility can be easily realized. Further, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is fixed to the cover member (lower panel base 7200) by a fixing member (screw 7810) that can be attached from the back surface side of the cover member (lower panel base 7200). The cover member (lower panel base 7200) has an opening (screw hole 7230 and a screw hole 7230) for accommodating the fixing member (screw 7810) so that the fixing member (screw 7810) does not interfere with the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100). It has a screw hole 7240). This makes it possible to prevent the fixing member (screw 7810) from interfering with the visible object sheet (lower panel film 7100), and due to distortion or the like caused by the interference, the visible object sheet (lower panel). It is possible to prevent the visibility of the film 7100) from being lowered.

In the eighth embodiment, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is replaced by the cover member (lower panel base) by the fixing member (screw 7810) that can be attached from the back surface side of the cover member (lower panel base 7200). It has been described as being fixed to 7200). In the present invention, the method of fixing the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is not particularly limited, and the shielding member can be attached to any member by any means. For example, a locking claw is provided on the back surface side of the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) to shield the front surface side of the cover member (lower panel base 7200) or other members. The members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) may be locked.

(E-3-1) A visible object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player, and
The first member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual object portion and
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the first member, and
A second member (lower panel back 7400) arranged on the back surface side of the visual inspection target portion is provided.
The visual object portion includes a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103), and has a predetermined direction (forward direction) with respect to the first region and the second region. Assuming that light is incident from the above, the incident angle in the second region (β shown in FIG. 194 (b)) is larger than the incident angle in the first region (α shown in FIG. 194 (b)). ,
The shielding member makes it difficult to see at least a part of the second region in the visual object portion.
The first member and the second member are locked by locking portions (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visible object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player is the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102). And left curved portion 7103), and assuming that light is incident on the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) from a predetermined direction, the first region The incident angle (β shown in FIG. 194 (b)) in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) is larger than the incident angle in (central portion 7101) (α shown in FIG. 194 (b)). It's getting bigger. Then, at least a part of the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) in the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) becomes difficult to see due to the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). It is configured as follows. As a result, even if the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) appears to be distorted, the portion is shielded by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R). And the lower left panel frame 7300L) can be hidden, and good-looking visibility can be easily realized. Further, the first member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is the first member. It is arranged on the surface side of the member (lower panel base 7200). On the other hand, a second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged on the back surface side of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are arranged. ) Is locked by a locking portion (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L). As a result, the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) is arranged between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), and the second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged. ) Is locked to the first member (lower panel base 7200), so that it is not necessary to attach the second member (lower panel back 7400) to the first member (lower panel base 7200) by screwing. Here, if the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are fastened with screws, there are individual differences in the size of the screw holes. As a result, when the screw is strongly tightened, the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) is pushed by the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), so that the visual object is visible. There is a concern that the portion (lower panel film 7100) may be distorted. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and the visual object portion (lower panel film) due to such distortion. It is possible to prevent the visibility of 7100) from being lowered.

(E-3-2) A visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100) having a bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) formed at least in part having a predetermined curvature.
The first member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual inspection target sheet and
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the first member, and
A second member (lower panel back 7400) arranged on the back side of the visual inspection target sheet is provided.
The shielding member makes it difficult to see at least a part of the bent portion.
The first member and the second member are locked by locking portions (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100) is formed with bent portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) having a predetermined curvature at least in a part thereof. ing. On the other hand, the first member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding member is arranged on the surface side of the first member (lower panel base 7200). (Lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are arranged. Then, at least a part of the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is made difficult to be visually recognized by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). It is configured in. As a result, even if the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100) appears to be distorted, the portion is covered with the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower right panel frame 7300R). It can be hidden by the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good-looking visibility can be easily realized. Further, a second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged on the back surface side of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are arranged. ) Is locked by a locking portion (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L). As a result, the visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is arranged between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), and the second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged. ) Is locked to the first member (lower panel base 7200), so that it is not necessary to attach the second member (lower panel back 7400) to the first member (lower panel base 7200) by screwing. Here, if the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are fastened with screws, there are individual differences in the size of the screw holes. As a result, when the screw is strongly tightened, the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100) is pushed by the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), so that the visual object is visible. There is a concern that the sheet (lower panel film 7100) will be distorted. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and the visible target sheet (lower panel film) due to such distortion. It is possible to prevent the visibility of 7100) from being lowered.

(E-4-1) A visible object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player, and
The first member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual object portion and
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the first member, and
A second member (lower panel back 7400) arranged on the back side of the visual object portion
A third member (lower 7500 under the lower panel) arranged on the back surface side of the second member is provided.
The visual object portion includes a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103), and the visual target surface formed over the first region and the second region. Have and
In the portion of the visual object surface formed in the first region and the portion formed in the second region, the first tangent line (L1 (X) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) is used as a virtual tangent line, respectively. )) And the second tangent (L1 (Y) shown in FIG. 194 (b)), the direction of the first tangent and the direction of the second tangent are different.
The shielding member makes it difficult to see at least a part of the second region in the visual object portion.
The first member and the second member are locked by locking portions (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L).
The first member and the third member are fixed by a fixing member (screw 7820).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player is the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102). And a left curved portion 7103), and has a visible object surface formed over a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103). In the portion of the visual object surface formed in the first region (central portion 7101) and the portion formed in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103), the first as virtual tangents, respectively. When the tangent line (L1 (X) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) and the second tangent line (L1 (Y) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) are drawn, the first tangent line (shown in FIG. 194 (b)) is drawn. The direction of L1 (X)) and the direction of the second tangent line (L1 (Y) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) are different. That is, the portion of the visible object surface formed in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) is surface-formed as compared with the portion formed in the first region (central portion 7101). The direction of is different. Then, at least a part of the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) in the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) becomes difficult to see due to the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). It is configured as follows. As a result, even if the portion of the visible object surface formed in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) looks poor, the portion is shielded by the shielding member (lower right panel). It can be hidden by the frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good-looking visibility can be easily realized. Further, the first member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is the first member. It is arranged on the surface side of the member (lower panel base 7200). On the other hand, a second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged on the back surface side of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are arranged. ) Is locked by a locking portion (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L). As a result, the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) is arranged between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), and the second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged. ) Is locked to the first member (lower panel base 7200), so that it is not necessary to attach the second member (lower panel back 7400) to the first member (lower panel base 7200) by screwing. Here, if the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are fastened with screws, there are individual differences in the size of the screw holes. As a result, when the screw is strongly tightened, the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) is pushed by the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), so that the visual object is visible. There is a concern that the portion (lower panel film 7100) may be distorted. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and the visual object portion (lower panel film) due to such distortion. It is possible to prevent the visibility of 7100) from being lowered. Further, a third member (lower panel lower 7500) is arranged on the back surface side of the second member (lower panel back 7400), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the third member (lower panel lower 7500) are arranged. ) Is fixed by a fixing member (screw 7820). As a result, the visible target portion (lower panel film 7100) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) can be stably placed between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the third member (lower panel lower 7500). It can be arranged, and the visibility of the visibility target portion (lower panel film 7100) can be maintained in a high state.

(E-4-2) A visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100) having a bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) formed at least in part having a predetermined curvature.
The first member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual inspection target sheet and
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the first member, and
A second member (lower panel back 7400) arranged on the back side of the visual inspection target sheet and
A third member (lower 7500 under the lower panel) arranged on the back surface side of the second member is provided.
The shielding member makes it difficult to see at least a part of the bent portion.
The first member and the second member are locked by locking portions (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L).
The first member and the third member are fixed by a fixing member (screw 7820).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100) is formed with bent portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) having a predetermined curvature at least in a part thereof. ing. On the other hand, the first member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding member is arranged on the surface side of the first member (lower panel base 7200). (Lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are arranged. Then, at least a part of the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is made difficult to be visually recognized by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). It is configured in. As a result, even if the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100) appears to be distorted, the portion is covered with the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower right panel frame 7300R). It can be hidden by the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good-looking visibility can be easily realized. Further, a second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged on the back surface side of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are arranged. ) Is locked by a locking portion (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L). As a result, the visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is arranged between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), and the second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged. ) Is locked to the first member (lower panel base 7200), so that it is not necessary to attach the second member (lower panel back 7400) to the first member (lower panel base 7200) by screwing. Here, if the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are fastened with screws, there are individual differences in the size of the screw holes. As a result, when the screw is strongly tightened, the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100) is pushed by the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), so that the visual object is visible. There is a concern that the sheet (lower panel film 7100) will be distorted. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and the visible target sheet (lower panel film) due to such distortion. It is possible to prevent the visibility of 7100) from being lowered. Further, a third member (lower panel lower 7500) is arranged on the back surface side of the second member (lower panel back 7400), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the third member (lower panel lower 7500) are arranged. ) Is fixed by a fixing member (screw 7820). As a result, the visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) can be stably placed between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the third member (lower panel lower 7500). It can be arranged, and the visibility of the visibility target sheet (lower panel film 7100) can be maintained in a high state.

In the eighth embodiment, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) makes it difficult to see at least a part of the visual object portion (visual object sheet: lower panel film 7100 provided in the waist panel 7000). Explained as being. The visible object portion (visual object sheet) in the present invention is not limited to the decorative sheet (lower panel film 7100) provided on the waist panel (decorative unit provided at the lower part of the front door), and is not limited to the top panel (on the upper part of the front door). It may be a decorative sheet provided with a decorative unit provided (see FIG. 65). Further, the visual object portion (visual object sheet) in the present invention is not limited to a sheet to which decoration (pattern or pattern) is previously applied, and a sheet (screen, screen, which can display an image corresponding to the pattern or pattern). For example, the screen sheet 1046) shown in FIG. 67 may be used.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are the shielding member arranged on the right side (lower right panel frame 7300R) and the shielding member arranged on the left side (lower left panel frame). It was described as being composed of 7300L). In the present invention, only one of the right side shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R) and the left side shielding member (lower left panel frame 7300L) may be provided. For example, of the left curved portion (left curved portion 7103) and the right curved portion (right curved portion 7102), the appearance of the left curved portion (left curved portion 7103) is problematic in terms of design, but the right curved portion is problematic. If the appearance of the bent part (right curved part 7102) does not matter, only the left shielding member (lower left panel frame 7300L) is arranged so that only the left bent part (left curved part 7103) is difficult to see. You may do it.

As a case where the appearance of the bent portion does not matter, for example, there is a case where the bent portion is merely colored. For example, a predetermined pattern is drawn on the entire visual target portion (visual target sheet: lower panel film 7100), and the predetermined pattern is colored with a main part (contour, etc.) constituting the pattern and a single color. It is assumed that the part (single color part) that is only made is included. In such an example, if the monochromatic portion of the predetermined pattern is arranged at the bent portion, the shielding member (lower panel frame) that makes the bent portion difficult to see should not be arranged. May be.

Regarding the placement position of the shielding member (lower panel frame), considering the viewpoint of the player, it is reasonable to arrange the shielding member (lower panel frame) so as to make it difficult to see the bent portion having the maximum curvature. However, in the present invention, the arrangement position of the shielding member (lower panel frame) is not limited to the surface side (front) of the bent portion having the maximum curvature. For example, when the visual inspection target portion (visual recognition target sheet) has a first bending portion and a second bending portion, and the curvature of the first bending portion is larger than the curvature of the second bending portion, the first While the shielding member (lower panel frame) is not arranged in front of the bent portion (player side), the shielding member (lower panel frame) may be arranged in front of the second bent portion (player side). Good. For example, in the case where the main portion is arranged in the second bent portion of the predetermined pattern and the monochromatic portion is arranged in the first bent portion, the shielding member (lower panel). The frame) may be arranged in this way. In the present invention, the arrangement position of the shielding member (lower panel frame) can be appropriately determined in consideration of the aesthetic appearance comprehensively created by the viewing target portion (visual target sheet) and the shielding member (lower panel frame). It is possible.

Further, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) may be decorated. The decorations applied to the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) include decorations (for example, a logo depending on the model) applied to the visual object portion (visual object sheet: lower panel film 7100). The decorations that are related to the corresponding patterns, designs, etc.) can be mentioned. Further, the color of the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) can be the same as or similar to the color of the visual inspection target portion (visual recognition target sheet: lower panel film 7100). As a result, it is possible to harmonize with the design of the visual object portion (visual object sheet: lower panel film 7100) without making the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) conspicuous. Can enhance the aesthetics of.

On the other hand, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) may be plated with silver or gold. As a result, the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) can be reliably shielded while emphasizing the beauty of the three-dimensional decoration of the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L).

Further, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is arranged as a protruding three-dimensional decoration in the decoration unit (lumbar panel), and the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). When a game machine equipped with the above is installed in the game hall, the player who is considering which game machine the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) will play in the game hall. Easy to catch your eyes. Therefore, in order to appeal the existence and attractiveness of the game machine to the player, the model name, the manufacturer logo, and the game information (for example, the winning probability for the bonus) are used in the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). Or a part of the dividend table), etc. may be displayed (described). Further, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is provided with a decorative sheet, and characters, items, and the like related to the contents adopted in the game machine may be printed on the decorative sheet. Further, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) itself may be formed as a three-dimensional shape (shape corresponding to a character, an item, etc.) related to the content. As a result, the degree of attention to the game machine can be increased.

The decorations (design, color, etc.) applied to the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) have been described above, but only one of the above is adopted as the device for the decoration. Alternatively, a plurality of them may be used in combination, or other devices may be used in combination. The cover member (lower panel base 7200) may be decorated or may be colorless and transparent. When the cover member (lower panel base 7200) is decorated, the cover member (lower panel base 7200) constitutes the visible object portion in the present invention together with the visible object sheet (lower panel film 7100).

Further, in the eighth embodiment, when a plurality of bent portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) are provided apart from each other, a plurality of shielding members are provided so that each bent portion is individually difficult to see. It has been described that (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are arranged apart from each other. In the present invention, when a plurality of bent portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) are provided apart from each other in this way, the plurality of bent portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) are provided. As a shielding member (lower panel frame) that makes it difficult to see, a plurality of shielding parts (for example, lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) for making each bent portion difficult to see, and the plurality of shielding members. One shielding member (for example, right) composed of a part connecting the parts (for example, a part having substantially the same width as the central part 7101 and connecting the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L). The lower panel frame 7300R, the lower left panel frame 7300L, the part extending left and right so as to connect the upper parts of the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L, and the lower parts of the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L. (One panel frame) composed of a portion extending to the left and right so as to connect the two may be adopted.

Further, in the present invention, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame) for making the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visible target portion (lower panel film 7100) difficult to see. In addition to the 7300L), a shielding member (additional panel frame) may be provided. As such an additional panel frame, for example, a panel frame having a predetermined shape (for example, V-shape) is provided on the surface side of the first region (central portion 7101) in the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100), and the lower right panel is provided. The frame 7300R, the lower left panel frame 7300L, and the additional panel frame may function as an integrated three-dimensional decorative portion (create an integrated three-dimensional effect). For that purpose, a panel frame (decoration) may be added to the surface side (front side of the lumbar panel) of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100), and the design of the additional panel frame itself and the cover member of the additional panel frame ( It is possible to create the three-dimensional effect only by designing the mounting structure to the lower panel base 7200) or the like. In this regard, when adding a three-dimensional decoration to the space on the back side (back side of the waist panel) of the visual object part (lower panel film 7100), it is necessary to change the arrangement of wiring, medal chute, substrate, etc. According to the method of adding the panel frame (decoration) to the surface side (front side of the waist panel) of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) as described above, such an arrangement change is unnecessary and relatively. The impression of the appearance of the game machine can be renewed at low cost and in a short development period.

Further, in the present invention, some game machine component is arranged between the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) and the cover member (lower panel base 7200), or the shielding member (lower right). The game machine components may be arranged in the panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L). In that case, it is preferable to use a shielding member (panel frame) that is larger than the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) described in the eighth embodiment. This makes it possible to add such game machine components. Such a game machine component may be provided on only one of the right side shielding member (panel frame) and the left side shielding member (panel frame), or on both shielding members (panel frame). It may be provided. When the game machine components are provided on both the left and right shielding members (panel frames), the same game machine components may be provided on the left and right, or different game machine components may be provided on the left and right. Further, when three or more shielding members (panel frames) are provided, the game machine components may be provided only on any one shielding member (panel frame), or any plurality of shielding members (panels) may be provided. The game machine component may be provided on the frame), or the game machine component may be provided on all the shielding members (panel frames). Further, one shielding member (panel frame) may be provided with only one gaming machine component (mechanism), or a plurality of mechanisms may be provided together.

Examples of the game machine component include a light emitting substrate. By installing the LED on the light emitting substrate and controlling the light emission of the LED, it is possible to illuminate the shielding member (panel frame), and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, in addition to the light emitting substrate (first light emitting substrate), the light emitting substrate (second light emitting substrate) is also on the back surface side of the portion of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) that is not shielded by the shielding member (panel frame). ) May be provided. The light emitted by the first light emitting substrate and the light emitted by the second light emitting substrate (light emitting effect pattern) may be performed as an integrated light emitting pattern (both light emitting or both extinguished), or light emitted by each light emitting substrate. May be controlled separately. For example, the three-dimensional decoration of the shielding member (panel frame) can be emphasized by performing an effect such that the portion not shielded by the shielding member (panel frame) is turned off while the shielding member (panel frame) emits light. .. When such a light emitting board is provided, an opening for passing a harness for power supply and connection to the effect control unit (sub control device SS) is provided in the lower part of the lumbar panel (7500 below the lower panel, etc.). It is good to provide it. Further, a polarizing member such as a light diffusion sheet may be provided together with the light emitting substrate, or the front surface or the side surface of the shielding member (panel frame) may be processed for polarization. The bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the light emitting substrate itself, or the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left) separately from the light emitting substrate. A member (sheet, plate, etc.) for shielding the curved portion 7103) may be provided. As the light emitting effect by the light emitting board, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting a game state, an effect of notifying predetermined information (information advantageous to the player, bonus winning, etc.), and an error due to the light emission. It may be notified.

Further, examples of the game machine component include a game operation unit (start lever, stop button, settlement button, bet button, etc.). For example, while a part of the game operation unit is arranged on the front surface of the shield member (panel frame), a sensor for detecting that the game operation unit has been operated inside the shield member (panel frame) may be used. It is possible to arrange a substrate or the like. By performing such a design, the space can be effectively utilized, for example, when the shielding member (panel frame) is large and the control panel portion (operation means arrangement portion) on the lumbar panel is narrowed. The bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visibility target portion (lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the game machine component itself, or the bent portion (bent portion (right curved portion 7102) and left curved portion 7103) may be shielded separately from the game machine component. A member (sheet, plate, etc.) for shielding the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) may be provided.

Further, as the above-mentioned game machine component, for example, an effect operation unit (effect button, effect lever, jog dial, etc.) can be mentioned. For example, while the above-mentioned effect operation unit is arranged on the front surface of the shielding member (panel frame), a sensor, a substrate, or the like for detecting that the effect operation unit has been operated is placed inside the shielding member (panel frame). It is possible to place it. For example, while the control panel unit (operation means arrangement unit) is provided with a normal effect button (first effect button), the shielding member (panel frame) is provided with a second effect button, which is a target of operation instructions during the operation effect. Depending on which of the first effect button and the second effect button is used as the operation means, the degree of expectation such as hitting differs (for example, it is prompted to operate the second effect button). In that case, the degree of expectation is high, the hit is confirmed, etc.). The bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visibility target portion (lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the game machine component itself, or the bent portion (bent portion (right curved portion 7102) and left curved portion 7103) may be shielded separately from the game machine component. A member (sheet, plate, etc.) for shielding the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) may be provided.

Further, examples of the game machine component include a vibration mechanism (motor, solenoid, etc.) for vibrating the shielding member (panel frame). By vibrating the shielding member (panel frame) using the vibration mechanism, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the gaming state and the degree of expectation. Further, by arranging both the vibration mechanism and the effect operation unit on the shielding member (panel frame), the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand when the effect operation unit is operated (when the button is pressed). You may. When such a vibration mechanism is provided, a shock absorbing member (synthetic rubber such as urethane rubber or silicone rubber) for shock absorption is used between the shielding member (panel frame) and the cover member (lower panel base 7200). Sheets, etc.) may be arranged. The bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visibility target portion (lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the game machine component itself, or the bent portion (bent portion (right curved portion 7102) and left curved portion 7103) may be shielded separately from the game machine component. A member (sheet, plate, etc.) for shielding the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) may be provided.

Further, as the above-mentioned game machine component, for example, a speaker can be mentioned. When arranging the speaker, an opening for sound output (mesh portion on the surface of the speaker) may be provided on either one or both of the front surface and the side surface of the shielding member (panel frame). If speakers are arranged on both the right-side shielding member (panel frame) and the left-side shielding member (panel frame), a powerful sound effect can be produced with a stereo sound source from a position close to the player. The bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visibility target portion (lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the game machine component itself, or the bent portion (bent portion (right curved portion 7102) and left curved portion 7103) may be shielded separately from the game machine component. A member (sheet, plate, etc.) for shielding the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) may be provided.

Further, as the above-mentioned game machine component, for example, a blower mechanism (a fan such as a sirocco fan) can be mentioned. When arranging the ventilation mechanism, it is possible to perform an effect of blowing air toward the player side by providing an opening for ventilation on one or both of the front surface and the side surface of the shielding member (panel frame). It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to suggest or notify the game state and the degree of expectation as a sensational effect.

Further, as the above-mentioned game machine component, for example, a drive mechanism can be mentioned. For example, a movable decorative portion may be provided on a part of the shielding member (panel frame), and a drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) may be provided to function as a movable accessory. The game machine components include, for example, a sensor (proximity sensor such as an infrared sensor) that can detect when a player brings a hand or the like close to the player, or a touch sensor (touch panel) that can detect when a player touches a hand or the like. ) Etc. can be mentioned. By arranging such a sensor, it may be used for the production operation. Further, as the game machine component, for example, an image display unit can be mentioned. For example, the effect may be performed by arranging a small liquid crystal screen.

<Additional notes (others)>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal, etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that the start lever is operated by the player, and the plurality of reels are used. Detects that the start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels have been pressed by the player, and outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. The operation of the stepping motor is based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the driving force of each reel to each reel, and the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, it draws a lot based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”) A so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected is known.

However, since the conventional pachislot machine does not have the configuration and function as a game machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to effectively improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

[9th Embodiment]
The first to eighth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the ninth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first to eighth embodiments also applies to the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 215 and 216, the appearance of the game machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 is a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the main body of the game machine, an upper door mechanism UD2 as a door member that can be opened and closed, and a cabinet G. It is arranged at the lower part of the front surface and has a lower door mechanism DD2 that can be opened and closed.

Both the upper door mechanism UD2 and the lower door mechanism DD2 are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD2 and the lower door mechanism DD2 are provided so as to be able to close the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD2 is formed with a display window UD2a having an opening at the center, and a mask member 9200 described later is provided on the rear side (rear side) of the display window UD2a. That is, the display window UD2a is closed by the mask member 9200. The upper door mechanism UD2 and the lower door mechanism DD2 may have the same configurations as the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD described above, except for the configurations described below.

As shown in FIG. 218, a reel unit RU1 as a variable display unit is mounted in a substantially central portion of the cabinet G. The reel unit RU1 has four reels (from left, reel RL1 (leftmost reel), RL2 (middle left reel), RR1 (middle right reel)) in which a plurality of types of symbols (identification information) are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel. ), RR2 (rightmost reel)). These reels RL1, RL2, RR1 and RR2 are arranged in parallel (horizontally one row) so that each of them can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 216, the reels RL1, RL2, RR1, RR2 are operated by the reels RL1, RL2, RR1, RR2 and the reels RL1, RL2, RR1, through the overlapping region 9201 described later of the mask member 9200. A part of the pattern drawn on the RR2 (indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 216) becomes visible. That is, the superimposed region 9201 is an region for making a part of the reel symbol visible. The range other than the superposed area 9201 of the mask member 9200 that can be seen from the display window UD2a is a decorative area 9202 that can be produced by light, images, or the like. Details of the decorative area 9202 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 217, the ninth embodiment is not limited to the one including four reels, but includes three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel). Can also be applied to. In this case, the overlapping area 9201 is formed in a size that makes a part of the symbols of the three reels visible, as compared with the case where a part of the symbols of the four reels shown in FIG. 216 is visible. The area becomes smaller, and the area of the decorative area 9202, which is an area where the effect can be produced, becomes larger than the example shown in FIG. 216.

As shown in FIG. 219, the lower door mechanism DD2 has the first, second, and third pedestals on a substantially horizontal plane in the substantially central portion of the upper part thereof, similarly to the above-mentioned lower door mechanism DD (see FIG. 3). DD2a, DD2b, and DD2c are formed. The first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side when viewed from the front side is provided with a medal insertion port DD5 for inserting medals. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening into which medals are inserted by the player. The medals inserted from the medal slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side when viewed from the front side is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as an effective line setting means for betting a credited medal. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of medals to be inserted.

A production button DD21 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located substantially in the center when viewed from the front side. Further, on the left side of the effect button DD21, a four-way button unit DD22 including four buttons, an upward button, a left direction button, a right direction button, and a downward direction button, is provided. The operation of the effect button DD21 is detected by the sub control device SS, and can be operated at the time of effect in the game. In addition, when the effect button DD21 is pressed in the customer waiting state (the player is not playing and the demo screen is displayed after a predetermined time has passed from the end of the game), the player's menu screen, payout table, game history, and mobile phone interlocking Various items such as service, volume / light intensity adjustment, etc. can be displayed. The operation of the 4-way button unit DD22 is also detected by the sub-control device SS, and the item selection operation in the menu display, the volume / light amount selection operation, the password input at the start of the mobile interlocking service, etc. Used for.
A touch sensor as a touch-type position input device on the panel surface of the liquid crystal display device and the liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel) in place of or coexisting with the above-mentioned mechanical buttons or the like in the third pedestal portion DD2c. A so-called touch panel on which panels are arranged may be provided and used as an operating means for producing a game machine, an operating means for displaying a menu, or the like.

Further, on the front side near the maximum BET button DD8, the reels RL1, RL2, RR1, RR2 (see FIG. 216) are rotationally driven by the operation of the player, and the variation of the symbol is displayed in the overlapping region 9201 of the mask member 9200. A start lever DD6 is provided to start the operation. The start lever DD6 is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range.

On the right side of the start lever DD6, in the substantially lower center of the overlapping region 9201, four stops for stopping the rotation of the four reels RL1, RL2, RR1 and RR2 by the player's pressing operation (stop operation). Buttons DD7L1, DD7L2, DD7R1, DD7R2 are provided.

Further, a C / P button DD13 is provided in the vicinity of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 switches the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by a push button operation. In the state where payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet DD14 (cancel shoot) provided on the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD2. The paid-out medals are collected in the medal receiving unit DD15.
As a modification, the credit function is always enabled without switching credit / payout with the C / P button DD13, and when the C / P button DD13 is operated, the medals stored in the credits and the bet medals are bet. May be paid out. Further, when the game machine is configured as a managed game machine that can be played only by using the game value managed by the above-mentioned electronic data, the game value information (conventional) when the C / P button DDl3 is operated. Information such as a card on which the number of medals held by the player in the game machine is recorded) from the game machine or from the game machine management device communicably connected to the game machine. It may be discharged.

A lumbar panel DD18 (lumbar light guide plate) is arranged on the lower side of the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L1, DD7L2, DD7R1, and DD7R2. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a decorative panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the lumbar panel DD18, a name representing the model of the game machine 1 and various patterns are drawn by printing.

Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout outlet DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. Further, a speaker UD25L is provided on the upper left side of the display window UD2a of the upper door mechanism UD2, and a speaker UD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L, DD25R, UD25L, and UD25R notify the player of various information related to the game by sounds such as voice and music.

As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, a mask member 9200 is provided in the lower part of the upper door mechanism UD2 (substantially in the center of the game machine 1). As will be described in detail later, the mask member 9200 has a superposed area 9201 which is an area for making a part of the symbols of the four reels RL1, RL2, RR1 and RR2 visible, and a player can see from the front side. It has a decorative area 9202, which is another part of the area and can be produced by light, images, or the like.

In the decorative area 9202, for example, the number of medals paid out when the prize is established and the number of remaining medals credited are displayed. Normally, the maximum number of medals credited to the game machine 1 is 50, so 50 or less credits are displayed. In the state where the maximum number of 50 medals is credited, the inserted medals are paid out as they are from the medal payout outlet DD14.

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, the lower door mechanism DD2 is provided with a medal selector MSU that determines whether or not the medal inserted in the medal insertion slot DD5 is a regular medal. Further, as shown in FIG. 221, a safe that prevents unauthorized means from being inserted into the inside of the game machine 1 from the gap between the upper door mechanism UD2 and the lower door mechanism DD2 at the lower end of the upper door mechanism UD2. A guard SG is provided.

Returning to FIG. 218, the reel unit RU1 having four reels RL1, RL2, RR1, RR2 in the cabinet G at a position corresponding to the overlapping region 9201 (see FIG. 216) of the upper door mechanism UD2 at substantially the center. Is provided. Further, in the cabinet G, a main control board MS which is arranged on the reel unit RU1 and controls the operation of the entire game machine 1 and a sub control which is arranged on the inner side surface of the cabinet G and controls the effect in the game machine 1. A device SS, a hopper HU arranged on the reel unit RU1 to store and pay out coins, a power supply unit PU for supplying electricity to the game machine 1, and the like are housed. The main control board MS is a circuit (main control circuit) that controls the main flow of the game in the game machine 1, such as determining the internal winning combination, rotating and stopping the reels RL1, RL2, RR1, and RR2, and determining whether or not there is a prize. To configure. The sub-control device SS constitutes a circuit (sub-control circuit) that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like.

<Mask member 9200>
First, in the game machine, the prior art of the portion where a part of the reel symbol is visible will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 226. Usually, in the game machine, the reel for determining the outcome of the game result is rotated or the game ball is rotated in the area visible to the player. Such an area is covered with transparent glass or the like so that the player cannot touch it.

In the prior art, as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, such glass is supported by a middle panel from the inside of the gaming machine. The middle panel is formed with an opening (“reel opening” in the examples shown in FIGS. 222 and 223) for making the area for determining the outcome of the game result visible. Further, a film on which characters, patterns, etc. for decorating the periphery of the reel opening are printed is arranged between the glass and the middle panel. In order to ensure the visibility of the reel opening, the reel opening is also formed in this film.

The glass, the film and the middle panel are stacked and provided in the game machine, but in reality, as shown in FIG. 224, the liquid penetrates between the glass and the film and between the film and the middle panel. A possible gap is formed. In addition, in FIG. 224 and FIGS. 225, 227, and 228 described later, a large gap is shown for easy understanding.

By the way, not only the outside of the game machine but also the smoke of cigarettes may enter the inside of the glass reel opening through the gap of the game machine, and the inside of the game machine may be contaminated. When the reel opening of the glass becomes dirty in this way, the visibility of the reel opening deteriorates. Therefore, when the inside of the game machine becomes dirty, wipe the inside of the game machine with a wet cloth or the like as shown in FIG. 225. There is a need to.

In this way, when wiping from the inside of the game machine with a wet cloth or the like, in the configuration of the prior art, the gap between the glass and the film or between the film and the middle panel is included in the wet cloth due to the capillary phenomenon or the like. Moisture invades. Then, as shown in FIG. 226, when the reel opening is viewed from the outside of the game machine, the liquid that has penetrated around the reel opening appears like a stain, and the appearance becomes very poor.

Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, the reel opening (second opening 9410 described later) is covered between the middle panel (middle panel 9400 described later) and the film (decorative film 9500 described later), and at least a part thereof is covered. Is transparent, and a cover (cover member 9600 described later) having an outer shape smaller than that of glass (glass panel 9300 described later) is arranged.

In the example shown in FIG. 227, the cover (cover member 9600 described later) is arranged between the middle panel (middle panel 9400 described later) and the film (decorative film 9500 described later). Not limited to this, as long as it covers the reel opening (second opening 9410 described later) of the middle panel (middle panel 9400 described later), it may be arranged in the reel opening of the middle panel as shown in FIG. 228. Good.

The mask member 9200 configured in this way will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 229, the mask member 9200 includes a glass panel 9300 which is an example of an outer member, an inner panel 9400 which is an example of an inner member, a decorative film 9500 which is an example of a decorative member, and a cover member 9600. Be prepared. The mask member 9200 is arranged so as to stack the glass panel 9300, the decorative film 9500, the cover member 9600, and the middle panel 9400 in this order from the front side (outside the game machine) to the rear side (inside the game machine), and the upper door mechanism. It is attached to UD2 (see FIG. 220).

At least a part of the glass panel 9300 (for example, a superposed area 9201 which is a region where a part of the symbols of the four reels is visible) is translucent, and the edge is fixed to the cover member 9600.
Instead of the glass panel 9300, a panel member made of a translucent material other than glass such as an acrylic plate may be used. The panel member may have any structure as long as it is a translucent material and is formed so as to have a strength such that it is not damaged by an impact of being hit by a player.

The middle panel 9400 is arranged on the rear side (rear side) of the glass panel 9300, and as shown in FIG. 230, the second opening 9410, the cover member support portion 9420, the lower support portion 9425, and the effect device mounting portion. It includes a 9430, an upper light emitting device mounting portion 9440, a lower light emitting device mounting portion 9450, a wall portion 9460, a notch 9470, and a claw portion 9480.

The second opening 9410 is an opening formed in a substantially rectangular shape having long sides in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction in the substantially lower half of the middle panel 9400, and has four reels RL1, RL2, RR1, RR2. This is an area (see FIG. 216) for making a part of the design visible.

The cover member support portion 9420 is formed along the side edges of the second opening 9410 facing each other (the left and right side edges in the example shown in FIG. 230), and supports the cover member 9600. The cover member support portion 9420 is provided with a protruding portion 9421 that projects toward the front side (direction in which the cover member 9600 is attached). The protruding portions 9421 of the respective cover member support portions 9420 are provided at different positions (in the example shown in FIG. 230, different positions in the vertical direction) in the direction in which the side edges of the second opening 9410 extend. .. That is, a plurality of protrusions 9421 are provided, and these are provided asymmetrically with respect to the center of the middle panel 9400.

The lower support portion 9425 is a side extending along the lower end of the second opening 9410, on which the cover member 9600 is placed, and supports the cover member 9600 from below.

The effect device mounting portion 9430 is provided above the second opening 9410, and as shown in FIG. 231, the dot matrix effect device 9700 described later is mounted.

The upper light emitting device mounting portion 9440 is arranged around the effect device mounting portion 9430, and as shown in FIG. 231, the LED substrate 9800 on which the LED as the light emitting unit is arranged is mounted. The upper light emitting device mounting portion 9440 includes a light diffusing portion 9441 in which the inner diameter in at least one direction (vertical direction in the example shown in FIG. 230) in the direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction expands from the rear to the front. An engaging groove 9442 for dividing the light diffusing portion 9441 is formed on the inner wall forming the light diffusing portion 9441. A side edge of a light-shielding plate 9443 (see FIG. 232) having a surface having an area larger than the cross-sectional area of the light diffusing portion 9441 in a predetermined direction (vertical direction in the example shown in FIG. 230) is inserted into the engaging groove 9442. By inserting the light-shielding plate 9443 into the engaging groove 9442, the light diffusing portion 9441 is divided into a plurality of regions. Further, for example, in the light diffusing portion 9441, a plurality of engaging grooves 9442 are formed at predetermined intervals, and by inserting the light-shielding plate 9443 into all of the plurality of engaging grooves 9442, the light diffusing portion 9441 has a predetermined size. It is possible to arrange a plurality of regions, and by inserting the light-shielding plate 9443 only in the desired engaging groove 9442, it is possible to adjust the size of the divided region of the light diffusing portion 9441. ..

The lower light emitting device mounting portion 9450 is arranged below the second opening 9410, and as shown in FIG. 231, a 7-segment substrate 9900 in which a 7-segment LED as a light emitting portion is arranged is mounted.

The wall portion 9460 projects forward and is formed along the outer edge of the middle panel 9400. The inner diameter of the wall portion 9460 is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer diameter of the portion of the outer diameter of the decorative film 9500 excluding the convex portion 9520 and the concave portion 9530 described later. That is, the wall portion 9460 is arranged so as to surround the decorative film 9500, functions as a guide when the decorative film 9500 is attached, and prevents the decorative film 9500 from being displaced after the attachment.

The notch 9470 is a portion where a part of the wall portion 9460 is interrupted, and is provided at a position corresponding to the convex portion 9520 described later of the decorative film 9500 arranged in the wall portion 9460, and the convex portion 9520 is inserted. The notch 9470 has different positions (vertical direction in the example shown in FIG. 230) of at least a part of the wall portions 9460 facing each other (left and right sides in the example shown in FIG. 230). ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front and back sides from being mistaken when the decorative film 9500 is attached, and it is only necessary to align the convex portion 9520 of the decorative film 9500 with the position of the notch 9470 without strictly checking the front and back sides. Since the decorative film 9500 can be correctly attached, the work efficiency is improved.

A plurality of claw portions 9480 are arranged along the wall portion 9460 and engage with the side edges of the glass panel 9300. The claw portion 9480 projects inward (center side of the middle panel 9400) from the wall portion 9460. The claw portions 9480 have different positions (vertical direction in the example shown in FIG. 230) of at least a part of the wall portions 9460 facing each other (left and right sides in the example shown in FIG. 230). ing. The recess 9530, which will be described later, of the decorative film 9500 engages with the root of the claw portion 9480. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front and back sides from being mistaken when the decorative film 9500 is attached, and it is only necessary to align the position of the recess 9530 of the decorative film 9500 with the position of the claw portion 9480 without strictly checking the front and back sides. Since the decorative film 9500 can be correctly attached, work efficiency is improved.

As shown in FIG. 229, the decorative film 9500 is arranged between the glass panel 9300 and the middle panel 9400. The decorative film 9500 is formed in substantially the same shape as the region surrounded by the wall portion 9460 (see FIG. 230) of the middle panel 9400 when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 236, in the decorative film 9500, a first opening 9510 is formed downward from the center, and a plurality of convex portions 9520 and a plurality of concave portions 9530 are formed on the outer edge. Further, as will be described in detail later, the decorative film 9500 includes a plurality of decorative portions 9540 to which different patterns (characters, figures, characters, etc.) are attached.

As shown in FIG. 229, the first opening 9510 is an opening formed in a substantially rectangular shape having long sides in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction in the substantially lower half of the decorative film 9500. While mounted on the middle panel 9400, it forms a superposed region 9201 that overlaps with the second opening 9410 of the middle panel 9400 in a front view (when viewed from the front). As shown in FIG. 216, the superimposition region 9201 is a region for making a part of the symbols of the four reels RL1, RL2, RR1, RR2 visible.

As shown in FIG. 236, the convex portion 9520 is a portion where the outer edge of the decorative film 9500 projects outward, and is inserted into the notch 9470 (see FIG. 230) of the middle panel 9400 when attached to the middle panel 9400. Is done. That is, the convex portion 9520 is provided at a position corresponding to the notch 9470. Further, the convex portion 9520 has at least a part of the decorative film 9500 on opposite sides (left and right sides in the example shown in FIG. They are different from each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front and back sides from being mistaken when the decorative film 9500 is attached, and it is only necessary to align the convex portion 9520 of the decorative film 9500 with the position of the notch 9470 without strictly checking the front and back sides. Since the decorative film 9500 can be correctly attached, the work efficiency is improved.

The recess 9530 is a portion in which the outer edge of the decorative film 9500 is recessed inward, and engages with the root of the claw portion 9480 (see FIG. 230) of the middle panel 9400 when attached to the middle panel 9400. That is, the recess 9530 is provided at a position corresponding to the claw portion 9480. Further, the recesses 9530 have at least a part of the decorative film 9500 facing each other (left and right sides in the example shown in FIG. 236), and the positions in the extending direction (vertical direction in the example shown in FIG. It's different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front and back sides from being mistaken when the decorative film 9500 is attached, and it is only necessary to align the position of the recess 9530 of the decorative film 9500 with the position of the claw portion 9480 without strictly checking the front and back sides. Since the decorative film 9500 can be correctly attached, work efficiency is improved.

Further, in the state where the decorative film 9500 is attached to the middle panel 9400, the dot matrix effect device 9700 shown in FIG. 231 and the LED substrate 9800 in the middle panel 9400 are attached, and the light diffusing portion 9441 (see FIG. 231) is divided. As shown in FIG. 237, a plurality of decorative portions 9540 (9540a to 9540g) are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of regions and the lower light emitting device mounting portion 9450 to which the 7-segment substrate 9900 is mounted. There is. The decorative portions 9540a, b, d, e, and g each indicate that one light diffusing portion 9441 is divided into a plurality of light diffusing portions 9443 (see FIG. 232). For example, in the decorative portion 9540a, since the light diffusing portion 9441 is divided into three, three regions are formed. The decorative portion 9540a can be formed in two regions if the light diffusing portion 9441 is divided into two, or in one region if the light diffusing portion 9441 is not divided. It can also be formed. A design (characters, figures, characters, etc.) is attached to each of the plurality of decorative portions 9540 (9540 a to g). The decorative film 9500 is formed of a translucent material, and the decorative portion 9540 is formed by attaching a translucent colored film or printing with a translucent ink. Further, at least a part of the decorative portion 9540 may be a diffusing portion capable of diffusing the light emitted from the LED. For such a diffusing portion, for example, a light diffusing film may be attached to the rear surface (LED side surface) of the decorative film 9500, or the decorative film 9500 itself may be formed of a resin containing light diffusing particles. ..

As shown in FIG. 232, the dot matrix effect device 9700 is attached to the front side of the effect device mounting portion 9430 of the middle panel 9400 via the middle panel base (not shown), and the dot matrix is stacked from front to back. It includes a reflector 9710 and a dot matrix LED substrate 9720 in which an LED as a light emitting unit is arranged. Note that FIG. 232 shows a state in which the second dot matrix reflector 9710 from the left is removed for the sake of explanation. In the example shown in FIG. 232, the dot matrix reflector 9710 and the dot matrix LED substrate 9720 are formed in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front side, and are formed in the left-right direction (the direction in which the side edge of the second opening 9410 of the middle panel 9400 extends). Although they are arranged, they may have any shape (for example, other polygonal shapes, circular shapes, etc.), only one may be provided, or they may be arranged in any direction (for example, vertical direction). It may be arranged in an arbitrary form (for example, a circular shape).

The dot matrix reflector 9710 forms a space in which the inner diameter in at least one direction (vertical direction and horizontal direction in the example shown in FIG. 232) perpendicular to the front-rear direction expands from the back to the front, and the front and back are opened. A plurality of cells 9715 are arranged in at least one direction (vertical direction and horizontal direction in the example shown in FIG. 232) in a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction. In the example shown in FIG. 232, the dot matrix reflector 9710 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape when viewed from the front side, and is arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions, but has an arbitrary shape (for example, other polygonal shape or circular shape). Etc.), may be arranged only in an arbitrary direction (for example, in the vertical direction, etc.), or may be arranged in an arbitrary manner (for example, a circular shape or a predetermined shape such as a character or a pattern as a whole). May be good.

In the dot matrix reflector 9710, reflector screw holes 9711 for fixing the dot matrix reflector 9710 and engagement holes 9712 are alternately formed in the vicinity of the side edges. The reflector screw hole 9711 penetrates in the front-rear direction and is screwed with a fixing member (for example, a screw or the like) for fixing the dot matrix reflector 9710 to the middle panel base (not shown). The engagement hole 9712 is a hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and an engagement protrusion 9730 that projects from the rear to the front of the middle panel base (not shown) is inserted.

In the dot matrix LED substrate 9720, a plurality of LEDs that emit light are arranged on the front side based on the control of the main control substrate MS (see FIG. 218) and the sub control device SS (see FIG. 218). The dot matrix LED substrate 9720 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the dot matrix reflector 9710 when viewed from the front side, and has a substrate screw hole 9721 for fixing the dot matrix LED substrate 9720 near the side edge and an engagement hole 9722. And are formed alternately. The substrate screw hole 9721 penetrates in the front-rear direction and is screwed with a fixing member (for example, a screw or the like) for fixing the dot matrix LED substrate 9720 to the middle panel base (not shown). The engagement hole 9722 is a hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and an engagement protrusion 9730 that projects from the rear to the front of the middle panel base (not shown) is inserted. The substrate screw holes 9721 and the engagement holes 9722 of the dot matrix LED substrate 9720 overlap with the reflector screw holes 9711 and the engagement holes 9712 of the dot matrix reflector 9710 in a state where the dot matrix reflector 9710 and the dot matrix LED substrate 9720 are overlapped with each other. It is formed at the position.

As a result, in the assembly work of the game machine 1, the dot matrix reflector 9710 and the dot matrix LED substrate 9720 can be stacked and mounted together without being individually mounted, so that the work efficiency is improved. Further, by alternately providing the reflector screw holes 9711 and the engagement holes 9712 and the substrate screw holes 9721 and the engagement holes 9722, in the assembly work of the game machine 1, the engagement holes 9712 and the engagement holes 9722 are first provided. By inserting the engaging protrusion 9730 of the middle panel base (not shown), the positioning and temporary fixing of the dot matrix reflector 9710 and the dot matrix LED substrate 9720 are completed. Then, the dot matrix reflector 9710 and the dot matrix LED substrate 9720 can be fixed by screwing the fixing member into the reflector screw hole 9711 and the substrate screw hole 9721 in a stable state at this accurate position. Therefore, positioning in the assembling work of the game machine 1 becomes easy, and the number of times of screwing can be reduced as compared with the case where the engaging hole 9712 and the engaging hole 9722 are made of screw holes, so that the work efficiency is improved.

As shown in FIG. 229, the cover member 9600 is arranged between the middle panel 9400 and the decorative film 9500, covers the second opening 9410 of the middle panel 9400 from the front side, and is at least partially translucent. The outer shape is smaller than that of the glass panel 9300. As shown in FIG. 233, the cover member 9600 includes a cover portion 9610, a support portion 9620, and a lower end side 9630. FIG. 233 is a view of the cover member 9600 viewed from the lower right on the front side.

The cover portion 9610 is formed with substantially the same outer shape as the inner shape of the second opening 9410 of the middle panel 9400 when viewed from the front, and is translucent. That is, the cover portion 9610 is arranged in the overlapping region 9201 (see FIG. 216).

The support portion 9620 is formed along the side edges of the cover portion 9610 facing each other (left and right side edges in the example shown in FIG. 233), and is front side to the cover member support portion 9420 (see FIG. 230) of the middle panel 9400. It is placed on top of each other. The cover member 9600 is fixed to the cover member support portion 9420 of the middle panel 9400 with a fixing member (for example, a screw or the like) from the front side of the middle panel 9400 in the support portion 9620. Further, the support portion 9620 is a hole portion that penetrates the protruding portion 9421 (see FIG. 230) of the middle panel 9400 in the front-rear direction, and is provided with an engaging portion 9621 through which the protruding portion 9421 is inserted. The engaging portion 9621 is not limited to the hole portion, and may be a recessed portion that is recessed from the rear side to the front side as long as it can be engaged with the protruding portion 9421, or the hole portion and the recessed portion are used in combination. It may be at least one of a recess or a hole. The engaging portions 9621 of the respective support portions 9620 are provided at different positions (in the example shown in FIG. 233, different positions in the vertical direction) in the direction in which the side edges of the cover portion 9610 extend. That is, a plurality of engaging portions 9621 are provided, and these are provided asymmetrically with respect to the center of the cover member 9600. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front and back sides from being mistaken when the cover member 9600 is mounted, and the position of the engaging portion 9621 of the cover member 9600 can be determined by the protruding portion 9421 of the middle panel 9400 without strictly checking the front and back sides. Since the cover member 9600 can be mounted correctly just by adjusting the position, work efficiency is improved.

The lower end side 9630 is a side extending along the lower edge of the cover portion 9610 on the rear end side of the cover portion 9610, and is inserted into the rear side of the lower support portion 9425 (see FIG. 230) of the middle panel 9400. Further, the lower end side 9630 is formed at a position protruding from the cover portion 9610, which is the central portion, to the back side (rear side), and functions as a step portion protruding from the central portion to the back side. That is, of the lower edge of the cover portion 9610, the front end side of the cover member 9600 is placed on the lower support portion 9425 of the middle panel 9400, and the lower end side 9630 formed on the rear end side is the lower support portion 9425. It is plugged into the back side. Further, the width (length in the left-right direction) of the lower end side 9630 is formed to be substantially the same as the width (length in the left-right direction) of the lower edge of the second opening 9410 (see FIG. 230) of the middle panel 9400. ing. As a result, when attaching the cover member 9600 to the middle panel 9400, the lower end side 9630 of the cover member 9600 is simply inserted into the second opening 9410 and inserted into the rear side of the lower support portion 9425 with respect to the middle panel 9400. Since the position of the cover member 9600 in the left-right direction is determined, work efficiency is improved.

The procedure for attaching the cover member 9600 to the middle panel 9400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 and 235. FIG. 234 is a view seen from the right rear side, and FIG. 235 is a view seen from the right front side. First, as shown in FIG. 234, the lower end side 9630 of the cover member 9600 is inserted into the inside of the second opening 9410 and inserted into the rear side of the lower support portion 9425. Next, as shown in FIG. 235, the upper side of the cover member 9600 is raised, the protruding portion 9421 of the middle panel 9400 is inserted into the engaging portion 9621 of the cover member 9600, and the fixing member (fixing member (fixing member) from the front side of the middle panel 9400. For example, it is fixed to the cover member support portion 9420 of the middle panel 9400 with a screw or the like).

By constructing the mask member 9200 as described above, the following effects can be obtained. The mask member 9200 has a cross section shown in FIG. 238. FIG. 238 shows a vertical cross section of the mask member 9200 in the lower portion of the overlapping region 9201. As shown in FIG. 238, the mask member 9200 includes a glass panel 9300, an inner panel 9400, a decorative film 9500, and a cover member 9600. The glass panel 9300 is at least partially translucent, and the middle panel 9400 is arranged on the back side (rear side) of the glass panel 9300. The decorative film 9500 is arranged in the accommodating portion 9203 formed by the glass panel 9300 and the middle panel 9400. The cover member 9600 is arranged on the back side (rear side) of the decorative film 9500. Further, a first opening 9510 is formed in the decorative film 9500, a second opening 9410 is formed in the middle panel 9400, and at least a part of the first opening 9510 and the second opening 9410 is formed. Overlapping in front view forms a superposed region 9201. Further, the cover member 9600 covers the second opening 9410, is at least partially translucent, and has an outer shape smaller than that of the glass panel 9300.

With this configuration, the cover member 9600 covers the second opening 9410 of the middle panel 9400, so that the decorative film 9500 arranged in the accommodating portion 9203 formed by the glass panel 9300 and the middle panel 9400 can be formed. Since it can be covered with the cover member 9600, it is possible to prevent water droplets or the like from invading the accommodating portion 9203 even if the film is wiped with a wet cloth or the like.
Further, since it is possible to prevent water droplets and the like from entering the accommodating portion 9203 only by the cover member 9600 covering the second opening 9410 of the middle panel 9400, it is necessary to make the middle panel 9400 and the glass panel 9300 larger than necessary. There is no increase in manufacturing cost or reduction in design freedom.
Therefore, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing cost while preventing the liquid from entering the space composed of the plurality of members and deteriorating the appearance.

Further, it includes a cabinet G, an upper door mechanism UD2 that can be opened and closed on the front side of the cabinet G, and a reel unit RU1 that variably displays identification information.
The glass panel 9300, the middle panel 9400, and the decorative film 9500 are provided in the upper door mechanism UD2, and the reel unit RU1 can be visually recognized from the area where the first opening 9510 and the second opening 9410 overlap in a front view. It is possible.

As a result, even if the cover member 9600 is wiped with water in the region where the first opening 9510 and the second opening 9410 that make the reel unit RU1 visible overlap with each other, water droplets or the like invade the accommodating portion 9203. Can be prevented. Therefore, since the cover member can be wiped with water without fear of the appearance being deteriorated due to the intrusion of water droplets or the like, it is possible to maintain a good visibility state in the region where the variable display unit can be seen.

Further, since the lower end side 9630 protruding from the cover portion 9610 to the back side (rear side) is formed on the side edge of the cover member, water droplets or the like from the water-wipe cover portion 9610 are blocked by the lower end side 9630. It is possible to more reliably prevent water droplets or the like from entering the accommodating portion 9203.

Further, since the dot matrix LED substrate 9720, the LED substrate 9800, and the 7-segment substrate 9900 provided with the LED are attached to the middle panel 9400, the effect is produced by emitting light from the LED via the decorative film 9500 and the glass panel 9300. By attaching the dot matrix LED substrate 9720, the LED substrate 9800 and the 7-segment substrate 9900 to the middle panel 9400 to perform such an effect, such a dot matrix LED substrate 9720, the LED substrate 9800 and 7 can be attached. Compared to the case where the seg board 9900 is attached to other members of the game machine, the arrangement of various members inside the game machine is organized, so that the degree of freedom in design is improved, and the light emitting board is attached to the game machine at a predetermined position. Since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated member for the purpose, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing cost.

Further, since at least a part of the decorative film 9500 is provided with a diffusing portion capable of diffusing the light emitted from the LED, it is possible to produce an effect of diffusing the light emitted from the LED through the glass panel 9300. Since such a diffusion portion is provided in the decorative film 9500, the glass panel 9300 can produce the above-mentioned effect while using a highly versatile member. In addition, in general, different models and the like have different production modes. Even in such a case, the glass panel 9300 may use the decorative film 9500 having a diffusing portion having a shape corresponding to the model while using the same member, so that the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The shape of the decorative film 9500 is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 236, and may be a different shape as long as it brings about a decorative effect. For example, the size may correspond to only a part of the area in front of the middle panel 9500. In this case, the film (reel) for the front of the dot matrix effect device 9700 without providing the first opening 9510 for visually recognizing the reel. The decorative member may be composed of a plurality of decorative films such as a film for the upper region), a film for the left region of the reel, a film for the right region of the reel, and a film for the lower region of the reel. When composed of a plurality of films in this way, there is a demerit of increasing the number of parts, but since the design of each film and the presence or absence of light diffusivity can be different, the texture of the decoration should be different for each place. It is possible to enhance the decorative effect. Further, the decorative film 9500 is not limited to one sheet, and a plurality of sheets may be superposed in the front-rear direction so that the appearance of the design changes depending on the light emitting mode of the LEDs arranged behind the decorative film. ..

Further, the cover member 9600 is fixed by a fixing member from the front side of the middle panel 9400. As a result, in the process of assembling the middle panel 9400, the cover member 9600, the decorative film 9500 and the glass panel 9300, the cover member 9600 is first fixed to the front side of the middle panel 9400 with a fixing member, and the decorative film 9500 is arranged. , Completed by assembling the glass panel 9300. For this reason, since the work is completed only on the front side of the middle panel 9400, there is no need to turn it over to the back side. Therefore, the efficiency of the assembling work of the game machine is improved, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, in the process of attaching the cover member 9600 to the middle panel 9400, by inserting the cover member 9600 into the lower support portion 9425 of the middle panel 9400, the cover member 9600 is supported by determining the position in the insertion direction with respect to the middle panel 9400. .. Therefore, it becomes easy to fix the cover member 9600 to the middle panel 9400 with the fixing member. Therefore, the efficiency of the assembling work of the game machine is further improved, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the middle panel 9400 includes a protrusion 9421. The cover member 9600 is provided with at least one of a recess or a hole at a position corresponding to the protrusion 9421. As a result, in the process of attaching the cover member 9600 to the middle panel 9400, by aligning at least one of the recessed portion or the hole portion of the cover member 9600 with the position of the protruding portion 9421 of the middle panel 9400, the cover member with respect to the middle panel 9400 The position of 9600 is determined. For this reason, for example, it is not necessary to finely adjust the position after the cover member is fitted to the inner member, so that the work efficiency is improved and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the cover member 9600 provided with at least one of a recessed portion or a hole portion (hereinafter, also referred to as a “dented portion or the like”) at a position corresponding to the asymmetrically provided protruding portion 9421 is different from that when viewed from the front. The positions of the recesses and the like with respect to the center are different from those when viewed from the back. As a result, since the surface on which the cover member 9600 is attached to the middle panel 9400 is clear, it is possible to prevent the cover member 9600 from being attached to the middle panel 9400 from an erroneous surface in the process of attaching the cover member 9600 to the middle panel 9400. Therefore, the efficiency of the assembling work of the game machine is further improved, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In the above description, it is assumed that the decorative film 9500 is provided, but as a modification, the configuration may not include the decorative film 9500. In this case, a design such as a character or a pattern for decorating the periphery of the reel opening may be directly printed on the back side of the glass panel 9300 or the middle panel 9400. Further, the seal member on which the design is printed may be attached to the back side of the glass panel 9300 or the front or back side of the middle panel 9400, or these methods may be used in combination. When the decorative film 9500 is omitted, the cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the decorative film 9500 is present. Even if the decorative film 9500 is not provided, the space formed by the back side of the glass panel 9300 and the middle panel 9400 is closed by the cover member 9600, so that moisture enters the space through the opening of the middle panel 9400. Can be suppressed.

However, when the decorative film 9500 is adopted, there is an advantage that the design of the middle panel part can be changed by changing only the decorative film 9500 when the manufacturer trades in the game machine once shipped and collects and recycles it. Therefore, assuming recycling, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost in the long run by using the decorative film 9500.

Further, if decorativeness is emphasized, a design portion is provided by printing or a sticker on at least a part of the members constituting the space such as the back side of the glass panel 9300 and the middle panel 9400, and the decorative film 9500 is further applied to the space. It may be arranged in the (accommodation part) to realize a design having a sense of depth in the front-rear direction.

Further, when the accommodating portion composed of the glass panel 9300 and the middle panel 9400 has a certain thickness in the front-rear direction, the decorative member may be replaced with the decorative film 9500 or coexist with the decorative film 9500. A three-dimensional decorative portion having a predetermined motif such as a character as a three-dimensional shape may be provided. Further, a drive unit (motor, solenoid, etc.) for moving the three-dimensional decorative unit may be provided to form the movable decorative unit.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix F>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal, etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that the start lever is operated by the player, and the plurality of reels are used. Detects that the start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels have been pressed by the player, and outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. The operation of the stepping motor is based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the driving force of each reel to each reel, and the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, it draws a lot based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”) A so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected is known.

As such a conventional game machine, there is known a structure that holds a decorative member (display panel, printing film, etc.) and includes an outer transparent member and an inner transparent member that sandwich the decorative member from the outside and the inside.

On the other hand, if the structure is sandwiched between a plurality of members from the front and back as described above, disassembly and cleaning are required when dust gets inside, so that the opening of the printing film is communicated so that the cleaning can be performed without disassembling. A gaming machine having an opening in the inner transparent member has been proposed (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-36715).
According to such a game machine, if the structure is such that the inner surface of the outer member can be cleaned from the inside of the door with the front door of the game machine open, dust is dusted from the opening of the inner transparent member communicating with the opening of the printing film. It can be easily removed by wiping.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when water is wiped with a wet cloth or the like, water enters from a slight gap of each member at the peripheral edge of the opening due to water droplets dripping into the space where the printing film is housed or suction due to the capillary phenomenon. There was a problem that the appearance was not good and the water that had entered could not be easily removed.

Further, if the decorative member is sandwiched between two large members as shown in FIG. 2 of the prior art document 1, the intrusion of water can be made inconspicuous, but the manufacturing cost of the member is increased and the degree of freedom in design is reduced. There was a problem.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to suppress manufacturing costs while preventing liquids from entering a space composed of a plurality of members and deteriorating the appearance.

(F-1)
(1) An outer member (for example, a glass panel 9300) that is at least partially translucent and
An inner member (for example, the middle panel 9400) arranged on the back side of the outer member, and
A cover member (for example, a cover member 9600) arranged on the back surface side of the outer member is provided.
An opening (for example, a second opening 9410) is formed in the inner member.
A game machine characterized in that the cover member covers the opening, is at least partially translucent, and has an outer shape smaller than that of the outer member.

According to the invention of (1), an outer member, an inner member, and a cover member are provided. The outer member is at least partially translucent. The inner member is arranged on the back side of the outer member. The cover member is arranged on the back side of the outer member.
Further, an opening is formed in the inner member.
The cover member covers the opening, is at least partially translucent, and is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the outer member.

According to such a configuration, the opening of the inner member can be covered with the cover member, so that even if water is wiped with a wet cloth or the like, water droplets or the like can be prevented from entering between the plurality of members. It becomes possible.
Further, since it is possible to prevent water droplets and the like from entering between a plurality of members only by the cover member covering the opening of the inner member, it is not necessary to make the inner member and the outer member larger than necessary, and the manufacturing cost. It does not increase the number of items or reduce the degree of freedom in design.
Therefore, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing cost while preventing the liquid from entering the space composed of the plurality of members and deteriorating the appearance.

(2) A game machine main body (for example, cabinet G), a door member that can be opened and closed on the front side of the game machine main body (for example, upper door mechanism UD2), and a variable display unit (for example, variable display) that displays identification information in a variable manner. With a reel unit RU1)
The outer member and the inner member are provided on the door member.
The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the variable display unit can be visually recognized from the opening.

According to the invention of (2), a game machine main body, a door member that can be opened and closed on the front side of the game machine main body, and a variable display unit that variablely displays identification information are provided.
The outer member and the inner member are provided on the door member, and the variable display portion can be visually recognized from the opening of the inner member.

According to such a configuration, even if the cover member is wiped with water from the opening that makes the variable display portion visible, it is possible to prevent water droplets or the like from entering between the plurality of members. Therefore, since the cover member can be wiped with water without fear of the appearance being deteriorated due to the intrusion of water droplets or the like, it is possible to maintain a good visibility state in the region where the variable display unit can be seen.

(3) The game according to (1) or (2), wherein the cover member has a stepped portion (for example, a lower end side 9630) protruding from the central portion to the back surface side on the side edge. Machine.

According to such a configuration, since a step portion protruding from the central portion to the back surface side is formed on the side edge of the cover member, water droplets or the like from the central portion wiped with water are blocked by the step portion, so that a plurality of steps are formed. It is possible to more reliably prevent water droplets or the like from entering the space composed of the members.

(F-2)
(1) An outer member (for example, a glass panel 9300) that is at least partially translucent and
An inner member (for example, the middle panel 9400) arranged on the back side of the outer member, and
A cover member (for example, a cover member 9600) arranged on the back surface side of the outer member is provided.
An opening (for example, a second opening 9410) is formed in the inner member.
The cover member covers the opening, is at least partially translucent, and is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the outer member.
A gaming machine characterized in that a light emitting substrate (for example, a dot matrix LED substrate 9720, an LED substrate 9800, and a 7-segment substrate 9900) including a light emitting unit (for example, an LED) is attached to the inner member.

According to the invention of (1), an outer member, an inner member, and a cover member are provided. The outer member is at least partially translucent. The inner member is arranged on the back side of the outer member. The cover member is arranged on the back side of the outer member.
Further, an opening is formed in the inner member.
The cover member covers the opening, is at least partially translucent, and is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the outer member.
Further, a light emitting substrate provided with a light emitting portion is attached to the inner member.

According to such a configuration, the opening of the inner member can be covered with the cover member, so that even if water is wiped with a wet cloth or the like, water droplets or the like can be prevented from entering between the plurality of members. It becomes possible.
Further, since it is possible to prevent water droplets and the like from entering between a plurality of members only by the cover member covering the opening of the inner member, it is not necessary to make the inner member and the outer member larger than necessary, and the manufacturing cost. It does not increase the number of items or reduce the degree of freedom in design.
Therefore, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing cost while preventing the liquid from entering the space composed of the plurality of members and deteriorating the appearance.

Further, since a light emitting substrate provided with a light emitting portion is attached to the inner member, it is possible to produce an effect by emitting light from the light emitting portion via the outer member, and a light emitting substrate for performing such an effect can be obtained. By attaching to an internal member, as compared with the case where such a light emitting board is attached to other members of the game machine, the arrangement of various members inside the game machine is arranged, which improves the degree of freedom in design and emits light. Since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated member for attaching the substrate to the game machine at a predetermined position, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing cost.

(2) A variable display unit (for example, reel unit RU1) that variablely displays identification information, and
A decorative member (for example, a decorative film 9500) arranged in a housing portion formed of the outer member and the inner member, and the like.
With
The variable display unit can be visually recognized from the opening.
The gaming machine according to (1), wherein at least a part of the decorative member (for example, the decorative portion 9540) has a diffusing portion capable of diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting portion.

According to the invention of (2), a variable display unit for variably displaying identification information and a decorative member arranged in a housing portion formed by an outer member and an inner member are provided.
Then, the variable display unit can be visually recognized from the opening.
Further, at least a part of the decorative member has a diffusing portion capable of diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting portion.

According to such a configuration, even if the opening that makes the variable display portion visible is wiped with water, it is possible to prevent water droplets or the like from entering the accommodating portion. Therefore, since the cover member can be wiped with water without fear of the appearance being deteriorated due to the intrusion of water droplets or the like, it is possible to maintain a good visibility state in the region where the variable display unit can be seen.

Further, since at least a part of the decorative member is provided with a diffusing portion capable of diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting portion, it is possible to produce an effect of diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting portion via the outer member. Since such a diffusion portion is provided on the decorative member, the above-mentioned effect can be achieved while using a highly versatile member for the outer member. In addition, in general, different models and the like have different production modes. Even in such a case, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing cost because the outer member may be a decorative member having a diffusion portion having a shape corresponding to the model while using the same member.

(F-3)
(1) An outer member (for example, a glass panel 9300) that is at least partially translucent and
An inner member (for example, the middle panel 9400) arranged on the back side of the outer member, and
A cover member (for example, a cover member 9600) arranged on the back surface side of the outer member is provided.
An opening (for example, a second opening 9410) is formed in the inner member.
The cover member covers the opening, is at least partially translucent, and is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the outer member.
A game machine characterized in that the cover member is fixed by a fixing member from the front surface side of the inner member.

According to the invention of (1), an outer member, an inner member, and a cover member are provided. The outer member is at least partially translucent. The inner member is arranged on the back side of the outer member. The cover member is arranged on the back side of the outer member.
Further, the cover member covers the opening, is at least partially translucent, and is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the outer member.
Further, the cover member is fixed by a fixing member from the front side of the inner member.

According to such a configuration, the opening of the inner member can be covered with the cover member, so that even if water is wiped with a wet cloth or the like, water droplets or the like can be prevented from entering between the plurality of members. It becomes possible.
Further, since it is possible to prevent water droplets and the like from entering between a plurality of members only by the cover member covering the opening of the inner member, it is not necessary to make the inner member and the outer member larger than necessary, and the manufacturing cost. It does not increase the number of items or reduce the degree of freedom in design.
Therefore, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing cost while preventing the liquid from entering the space composed of the plurality of members and deteriorating the appearance.

Further, the cover member is fixed by a fixing member from the front side of the inner member. As a result, the process of assembling the inner member, the cover member, and the outer member is completed by first fixing the cover member with the fixing member to the front side of the inner member and then assembling the outer member. For this reason, since the work is completed only on the front side of the inner member, there is no need to turn it over to the back side. Therefore, the efficiency of the assembling work of the game machine is improved, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

(2) The inner member is characterized in that the cover member can be inserted and has a support portion (for example, a lower support portion 9425) for supporting the inserted cover member. Game machine.

According to the invention of (2), the inner member can insert the cover member and has a support portion for supporting the inserted cover member.

According to such a configuration, in the step of attaching the cover member to the inner member, by inserting the cover member into the support portion of the inner member, the position of the cover member in the insertion direction with respect to the inner member is determined and supported. Therefore, it becomes easy to fix the cover member to the inner member with the fixing member. Therefore, the efficiency of the assembling work of the game machine is further improved, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

(F-4)
(1) An outer member (for example, a glass panel 9300) that is at least partially translucent and
An inner member (for example, the middle panel 9400) arranged on the back side of the outer member, and
A cover member (for example, a cover member 9600) arranged on the back surface side of the outer member is provided.
An opening (for example, a second opening 9410) is formed in the inner member.
The cover member covers the opening, is at least partially translucent, and is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the outer member.
The inner member comprises a protrusion (eg, protrusion 9421).
A game machine characterized in that the cover member includes at least one of a recessed portion and a hole portion at a position corresponding to the protruding portion.

According to the invention of (1), an outer member, an inner member, and a cover member are provided. The outer member is at least partially translucent. The inner member is arranged on the back side of the outer member. The cover member is arranged on the back side of the outer member.
Further, an opening is formed in the inner member.
The cover member covers the opening, is at least partially translucent, and is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the outer member.

According to such a configuration, the opening of the inner member can be covered with the cover member, so that even if water is wiped with a wet cloth or the like, water droplets or the like can be prevented from entering between the plurality of members. It becomes possible.
Further, since it is possible to prevent water droplets and the like from entering between a plurality of members only by the cover member covering the opening of the inner member, it is not necessary to make the inner member and the outer member larger than necessary, and the manufacturing cost. It does not increase the number of items or reduce the degree of freedom in design.
Therefore, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing cost while preventing the liquid from entering the space composed of the plurality of members and deteriorating the appearance.

Further, the inner member includes a protruding portion. The cover member is provided with at least one of a recess or a hole at a position corresponding to the protrusion. As a result, in the step of attaching the cover member to the inner member, the position of the cover member with respect to the inner member is determined by aligning at least one of the recessed portion and the hole portion of the cover member with the position of the protruding portion of the inner member. For this reason, for example, it is not necessary to finely adjust the position after the cover member is fitted to the inner member, so that the work efficiency is improved and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

(2) A plurality of the protrusions are provided.
The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the plurality of protrusions are provided asymmetrically with respect to the center of the inner member.

According to the invention of (2), a plurality of projecting portions are provided, and the plurality of projecting portions are provided asymmetrically with respect to the center of the inner member.

According to such a configuration, the cover member provided with at least one of the recessed portion and the hole portion (hereinafter, also referred to as “dented portion and the like”) at the position corresponding to the asymmetrically provided protruding portion is from the front surface. The positions of the recesses and the like with respect to the center differ between when viewed from the back and when viewed from the back. As a result, since the surface on which the cover member is attached to the inner member is clear, it is possible to prevent the cover member from being attached to the inner member from an erroneous surface in the process of attaching the cover member to the inner member. Therefore, the efficiency of the assembling work of the game machine is further improved, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

[10th Embodiment]
The first to ninth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the tenth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the ninth embodiment also applies to the tenth embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 239 and 240, the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment is a reel provided with three reels RL, RC, and RR substantially in the center in a cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side. A unit RU is provided, and an irradiation unit B including a projector device for projecting an image on a screen provided on a front door (not shown) is arranged on the reel unit RU, and coins are stored under the reel unit RU. A hopper HU to be paid out, a power supply unit PU for supplying electricity to the game machine 1, and the like are arranged. Further, the side plate 2 of the cabinet G has a wooden plate member fitted inside a metal frame, and a substrate holding unit 8000 accommodating the sub control device SS is attached to one side (left side in FIG. 239). On the other side (right side in FIG. 239), the main control board MS is mounted in a case. The main control board MS constitutes a circuit (main control circuit) that controls the main flow of the game in the game machine 1, such as determining the internal winning combination, rotating and stopping the reels RL, RC, and RR, and determining whether or not there is a prize. To do. The sub-control device SS constitutes a circuit (sub-control circuit) that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like.

<Board holding unit 8000>
The substrate holding unit 8000 enables various substrates to be attached to plate materials (side plates, back plates, top plates, etc.) constituting the cabinet G in a covered state. In the tenth embodiment, the substrate holding unit 8000 is a sub-relay substrate SS1 (see FIGS. 245 and 246 described later) which is an example of the first substrate included in the sub-control device SS and a sub-control which is an example of the second substrate. The substrate SS2 (see FIGS. 245 and 246 described later) is individually covered and housed, and is attached to the side plate 2 of the cabinet G. The substrate holding unit 8000 can accommodate not only the substrate included in the sub control device SS but also any substrate such as the main control board MS.

As shown in FIGS. 241 to 244, the substrate holding unit 8000 includes a bracket 8100 which is an example of a holding member, a sub relay board accommodating portion 8200, and a sub control substrate accommodating portion 8300. In the substrate holding unit 8000, the back surface 8100a, which is one surface of the bracket 8100, is detachably attached to the side plate 2 (see FIG. 239) of the cabinet G, and the back surface 8100b, which is the other surface of the bracket 8100, is attached to the lower side. A sub relay board accommodating unit 8200 is provided, and a sub control board accommodating unit 8300 is provided on the sub relay board accommodating unit 8200.

(Outline of board holding unit 8000)
As shown in FIGS. 244 to 246, the sub-relay board accommodating portion 8200 accommodates the sub-relay substrate SS1 and the sub-ROM substrate SS3, and the sub-control substrate accommodating portion 8300 accommodates the sub-control substrate SS2.

As shown in FIGS. 245 and 246, the sub-relay board accommodating portion 8200 is an example of a first accommodating space surrounded by the bracket 8100 and the sub-relay board cover 8210 by attaching the sub-relay board cover 8210 to the bracket 8100. The sub-relay board accommodating space 8205 is formed, and the sub-relay substrate SS1 and the sub-ROM substrate SS3 are arranged in the sub-relay substrate accommodating space 8205. The sub control board accommodating unit 8300 is an example of a second accommodating space surrounded by the sub control board base 8310 and the sub control board cover 8320 by attaching the sub control board cover 8320 to the sub control board base 8310. The board accommodating space 8305 is formed, and the sub control board SS2 is arranged in the sub control board accommodating space 8305.

The sub control board SS2 is provided with a sub CPU, a sub RAM, and the like, and is stored in the sub ROM board SS3, which is a sub ROM, in response to a command transmitted from the main control board MS (see FIG. 239). The output of video, sound, and light is controlled by the program, sound data, LED light emission pattern data, and image data. The sub-relay board SS1 connects the sub-control board SS2 and the main control board MS and other boards, speaker units, LED boards, and other effect devices in a communicable manner. The sub ROM board SS3 is connected to the sub relay board SS1 via a connector, and is composed of a program storage area and a data storage area. A control program executed by the sub CPU is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board MS, and an effect registration task for extracting an effect random value and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). , The effect control task of controlling the output from the effect device based on the determined effect content, and the like are included. The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and the like. In this way, the sub ROM board SS3 stores all of the effect data in the data storage area of one sub ROM, and refers to each effect data by the control program. Therefore, data for video, data for audio, etc. It is possible to reduce the installation space of the sub ROM as compared with the case where the data is stored in each sub ROM.

As shown in FIGS. 245 and 246, the sub-control board accommodating portion 8300 is an example of a sub-control board base 8310 which is an example of a base member and a sub-control board cover which is an example of a second cover that covers at least a part of the second board. The two members together with the 8320 form a sub-control board accommodating space 8305 which is an example of a second accommodating space accommodating the sub-control substrate SS2 which is an example of the second substrate. As shown in FIG. 244, the sub-control board base 8310 is provided with a heat dissipation fan 8311 for discharging the hot air in the sub-control board accommodation space 8305 (see FIG. 245) to the outside of the sub-control board accommodation space 8305. ing. Further, the sub control board cover 8320 is provided at a position corresponding to an intake hole 8320a formed of a plurality of through holes for sucking air into the sub control board accommodation space 8305 and a heat radiation fan 8311 of the sub control board base 8310. An exhaust hole 8320b composed of a plurality of through holes is formed.

Further, the sub-control board base 8310 is provided with a base-side screw hole portion 8312 having a screw hole into which a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw or a screw can be screwed on the outer edge portion. The sub-control board cover 8320 has a cover-side screw having a screw hole into which a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw can be screwed at a position corresponding to the base-side screw hole portion 8312 of the sub-control board base 8310 on the outer edge portion. A hole 8322 is provided. With such a configuration, when the sub control board cover 8320 is put on the sub control board base 8310, the base side screw hole portion 8312 and the cover side screw hole portion 8322 are overlapped with each other. In this state, a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw is inserted into the screw holes of the cover side screw hole 8322 and the base side screw hole 8312 from the cover side screw hole 8322 side, and penetrates these screw holes. As described above, by tightening with a screwdriver or the like, the sub-control board base 8310 and the sub-control board cover 8320 can be fastened. Then, the sub-control board accommodating portion 8300 integrated by screwing can be attached to the bracket 8100. As the fixing member (not shown) for fastening the sub-control board base 8310 and the sub-control board cover 8320, any fixing member (for example, a pin, a push fastener, etc.) other than a screw may be used. Further, in the sub control board base 8310 and the sub control board cover 8320, the direction (shown in FIG. 244) is different from the direction close to the sub relay board cover 8210 mounted on the bracket 8100 (downward in the example shown in FIG. 244). In the example, by providing the screw hole portion (base side screw hole portion 8312 and cover side screw hole portion 8322) protruding upward (upward), the substrate case (sub-relay board accommodating portion 8200 and sub-control) mounted on the bracket 8100 is provided. As shown in the example shown in FIG. 242, the substrate accommodating portions 8300) can be brought close to each other sufficiently, and a wire or the like can be connected to the connection portion between the sub relay board side connector SSC1 and the sub control board side connector SSC2, which will be described later. It is possible to make the structure difficult to insert tools that perform fraudulent acts.

On the other hand, the sub-relay board accommodating unit 8200 does not have a dedicated base like the sub-control board accommodating unit 8300, and has a sub-relay board cover 8210 which is an example of a first cover covering at least a part of the first substrate and a substrate holding unit. The bracket 8100, which is an example of a holding member for attaching the unit 8000 to the side wall G2 (see FIG. 239) of the cabinet G, is the first accommodation for accommodating the sub relay board SS1 and the sub ROM board SS3, which are examples of the first substrate. A sub-relay board accommodating space 8205, which is an example of the space, is formed. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the case for accommodating the substrate. In addition to the cover, the case that houses the board includes a board case that requires a base (such as a case that houses a board that requires security or a case in which conventional parts are diverted to reduce costs). , It is possible to mix and integrate the board cases with only the cover and attach them to the cabinet.

The sub-relay board side connector SSC1 is connected to the sub-relay board SS1. The sub-relay board side connector SSC1 is connected to the sub-relay board SS1 in the sub-relay board accommodation space 8205, penetrates the sub-relay board cover 8210, and projects toward the sub-control board accommodation unit 8300 side.

The sub control board side connector SSC2 is connected to the sub control board SS2. The sub-control board side connector SSC2 is connected to the sub-control board SS2 in the sub-control board accommodating space 8305, penetrates the sub-control board cover 8320, projects to the sub-relay board accommodating portion 8200 side, and sub-relay board side connector SSC1. Is connected with. As a result, the sub-relay board SS1 and the sub-control board SS2 housed in different sealed spaces (sub-relay board accommodation space 8205 and sub-control board accommodation space 8305) are connected.

(Bracket 8100)
As shown in FIG. 247, the bracket 8100 includes a bracket base 8110 formed in a plate shape, a substrate guide portion 8120 formed on the bracket base 8110, a harness guide holding portion 8130 which is an example of an opening, and a cover engaging portion. 8150 (see FIG. 249 described later), hook 8160 (see FIG. 251 described later) as an example of temporary fixing means, fixing hole 8170 (see FIG. 251 described later) as an example of fixing hole, and harness guide. A harness guide 8140 attached to the holding portion 8130 is provided.

The bracket base 8110 has a first substrate holding portion 8111 on which the sub relay board accommodating portion 8200 is arranged is formed on the lower side of the surface 8100b, and the sub control substrate accommodating portion 8300 is arranged on the first substrate holding portion 8111. The second substrate holding portion 8112 to be formed is formed. The sub-relay board SS1 and the sub-ROM board SS3 are directly fixed to the first board holding portion 8111. A sub-control board accommodating portion 8300 accommodating the sub-control substrate SS2 is fixed to the second substrate holding portion 8112.

As shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the substrate guide portion 8120 is a tubular protrusion that protrudes from the surface 8100b in a direction orthogonal to the surface 8100b, and is a first substrate guide portion 8121, a second substrate guide portion 8122, and a second substrate guide portion 8122. 3 The sub-ROM board SS3 is fixed to at least a part of the sub-relay board SS1 including the board guide portion 8123 and penetrating the sub-relay board SS1. Specifically, the sub ROM board SS3 is fixed to the board guide 8120 by inserting and screwing the screw penetrating the sub ROM board SS3 from the tip side of the board guide 8120.

(Mounting structure of sub-relay board SS1 and sub-ROM board SS3)
The sub-relay board SS1 has a through hole SS11, a through hole SS12, and a through hole SS12 penetrating through the sub-relay board SS1 at positions corresponding to the first board guide section 8121, the second board guide section 8122, and the third board guide section 8123, respectively. The hole SS13 is formed. By arranging the sub-relay board SS1 at a predetermined position in the first board holding portion 8111 of the bracket base 8110, the first board guide section 8121, the second board guide section 8122, and the third board guide section 8123 are formed through holes SS11, respectively. , Penetrates through the through hole SS12 and the through hole SS13, and the tip end side protrudes from the surface side of the sub relay board SS1.

A sub ROM board base SSB is provided on the surface side of the sub relay board SS1. The sub ROM board base SSB includes a board base main body SSB1 in which the sub ROM board SS3 is arranged on the front surface side, a plurality of (for example, four) leg SSB2s protruding from the back surface side of the board base main body SSB1, and a board base main body SSB1. At least a part of the first substrate guide portion 8121, the second substrate guide portion 8122, and the third substrate guide portion 8123 (in the example shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the first substrate guide portion 8121 and the third substrate guide portion) are formed. It includes two engaging holes SSB3 through which 8123) penetrates. In the present embodiment, the two engaging holes SSB3 of the sub ROM board base SSB engage with the first board guide portion 8121 and the third board guide portion 8123. For example, the sub ROM board base SSB is the present embodiment. If it is smaller than the example shown in the embodiment, the two engaging holes SSB3 are engaged with two of the first substrate guide portion 8121 and the second substrate guide portion 8122 and two of the second substrate guide portion 8122 and the third substrate guide portion 8123. You may combine them. In this way, by providing the bracket 8100 with three or more board guides for engaging the sub ROM board base SSB, it is possible to attach sub ROM board base SSBs of various sizes, and the versatility is improved.

In the sub ROM board SS3, a through hole SS31 and a through hole SS32 are formed at positions corresponding to the two engagement holes SSB3 of the sub ROM board base SSB. In the sub ROM board base SSB and the sub ROM board SS3, the board guide portion 8120 of the bracket 8100 is inserted into the engagement hole SSB3 of the sub ROM board base SSB and the through hole SS31 and the through hole SS32 of the sub ROM board SS3. In this state, the sub ROM board base SSB and the sub ROM board SS3 are fixed to the surface side of the sub relay board SS1 in the bracket 8100 by inserting a screw into the board guide portion 8120 from the front side and screwing it. To.

In the present embodiment, the sub ROM board SS3 is a relatively large board because the bridge IC is provided separately from the sub ROM chip. However, by providing the bridge IC on the sub ROM chip, the sub ROM board SS3 is sub. It is also possible to reduce the size of the ROM board. When the size of the sub ROM board is reduced, the sub ROM board base SSB described in this embodiment may be used. By providing the sub-ROM board base in this way, it is possible to mount sub-ROM boards of various sizes. Therefore, a sub-control board and a sub-relay board common to models having different specifications can be used. Since it is possible to make only the sub ROM board unique to each model, the versatility of the parts is improved. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub ROM board SS3 is directly attached to the sub ROM board base SSB, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub ROM board is mounted via a socket that can be mounted on the sub ROM board base SSB. , May be attached to the sub ROM board base SSB. As a result, it is not necessary to shape the sub ROM board so that it can be mounted on the sub ROM board base, and the degree of freedom in design is improved.

With such a configuration, when the sub-relay board SS1 and the sub ROM board SS3 are attached to the first board holding portion 8111 of the bracket base 8110, the first board guide section 8121, the second board guide section 8122, and the third board guide section 8121 of the bracket base 8110 are attached. The board guide portion 8123 is inserted into the through hole SS11, the through hole SS12, and the through hole SS13 of the sub relay board SS1, respectively, and the sub relay board SS1 is fixed to the bracket base 8110 with screws in the positioned state. Next, among the first board guide section 8121, the second board guide section 8122, and the third board guide section 8123 protruding from the surface side of the sub-relay board SS1, the first board guide section 8121 and the third board guide section 8123 are , Insert into the engagement hole SSB3 of the sub ROM board base SSB and position it. Next, the sub ROM board SS3 is arranged on the surface side of the sub ROM board base SSB, and the first board guide portion 8121 and the third board guide portion 8123 protruding toward the surface side from the engagement hole SSB3 of the sub ROM board base SSB are provided. , Inserted into the through hole SS31 and the through hole SS32 of the sub ROM board SS3 and positioned. Then, the tip of the leg SSB2 of the sub ROM board base SSB is brought into contact with the surface side of the sub relay board SS1, and the screws are brought from the surface side of the sub ROM board SS3 to the first board guide portion 8121 and the third board guide portion 8123. The sub ROM board base SSB and the sub ROM board SS3 can be fixed to the surface side of the sub relay board SS1 by inserting and screwing into. Then, as shown in FIG. 248, the sub-control ended inside the sub-relay board side connector SSC1 of the sub-relay board SS1 and the sub-control board accommodating portion 8300 attached to the second board holding portion 8112 of the bracket base 8110. The sub control board side connector SSC2 of the board SS2 is engaged with each other, and the sub relay board SS1 and the sub control board SS2 are communicably connected.

(Harness guide)
As shown in FIG. 249, the harness guide holding portion 8130 is a hole formed in the bracket base 8110, and is formed in the vicinity of the connecting portion SS10 of the sub-relay board SS1 to which the harness guide 8140 is attached and attached to the bracket 8100. Has been done. One end of a harness (not shown) is connected to the connection portion SS10. The other end of this harness is connected to the sub control board SS2 and a board that controls various effect devices. The harness guide holding portion 8130 is formed in a shape through which the insertion portion 8142 of the harness guide 8140, which will be described later, can be inserted. In the present embodiment, the harness guide holding portion 8130 is formed by a substantially cross-shaped hole. As a result, it is possible to prevent the harness guide 8140 from rotating after the harness guide 8140 is attached to the harness guide holding portion 8130, and the direction of the harness guide 8140 (for example, the direction facing the connecting portion SS10 of the sub-relay board SS1 or It becomes easy to determine the direction orthogonal to the facing direction, etc.). As shown in FIG. 243, the harness guide holding portion 8130 is also formed in the vicinity of the harness insertion hole 8321 of the sub control board accommodating portion 8300, although the harness guide 8140 is not attached. By providing the harness guide holding portion 8130 in the vicinity of the connection portion between the harness and the board in this way, the harness guide 8140 can be attached as needed to bundle the harness or to provide the end portion of the harness (the connection portion with the board). , It is possible to prevent damage due to an external force applied to the harness.

As shown in FIG. 250, the harness guide 8140 includes a holding portion 8141, an inserting portion 8142, and an operating portion 8143. The holding portion 8141 includes an outer ring 8141a formed in an openable and closable ring shape, and a pair of plate members 8141b arranged inside the outer ring 8141a and sandwiching the harness with the outer ring 8141a closed.

The insertion portion 8142 includes at least a pair of protrusions 8142a protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the outer ring 8141a of the holding portion 8141 in the radial direction of the outer ring 8141a and arranged in a substantially cross shape when viewed from the axial direction of the insertion portion 8142. It is inserted into the harness guide holding portion 8130. The pair of protrusions 8142a are formed so as to gradually become thinner toward the tip end side, and the return 8142b is formed on the proximal end side, and the pair of protrusions 8142a are formed so as to be elastically deformable in a direction in which the distance between them becomes narrower.

The operation unit 8143 is connected to the pair of protrusions 8142a, is gripped by the operator, and is pressed in a direction in which the distance between the operation units 8143 is narrowed, so that the distance between the pair of protrusions 8142a is narrowed.

With such a configuration, when the operator pushes the insertion portion 8142 of the harness guide 8140 into the harness guide holding portion 8130, the pair of protrusions 8142a are elastically deformed, the distance between them becomes narrow, and the harness guide holding portion 8130 When it is inserted into the inside of the harness guide holding portion 8130 and passes through the harness guide holding portion 8130, it returns to the shape before elastic deformation, the return 8142b engages with the peripheral edge of the harness guide holding portion 8130, and the harness guide 8140 cannot be removed from the harness guide holding portion 8130. Further, when removing the harness guide 8140, the operator presses the operation portions 8143 connected to the pair of protrusions 8142a in the direction in which the distance between them becomes narrower, so that the return 8142b and the peripheral edge of the harness guide holding portion 8130 are formed. The engagement of the insertion portion 8142 is released, and the insertion portion 8142 can be pulled out from the harness guide holding portion 8130.

(Cover engagement part)
As shown in FIG. 249, the cover engaging portion 8150 is formed in a predetermined shape (substantially rectangular shape in the example shown in FIG. 249) when viewed from the surface side, protrudes from the surface of the bracket base 8110, and has a flat bracket at the tip. A side seal surface 8151 is formed. As will be described in detail later, the cover engaging portion 8150 engages with the engaging portion 8220 of the sub-relay board cover 8210.

(Bracket mounting structure)
As shown in FIG. 251, a plurality of hooks 8160 are formed on the back surface 8100a of the bracket 8100. A total of four hooks 8160 are formed, two at the same height in the horizontal direction and two at different heights in the vertical direction. The number of hooks 8160 is not limited to four, and any number can be formed, but it is preferable to form two hooks at the same height in at least the horizontal direction. The hook 8160 includes a shaft portion 8161 protruding from the back surface 8100a of the bracket 8100, and a front plate portion 8162 extending downward from the tip of the shaft portion 8161.

One fixing hole 8170 is formed at the lower end of the bracket 8100. An arbitrary number of fixing holes 8170 can be provided at an arbitrary position.

As shown in FIG. 252, a plurality of openings G2a into which a plurality of hooks 8160 can be inserted and engaged with each other are formed on the inner surface of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G, which is an example of the mounted portion. In a state where the hook 8160 and the plurality of openings G2a are engaged with each other, a screw hole G2b is formed at a position corresponding to the fixing hole 8170.

As shown in FIG. 253, the opening G2a has an internal opening G2a1 formed on the inner surface side and an outer opening G2a2 formed on the outer surface side. The internal opening G2a1 is formed in a size that allows the front plate portion 8162 of the hook 8160 of the bracket 8100 to be inserted. The upper end of the outer opening G2a2 is at the same position as the inner opening G2a1, and the lower end is arranged below the lower end of the inner opening G2a1. Therefore, the opening G2a has an inner wall G2a3 formed under the inner opening G2a1 on the inner surface side of the outer opening G2a2 when viewed from the outer surface side.

With such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 254, when the substrate holding unit 8000 is attached to the side wall G2, first, the plurality of hooks 8160 of the bracket 8100 are attached to the internal openings of the openings G2a provided in the plurality of side walls G2. By inserting each from G2a1 and then moving the bracket 8100 downward, the front plate portion 8162 of each hook 8160 is caught by the inner wall G2a3 of the opening G2a, and the substrate holding unit 8000 is temporarily fixed to the side wall G2. It will be in a state of being. Then, in a state where the substrate holding unit 8000 is temporarily fixed to the side wall G2, a screw is inserted from the fixing hole 8170 of the bracket 8100 and screwed into the screw hole G2b (see FIG. 252) of the side wall G2 to cause the side wall. The substrate holding unit 8000 is fixed to G2. In this way, by engaging the bracket 8100 with the side wall G2 of the cabinet G, which is an example of the game machine housing, with the plurality of hooks 8160, a fixing member (for example, a screw) between the side wall G2 and the bracket 8100 is formed. Even if there is only one fixing point, it is possible to fix it with sufficient stability.

(Sub-relay board cover)
As described above, the sub-relay board cover 8210 is attached to the bracket 8100 to form a sub-relay board accommodation space 8205 in which the sub-relay board SS1 and the sub ROM board SS3 are accommodated. As shown in FIG. 249, the sub-relay board cover 8210 includes an engaging portion 8220 at a position corresponding to the cover engaging portion 8150 of the bracket 8100. The engaging portion 8220 is a hole formed in the cover-side sealing surface 8221 formed in a planar shape and the cover-side sealing surface 8221, and has a predetermined shape seen from the surface side of the cover engaging portion 8150 of the bracket 8100 (FIG. An opening 8222 formed in substantially the same shape as the substantially rectangular shape in the example shown in 249) is provided. By attaching the sub relay board cover 8210 to the bracket 8100, the cover engaging portion 8150 of the bracket 8100 is inserted into the opening 8222 of the sub relay board cover 8210, and the cover engaging portion 8150 has a bracket side sealing surface 8151 and The cover-side sealing surface 8221 of the engaging portion 8220 is arranged on substantially the same plane. Then, the seal seal 8005 is attached across the bracket side seal surface 8151 and the cover side seal surface 8221. It is preferable that the sealing sticker 8005 leaves a trace on the surface to be attached when the attached one is peeled off. With this configuration, positioning when the sub-relay board cover 8210 is attached to the bracket 8100 is facilitated, the efficiency of the assembly work is improved, and whether or not the sub-relay board cover 8210 attached to the bracket 8100 is removed. It becomes easy to distinguish.

Further, as shown in FIG. 255, the sub-relay board cover 8210 has a sub-relay board at a position corresponding to the sub-relay board side connector SSC1 (see FIG. 245) provided on the sub-relay board SS1 (see FIG. 245). An opening 8230 for a side connector is provided. As shown in FIG. 245, the sub-relay board-side connector SSC1 projects from the sub-relay board-side connector opening 8230 to the outside of the sub-relay board accommodation space 8205, and the sub-control board-side connector provided on the sub-control board SS2. Connected to SSC2. Further, as shown in FIG. 255, the sub-relay board cover 8210 is formed with a shielding wall 8231 surrounding the sub-relay board side connector SSC1 (see FIG. 245) inside the sub-relay board accommodation space 8205 (see FIG. 245). ing. With such a configuration, a part of the sub-relay board side connector SSC1 provided in the sub-relay board SS1 sealed in the sub-relay board accommodation space 8205 is partially connected to the sub-relay board from the opening 8230 for the sub-relay board side connector. The sub-relay board SS1 is connected to an external board (for example, the sub-control board SS2) by projecting to the outside of the accommodation space 8205 and shielding the inner portion of the sub-relay board accommodation space 8205 of the sub-relay board side connector SSC1. In addition, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed on the sub-relay board SS1 from the opening 8230 for the sub-relay board side connector.

(Sub control board cover)
As shown in FIG. 256, the sub control board cover 8320 has a sub control board side connector at a position corresponding to the sub control board side connector SSC2 (see FIG. 245) provided on the sub control board SS2 (see FIG. 245). An opening 8330 is provided. As shown in FIG. 245, the sub-control board-side connector SSC2 projects from the sub-control board-side connector opening 8330 to the outside of the sub-control board accommodating space 8305, and the sub-relay board-side connector provided on the sub-relay board SS1. Connected to SSC1. Further, as shown in FIG. 256, the sub-control board cover 8320 is formed with a shielding wall 8331 that surrounds the sub-control board side connector SSC2 inside the sub-control board accommodating space 8305 (see FIG. 245). With such a configuration, the same function and effect as the above-mentioned sub-relay board cover 8210 can be obtained.

According to the tenth embodiment, the following effects are exhibited.
Since the board holding unit 8000 can hold a plurality of types of boards (sub-relay board SS1, sub-control board SS2), the board case mounting work is compared with the case where one board is housed and held in one board case. It is possible to improve the efficiency of.
Further, the sub-relay board accommodation space 8205 in which the sub-relay board SS1 is accommodated is formed by the sub-relay board cover 8210 and the bracket 8100 in which the sub-relay board cover 8210 and the sub-control board cover 8320 are held. That is, a part of the wall surface that partitions the sub-relay board accommodating space 8205 is composed of the sub-relay board cover 8210 and the bracket 8100 for holding the sub-control board cover 8320. As a result, the bracket 8100 functions as a wall member that constitutes a part of the wall surface that partitions the bracket 8100 for holding the sub-relay board cover 8210 and the sub-control board cover 8320 and the sub-relay board accommodating space 8205. Therefore, as compared with the case where the bracket 8100 and the wall member are separately provided, the number of parts is reduced, the efficiency of the board case mounting work can be improved, and the space of the board case is saved. It becomes possible to plan.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case and save the space of the board case.

Further, the sub control board accommodation space 8305 is formed by the sub control board cover 8320 and the sub control board base 8310, while the sub relay board accommodation space 8205 in which the sub relay board SS1 is accommodated is combined with the sub relay board cover 8210. , The sub-relay board cover 8210 and the sub-control board cover 8320 are held by the bracket 8100. That is, the wall surface for partitioning the sub control board accommodation space 8305 is composed of the sub control board cover 8320 and the sub control board base 8310, and a part of the wall surface for partitioning the sub relay board accommodation space 8205 is formed with the sub relay board cover 8210. And the bracket 8100 for holding the sub-control board cover 8320. As a result, the bracket 8100 functions as a wall member that constitutes a part of the wall surface that partitions the bracket 8100 for holding the sub-relay board cover 8210 and the sub-control board cover 8320 and the sub-relay board accommodating space 8205. Therefore, as compared with the case where the bracket 8100 and the wall member are separately provided, the number of parts is reduced, the efficiency of the board case mounting work can be improved, and the space of the board case is saved. It becomes possible to plan.

Further, among the sub relay board SS1 and the sub control board SS2 held in one board holding unit 8000, the sub relay board SS1 is housed in the sub relay board accommodating space 8205 formed by the sub relay board cover 8210 and the bracket 8100. Then, the sub-control board SS2 can be housed in the sub-control board accommodating space 8305 formed by the sub-control board base 8310 fixed to the sub-control board cover 8320 and the sub-control board cover 8320.

As a result, the sub-relay board SS1 can be accessed by simply removing the sub-relay board cover 8210 from the bracket 8100, so that maintenance can be facilitated, and the sub-control board SS2 is a sub-control board. The cover 8320 and the sub-control board base 8310 can be removed from the bracket 8100, and even if they are removed, they cannot be easily accessed. Therefore, in one board holding unit 8000, one can hold a board that requires ease of maintenance, and the other can hold a board that requires improved security.

Further, by inserting the hook 8160 of the substrate holding unit 8000 into the opening G2a provided in the cabinet G, the substrate holding unit 8000 is temporarily fixed to the cabinet G. As a result, in the board case mounting work, the board holding unit 8000 can be mounted at an appropriate position simply by aligning and inserting the hook 8160 of the board holding unit 8000 into the opening G2a of the cabinet G. Accurate alignment is facilitated, and the possibility of mounting the substrate holding unit 8000 at an inappropriate position can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case.

Further, in a state where the board holding unit 8000 is temporarily fixed to the cabinet G, the board holding unit 8000 is fixed to the cabinet G by inserting a screw from the fixing hole 8170. As a result, when fixing the board holding unit 8000 to the cabinet G, since the board holding unit 8000 is temporarily fixed at an appropriate position, it is not necessary to hold the board holding unit 8000 so as not to deviate from the appropriate position. The work of fixing the holding unit 8000 becomes easy. Further, since the substrate holding unit 8000 is temporarily fixed at an appropriate position, the screw is not inserted at an inappropriate position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case.

Further, the bracket 8100 has a harness guide 8140 that guides a harness connected to at least one connection portion SS10 of the sub relay board SS1 or the sub control board SS2. As a result, when the bracket 8100 is removed from the gaming machine in a state where the sub-relay board SS1 and the sub-control board SS2 are housed in the sub-relay board storage space 8205 and the sub-control board storage space 8305 for reuse and maintenance, etc. The bracket 8100 and the harness can be removed together in a state where the harness connected to the board of the above is guided by the harness guide 8140. Therefore, the work efficiency at the time of disassembling the game machine is improved. Further, since the external force applied to the harness can be borne by the harness guide 8140, it is possible to prevent such an external force from being applied to the connection portion SS10 of the substrate and damaging the connection portion SS10. ..

Further, since the harness guide 8140 is locked to the bracket 8100 by inserting the insertion portion 8142 of the harness guide 8140 into the harness guide holding portion 8130 of the bracket 8100, the harness guide 8140 can be attached as needed. It becomes. As a result, when it is necessary to guide the harness, the harness guide 8140 is attached to guide the harness, which facilitates the handling of the harness and improves work efficiency. When it is not necessary to guide the harness, the harness is used. By not attaching the guide 8140, it is possible to save space in the board case.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix G>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal, etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that the start lever is operated by the player, and the plurality of reels are used. Detects that the start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels have been pressed by the player, and outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. The operation of the stepping motor is based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the driving force of each reel to each reel, and the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, it draws a lot based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”) A so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected is known.

As such a conventional game machine, a game machine having a structure in which a board case accommodating a board related to control of the game machine is attached to the upper back surface of a front door that is openably and closably attached to a cabinet is known (for example). , JP2013-85842A).
According to such a game machine, since the board case containing the board is attached to the upper part of the back surface of the front door, it is possible to save space inside the cabinet.

By the way, if each substrate case is arranged one by one as in the game machine of Patent Document 1, there is a problem that it takes time to attach the substrate case at the time of manufacturing. Further, in order to secure space inside the game machine due to an increase in the number of production devices and an increase in size, further space saving of the board case has been required.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the substrate case and to save the space of the substrate case.

(G-1)
(1) A substrate holding unit (for example, a substrate) capable of holding a first substrate (for example, a sub relay board SS1 or the like) and a second substrate (for example, a sub control substrate SS2 or the like) and the first substrate and the second substrate. A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 1 etc.) equipped with a holding unit (8000 etc.).
The substrate holding unit is
A first accommodation space in which the first substrate is accommodated (for example, a sub-relay substrate accommodation space 8205, etc.) and
A second accommodation space in which the second substrate is accommodated (for example, a sub-control board accommodation space 8305, etc.) and
A first cover (for example, a sub-relay board cover 8210) that covers at least a part of the first board, and
A second cover (for example, sub-control board cover 8320, etc.) that covers at least a part of the second board, and
A holding member (for example, bracket 8100, etc.) for holding the first cover and the second cover, and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the first accommodation space is formed by the first cover and the holding member.

According to the invention of (1), the gaming machine includes a first substrate and a second substrate, and a substrate holding unit capable of holding the first substrate and the second substrate. The substrate holding unit includes a first accommodating space, a second accommodating space, a first cover, a second cover, and a holding member. The first substrate is accommodated in the first accommodation space. The second substrate is accommodated in the second accommodation space. The first cover covers at least a part of the first substrate. The second cover covers at least a part of the second substrate. As the holding member, the first cover and the second cover are held.
The first accommodation space is formed by the first cover and the holding member.

According to such a configuration, since the substrate holding unit can hold a plurality of types (first substrate, second substrate) of substrates, compared with the case where one substrate is housed and held in one substrate case. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case.
Further, the first accommodation space in which the first substrate is accommodated is formed of a first cover and a holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover. That is, a part of the wall surface that divides the first accommodation space is composed of a holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover. As a result, the holding member functions as a holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover, and a wall member forming a part of the wall surface for partitioning the first accommodation space. Therefore, as compared with the case where the holding member and the wall member are separately provided, the number of parts is reduced, the efficiency of the board case mounting work can be improved, and the space of the board case is saved. It becomes possible to plan.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case and save the space of the board case.

(2) A substrate holding unit (for example, a substrate) capable of holding a first substrate (for example, a sub-relay substrate SS1 or the like) and a second substrate (for example, a sub-control substrate SS2 or the like) and the first substrate and the second substrate. A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 1 etc.) equipped with a holding unit (8000 etc.).
The substrate holding unit is
A first accommodation space in which the first substrate is accommodated (for example, a sub-relay substrate accommodation space 8205, etc.) and
A second accommodation space in which the second substrate is accommodated (for example, a sub-control board accommodation space 8305, etc.) and
A first cover (for example, a sub-relay board cover 8210) that covers at least a part of the first board, and
A second cover (for example, sub-control board cover 8320, etc.) that covers at least a part of the second board, and
A base member fixed to the second cover (for example, a sub control board base 8310, etc.) and
A holding member (for example, bracket 8100) for holding the first cover and the base member, and
With
The second accommodating space is formed by the second cover and the base member.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first accommodation space is formed by the first cover and the holding member.

According to the invention of (2), the gaming machine includes a first substrate and a second substrate, and a substrate holding unit capable of holding the first substrate and the second substrate. The substrate holding unit includes a first accommodating space, a second accommodating space, a first cover, a second cover, a base member, and a holding member. The first substrate is accommodated in the first accommodation space. The second substrate is accommodated in the second accommodation space. The first cover covers at least a part of the first substrate. The second cover covers at least a part of the second substrate. The base member is fixed to the second cover. As the holding member, the first cover and the second cover are held.
The second accommodating space is formed by the second cover and the base member, and the first accommodating space is formed by the first cover and the holding member.

According to such a configuration, since the substrate holding unit can hold a plurality of types (first substrate, second substrate) of substrates, compared with the case where one substrate is housed and held in one substrate case. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case.
Further, while the second accommodating space is formed by the second cover and the base member, the first accommodating space in which the first substrate is accommodated is held by the first cover, the first cover, and the second cover. It was formed of a holding member. That is, the wall surface for partitioning the second accommodation space is composed of the second cover and the base member, and a part of the wall surface for partitioning the first accommodation space is a holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover. It consisted of. As a result, the holding member functions as a holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover, and a wall member forming a part of the wall surface for partitioning the first accommodation space. Therefore, as compared with the case where the holding member and the wall member are separately provided, the number of parts is reduced, the efficiency of the board case mounting work can be improved, and the space of the board case is saved. It becomes possible to plan.

Further, according to the invention of (2), of the first substrate and the second substrate held by one substrate holding unit, the first substrate is placed in the first accommodating space formed by the first cover and the holding member. It can be accommodated and the second substrate can be accommodated in the second accommodating space formed by the second cover and the base member fixed to the second cover.

As a result, the first board can be accessed by simply removing the first cover from the holding member, so that maintenance can be easily performed. It is possible to remove it from the holding member while it is covered with, and it is possible to make it inaccessible even if it is removed. Therefore, in one board holding unit, one can hold a board that requires ease of maintenance, and the other can hold a board that requires improved security.

(G-2)
(1) A substrate holding unit (for example, a substrate) capable of holding a first substrate (for example, a sub relay board SS1 or the like) and a second substrate (for example, a sub control substrate SS2 or the like) and the first substrate and the second substrate. A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 1 etc.) equipped with a holding unit (8000 etc.).
The substrate holding unit is
A first accommodation space in which the first substrate is accommodated (for example, a sub-relay substrate accommodation space 8205 or the like) and a second accommodation space in which the second substrate is accommodated (for example, a sub-control board accommodation space 8305 or the like).
A first cover (for example, a sub-relay board cover 8210) that covers at least a part of the first board, and
A second cover (for example, sub-control board cover 8320, etc.) that covers at least a part of the second board, and
A holding member (for example, bracket 8100, etc.) for holding the first cover and the second cover, and
With
The board holding unit is attached to the game machine by fixing it to a mounted portion (for example, cabinet G or the like) of the game machine.
The holding member includes a temporary fixing means (for example, a hook 8160) that can be temporarily fixed to the attached portion.
By inserting the temporary fixing means into an opening (for example, opening G2a or the like) provided in the attached portion, the substrate holding unit is temporarily fixed in the attached portion.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first accommodation space is formed by the first cover and the holding member.

According to the invention of (1), the gaming machine includes a first substrate and a second substrate, and a substrate holding unit capable of holding the first substrate and the second substrate. The substrate holding unit includes a first accommodating space, a second accommodating space, a first cover, a second cover, and a holding member. The first substrate is accommodated in the first accommodation space. The second substrate is accommodated in the second accommodation space. The first cover covers at least a part of the first substrate. The second cover covers at least a part of the second substrate. As the holding member, the first cover and the second cover are held.
Then, the substrate holding unit is attached to the game machine by fixing it to the mounted portion of the game machine. The holding member includes a temporary fixing means that can be temporarily fixed to the attached portion. By inserting the temporary fixing means into the opening provided in the mounted portion, the substrate holding unit is temporarily fixed in the mounted portion.
Further, the first accommodation space is formed by the first cover and the holding member.

According to such a configuration, since the substrate holding unit can hold a plurality of types (first substrate, second substrate) of substrates, compared with the case where one substrate is housed and held in one substrate case. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case.
Further, the first accommodation space in which the first substrate is accommodated is formed of a first cover and a holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover. That is, a part of the wall surface that divides the first accommodation space is composed of a holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover. As a result, the holding member functions as a holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover, and a wall member forming a part of the wall surface for partitioning the first accommodation space. Therefore, as compared with the case where the holding member and the wall member are separately provided, the number of parts is reduced, the efficiency of the board case mounting work can be improved, and the space of the board case is saved. It becomes possible to plan.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case and save the space of the board case.

Further, by inserting the temporary fixing means of the board holding unit into the opening provided in the mounted portion, the board holding unit is temporarily fixed to the mounted portion. As a result, in the mounting work of the board case, the board holding unit can be mounted at an appropriate position simply by aligning and inserting the temporary fixing means of the board holding unit into the opening of the mounted portion. It is possible to facilitate proper alignment and reduce the possibility of mounting the board holding unit at an inappropriate position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case.

(2) The holding member includes a fixing hole (for example, a fixing hole 8170) into which a fixing member (for example, a screw) can be inserted.
In a state where the substrate holding unit is temporarily fixed to the attached portion, the substrate holding unit is fixed to the attached portion by inserting a fixing member through the fixing hole portion. The gaming machine described in 1).

Here, when the board holding unit is fixed to the mounted portion when temporary fixing is not possible, the board holding unit is aligned with the appropriate position of the mounted portion, and the fixing member is used while pressing the board holding unit so as not to deviate from the appropriate position. , It is necessary to fix the board holding unit to the mounted part. At this time, if the position of the substrate holding unit is displaced, the fixing member may not be inserted or the fixing member may be inserted at an inappropriate position.
According to the invention of (2), in a state where the substrate holding unit is temporarily fixed to the attached portion, the substrate holding unit is fixed to the attached portion by inserting the fixing member through the fixing hole portion. As a result, when the board holding unit is fixed to the mounted portion, the board holding unit is temporarily fixed at an appropriate position, so that it is not necessary to hold the board holding unit so that it does not deviate from the proper position. The work of fixing the holding unit becomes easy. Further, since the substrate holding unit is temporarily fixed at an appropriate position, the fixing member is not inserted at an inappropriate position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case.

(G-3)
(1) A substrate holding unit (for example, a substrate) capable of holding a first substrate (for example, a sub relay board SS1 or the like) and a second substrate (for example, a sub control substrate SS2 or the like) and the first substrate and the second substrate. Holding unit 8000 etc.) and
A gaming machine (eg, gaming machine 1 or the like) including a harness connected to at least one of the connecting portions (for example, connecting portion SS10 and the like) of the first substrate and the second substrate.
The substrate holding unit is
A first accommodation space in which the first substrate is accommodated, a second accommodation space in which the second substrate is accommodated, and
A first cover (for example, a sub-relay board cover 8210) that covers at least a part of the first board, and
A second cover (for example, sub-control board cover 8320, etc.) that covers at least a part of the second board, and
A holding member (for example, bracket 8100, etc.) for holding the first cover and the second cover, and
With
The holding member has a harness guide (for example, harness guide 8140) that guides the harness.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first accommodation space is formed by the first cover and the holding member.

According to the invention of (1), the gaming machine includes a first substrate and a second substrate, a harness connected to at least one connection portion of the first substrate or the second substrate, and the first substrate and the second substrate. A substrate holding unit capable of holding a substrate is provided. The substrate holding unit includes a first accommodating space, a second accommodating space, a first cover, a second cover, and a holding member. The first substrate is accommodated in the first accommodation space. The second substrate is accommodated in the second accommodation space. The first cover covers at least a part of the first substrate. The second cover covers at least a part of the second substrate. As the holding member, the first cover and the second cover are held.
Then, the holding member has a harness guide that guides the harness.
Further, the first accommodation space is formed by the first cover and the holding member.

According to such a configuration, since the substrate holding unit can hold a plurality of types (first substrate, second substrate) of substrates, compared with the case where one substrate is housed and held in one substrate case. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case.
Further, the first accommodation space in which the first substrate is accommodated is formed of a first cover and a holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover. That is, a part of the wall surface that divides the first accommodation space is composed of a holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover. As a result, the holding member functions as a holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover, and a wall member forming a part of the wall surface for partitioning the first accommodation space. Therefore, as compared with the case where the holding member and the wall member are separately provided, the number of parts is reduced, the efficiency of the board case mounting work can be improved, and the space of the board case is saved. It becomes possible to plan.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the mounting work of the board case and save the space of the board case.

Further, the holding member has a harness guide that guides a harness connected to at least one connection portion of the first substrate or the second substrate. As a result, in the case of reuse, maintenance, etc., when the holding member is removed from the game machine in a state where the first substrate or the second substrate is accommodated in the first accommodation space or the second accommodation space, the holding member is connected to these substrates. With the harness guided by the harness guide, the holding member and the harness can be removed together. Therefore, the work efficiency at the time of disassembling the game machine is improved. Further, since the external force applied to the harness can be borne by the harness guide, it is possible to prevent such an external force from being applied to the connecting portion of the substrate and damaging the connecting portion.

(2) The harness guide includes an insertion portion (for example, an insertion portion 8142, etc.).
The holding member includes an opening into which the insertion portion can be inserted (for example, a harness guide holding portion 8130 or the like).
The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the harness guide is locked to the holding member by inserting the insertion portion into the opening.

According to the invention of (2), the harness guide is locked to the holding member by inserting the insertion portion of the harness guide into the opening of the holding member, so that the harness guide can be attached as needed. It becomes. As a result, when it is necessary to guide the harness, a harness guide is attached to guide the harness, which makes it easier to handle the harness and improves work efficiency. When it is not necessary to guide the harness, the harness guide By not attaching, it is possible to save space in the board case.

The first to tenth embodiments have been described above. In the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, etc.). Further, in the first to tenth embodiments, each configuration of each embodiment can be combined with each configuration of other embodiments as long as there is no contradiction.

The first to tenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, but only specific examples are illustrated, and the present invention is not particularly limited. Specific configurations of each means and the like are appropriately redesigned. It is possible. In addition, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most preferable effects arising from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned detailed description, the characteristic parts have been mainly described so that the present invention can be understood more easily. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the detailed description described above, and can be applied to other embodiments, and the scope of application thereof is diverse. In addition, the terms and usages used in the present specification are used to accurately explain the present invention, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. Further, those skilled in the art will find it easy to infer other configurations, systems, methods and the like included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described in the present specification. Therefore, the description of the scope of claims must be regarded as including an equal structure without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical content and essence of this application by the Japan Patent Office, general public institutions, and engineers belonging to this technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terms, or technical terms. It is intended to be able to make a prompt judgment through a thorough investigation. Therefore, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be evaluated by the statement of claims. Further, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the peculiar effect of the present invention, it is desired that the interpretation is made with full consideration of the documents and the like already disclosed.

The detailed description described above includes processing performed on the computer. The above explanations and expressions are described for the purpose of being understood by those skilled in the art most efficiently. In the present specification, each process used to derive the result of 1 should be understood as a self-consistent process. Further, in each process, transmission / reception, recording, etc. of an electric or magnetic signal are performed. In the processing in each processing, such signals are represented by bits, values, symbols, letters, terms, numbers, etc., but it should be noted that these are used merely for convenience of explanation. There is a need. In addition, the processing in each processing may be described in terms common to human behavior, but the processing described in the present specification is, in principle, executed by various devices. In addition, other configurations required to perform each process are self-evident from the above description.

1 Game machine 8000 Board holding unit 8100 Bracket 8130 Harness guide holding part 8140 Harness guide 8142 Inserting part 8160 Hook 8170 Fixing hole 8205 Sub relay board accommodation space 8210 Sub relay board cover 8305 Sub control board accommodation space 8310 Sub control board base 8320 Sub control board cover G Cabinet G2a Opening SS1 Sub relay board SS10 Connection SS2 Sub control board

Claims (2)

A first substrate and a second substrate, a substrate holding unit capable of holding the first substrate and the second substrate, and a substrate holding unit.
A gaming machine including a harness connected to at least one connection portion of the first substrate or the second substrate.
The substrate holding unit is
A first accommodation space in which the first substrate is accommodated, a second accommodation space in which the second substrate is accommodated, and
A first cover that covers at least a part of the first substrate,
A second cover that covers at least a part of the second substrate,
A holding member for holding the first cover and the second cover, and
With
The holding member has a harness guide that guides the harness.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first accommodation space is formed by the first cover and the holding member. The harness guide includes an insertion portion and
The holding member includes an opening into which the insertion portion can be inserted.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the harness guide is locked to the holding member by inserting the insertion portion into the opening.

Images